Home

Setting up and using - Agilent Technologies

1. Plate Pierce PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible from robot Human robot No Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes Ay Robot Teachpoint for robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No New device Device has west side BCR No Delete device Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No Initialize all devices PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station prope Profile name Plate Pierce Profile 3 Expand the PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station properties group If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 141 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the PlatePierce on page 138 Opening PlatePierce s device Opening diagnostics software on properties page page 105 Adding the device Adding devices on page 107 Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 Using the PlatePierce task Setting Pierce task parameters on page 203 Using PlatePierce Diagnostics PlatePierce User Guide Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf About this topic This topic presents the workflow for c
2. _ Profile Settings Access profile v Access2 communication settings Ethernet F Create a new profile Device ID Create a copy of this profile Serial con Rename this profile O seria OM Delete this profile Update this profile Initialize this profile Spin profile selection Spin Profile1 Select the desired Profile Settings Click Update this profile to save the settings Close the dialog box 156 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about The next step The workflow this topic belongs to Opening Access2 Diagnostics Setting up a device Managing profiles and settings VSpin with Access2 tasks Using VSpin with Access2 Diagnostics See Setting the VSpin with Access2 device properties on page 156 Workflow for configuring the VSpin with Access2 on page 154 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Access2 User Guide Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters on page 216 Access2 User Guide Setting the VSpin with Access2 device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the VSpin with Access2 device properties To set the VSpin with Access2 device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the Access2 generic properties Teachpoirt fo
3. IWorks Device Driver Programming Interface PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station VWorks Device Driver Interface Microplate Seal Piercer VCode Barcode Print and Apply Station Microplate Barcode Labeler Velocity11 Robot 3 Axis Robot VHooks Integration Interface VPrep Pipetting System VWorks Hooks Interface Vertical Pipetting Station VSpin Microplate Centrifuge Microplate Centrifuge VStack Labware Stacker Labware Stacker New contact information Documentation feedback documentation automation agilent com Technical Support 1 800 979 4811 or 1 408 345 8011 service automation agilent com Customer Service 1 866 428 9811 or 1 408 345 8356 orders automation agilent com European Service 44 0 1763853638 euroservice automation agilent com Web www agilent com lifesciences automation Letter to our Customers 2 Agilent Technologies Inc Automation Solutions Division Table of Contents VCode User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Who should read this guide 1 ees 2 About Velocity11 user SUIdeS 2 ees 3 Supported software verSiONS 000 ce ee 5 Finding your software VerSiONS orat araoa TEETER EEE TEE es 6 Reporting VWorks problemS 0 0 0 ee eee 7 Chapter 2 WWorks overview 9 Basic d Scription siwa Bont At a ae halt toi Os tA A nO eS a et lente ed a a tein ech 10 Instruments you can use w
4. To move a plate 1 Create a process that has a Load and an Unload task as shown in the following example i a 1536 Greiner Hin 3 4 Low Volume oef HE Black 783092 fee a called plate 1536 Greiner Low Unload from plate Load into plate Volume Black storage device storage device 783092 called plate 2 Select either the Load or Unload task and click Edit location groups The inventory editor opens 3 Click the Inventory Management tab and note the device cassette and slot locations of the plates that you want to move In this example the plates will be moved from PlateHub cassette 1 slots 5 8 4 Click the Location Groups tab and create a location group for these plates Note The plates do not need to be in adjacent slots for them to be in a location group Saved Locations Location Members Select a plate group device cassette slot PlateHub PlateHub PlateHub PlateHub e Ree e UN 10 11 12 13 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 325 VWorks User Guide Return to the Inventory Management tab and note the device cassette and slot numbers for the slots that you want to move the plates to In this example the plates will be moved to PlateHub2 cassette 1 slots 1 4 Click the Location Groups tab and create a location group for these slots Saved Locations Location Members or devie cassette st platehub2 1 to move platehu
5. Because you can have more than one pipette process in a protocol you must link the Pipette Process task to the pipette process by setting the Pipette Process parameters Pipette Process 1 on VPrep1 To set the Pipette Process parameters 1 In the Protocol Editor window add a Pipette Process task to the protocol and then select it in the protocol sequence 2 Inthe Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select the pipette process that you want to use for this pipetting task Task Parameters Use pipet process Process 1 3 Ifthe pipette process is for a replicate pipetting series so that the same plate can be used over and over again select the Use single instance of plates check box in the Task Setting page of the plate icon If the plate is a tip box when this option is selected the tips will be picked up and the tip box will be moved from the VPrep At the end of the pipetting series the tip box will be returned to the VPrep and the tips replaced in it Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 227 VWorks User Guide Associating the link Because you can have more than one VPrep on a lab automation icon system you must link each pipette process link icon with one or more VPreps that you want the pipette task to be able to use You do this by setting the parameter for the pipette process link icon To link a Pipette Process task to a pipette process 1 Inthe Pipette Process Editor select th
6. Before you operate the Multidrop make sure it is properly initialized 444 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Terms defined Operating the Multidrop The Multidrop has priming and purging functions that can be controlled through Multidrop Diagnostics Priming Priming moves liquid through the dispensing system into waste to make sure that there is no air in the lines Purging Purging moves liquid back into the liquid cassettes To initialize the Multidrop l 3 In the Profile Settings group box select the appropriate Multidrop profile from the list box If you want to prime the fluid lines when you initialize the Multidrop select the Prime check box and enter the volume of liquid with which you want to prime Click Initialize To fill a plate l Refer to the Multidrop User Manual for information about preparing to fill a plate In the Dispense Program group box select the number of wells in the plate If you want to prime the Multidrop enter the volume of liquid to prime with in the Prime volume text box In the Dispense volume text box enter the volume of liquid that you want to dispense into each well To shake the plate after the dispense enter a value into the Shake time text box To purge the lines after the dispense select the Purge x times when complete check box and enter the number of times to purge If you want to return all liquid the value o
7. From the list box select the COM port that connects the PlatePierce to the controlling computer In the Pierce pressure field enter the pressure you want the PlatePierce to use when piercing the plate seal This number depends on what kind of seal was used Click Save and then close the dialog box 140 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices For information about Opening PlatePierce Diagnostics The next step The workflow this topic belongs to Adding the device Using the PlatePierce task Using PlatePierce Diagnostics Different seal types See Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the PlatePierce on page 138 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Pierce task parameters on page 203 PlatePierce User Guide PlatePierce User Guide Setting the PlatePierce device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the PlatePierce device properties To set the PlatePierce device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the PlatePierce s generic properties Device List x Device Properties Hef System E General Device name Device type El Beckman Multimek Pipettor 5 multimek E Human Robot Human robot E PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station Plate Pierce B A Velocity11 Robot
8. If Then You do not want to place a label Select No Label and return to step 2 on this side of the plate You want to define a bar code Select Use this label and continue label and place it on this side of with step 4 the plate You want to print a label thatis Select Use side label and continue the same as a label already set with step 4 Ep orangiicnelde aiiiepia All other parameters on the page are ignored 4 Inthe Format to use text box type a number that corresponds to the bar code format that you want 185 186 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide 5 In the Number of Fields text box type the number of fields that you want to print on the bar code The maximum number of fields you can printis limited by the number of fields in the format you selected For example if the format specifies three fields you cannot print a bar code with four fields In this example if you do enter the number four into the text box the last field is ignored Click in the Field text box for the first field that you want to use and enter one or more of the following types of information that you want to print in that position on the label If you want to print Then Text field that does not Type the text in the text box increment A field that is identicalto To use this option your VCode must have an a bar code field on attached bar code
9. To make an instrument accessible to the human robot 1 From the Device List in the Device Manager select the instrument s you want to be accessible to the human robot 2 Inthe Device Properties list double click in the field next to Device or location is accessible from robot robot s name 3 Select Yes Device Properties E General Device name MMM Device type Beckman Multimek Pipettor B Location Frame 1 Location is accessible From robot RobotMe Ly Teachpoint For robot RobotMe No l Approach height mm Yes Le Allowed prohibited labware Location Frame 1 has south side BCR No Location Frame 1 has west side BCR No Location Frame 1 has north side BCR No Location Frame 1 has east side BCR No Labware lt not assigned gt E Location Frame 2 Location is accessible from robot RobotMe No Approach height mm 9 gt SE T TEER eT Pe For information about See Adding the human robot as a device Using the human robot ina process The workflow that this procedure belongs to Adding devices on page 107 Using the human robot in a protocol on page 124 Workflow for configuring the human robot on page 122 124 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Using the human robot in a protocol About this topic Procedures This topic describes an example in which a human robot is used to move a set of plates to two locations on a Mu
10. About this topic This topic introduces important components used by VWorks the protocol file the device file the profile the teachpoint file the labware database the liquid library database and the user database The topic describes what these components are and how they work together to operate your lab automation system It is important to understand the way each of the main configuration components in VWorks relate Loading some components automatically loads others For example loading a protocol file loads a device file What you should know Definitions components Component Protocol file Device file Profile Teachpoint file Labware database Liquid library database User database Definition A file that contains instructions for performing a run A file that contains configuration information for configured devices A collection of settings stored in the Windows registry that manages how you connect to devices A file that saves your teachpoint settings Labware definitions and classes stored in the Windows registry Pipetting settings setup for different liquid types stored in the Windows registry List of user accounts privileges and passwords stored in the Windows registry Refer to the table below for information about VWorks configuration See About protocol files on page 162 About bar code reading and tracking on page 292 About device
11. If you create a program through the ELx405 you will not be able to access it through Bio Tek Active X in VWorks Conversely if you create a program through the Bio Tek Active X you will not be able to access it through the built in keypad You cannot create linked programs using Bio Tek Washer Active X in VWorks Instead you can add two or more consecutive Bio Tek Washer tasks to a protocol To set the basic properties l In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar click Show Programs to open the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics dialog box From the Program list box of the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics dialog box select a program From the Select washer to use list box select the model of ELx405 that you have IMPORTANT If you select the wrong model VWorks will freeze when you run the program through either Bio Tek Diagnostics or a VWorks protocol From the Plate type list box select the type of plate From the Program type list box select the type of program to run For more information about types of programs see the Bio Tek ELx405 Washer Operator s Guide From the Buffer valve list box select the valve corresponding to the reagent that you want to use Click Save and close the dialog box 394 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using VWorks User Guide Creating a program Running a program You can create a program which is a named collection of parameter settings from the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics
12. No profile required Setting the vacuum station device properties on page 145 Workflow for configuring the VCode on page 146 Workflow for configuring the VCode on page 146 Creating a Vici Multiport Valve profile on page 497 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve device properties on page 498 Workflow for configuring the VPrep on page 148 Workflow for configuring the VSpin on page 151 Workflow for configuring the VSpin with Access2 on page 154 Workflow for configuring the VStack on page 157 Workflow for configuring the VStack on page 157 Workflow for configuring Waste on page 159 Creating a WellMate profile on page 505 Setting the WellMate device properties on page 506 No profile required Setting the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties on page 515 112 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Setting generic device properties Profiles The workflow that this procedure belongs to See Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 About profiles on page 103 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting the generic properties for a device About this topic This topic describes how to set the following device properties that devices have in common Q General Q Teachpoint U Barcode Properties specific for each
13. VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 mB w N Related information For information about Setting up devices Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters Using FlexiSpense M Diagnostics Creating a FlexiSpense M profile on page 429 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting the FlexiSpense M device properties on page 430 See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Flexispense M task parameters on page 431 Using Flexispense M Diagnostics on page 433 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using 429 VWorks User Guide Creating a FlexiSpense M profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a FlexiSpense M profile Before you start Before you can create a profile you need to add the FlexiSpense M to the device manager Procedure To create a FlexiSpense M profile 1 Open Flexispence Diagnostics Flexispense Diagnostics v3 0 0 Firmware unknown Profiles Processes Profile Management Profile name Profile Settings COM port 1 Flexispence profile Prime retries 0 Program timeout ms 0 Create a copy of this profile Rename this profile Delete this profile Update this profile Initialize this profile Click Create a new profile enter a name for the device in the Create Profile dialog box and click OK 3 Choose the
14. loaded Click Start to run the simulator Review the inventory editor to make sure that the plates listed in the inventory match the plates actually in the device 5 Click Simulation is on to turn off the simulator Related information For information about Moving plates out of a storage device Moving plates between storage devices See Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 321 VWorks User Guide Moving stored plates out of the system About this topic This topic describes how to remove plates that are in a storage device from the system Removing plates from the system is more than just unloading them from the storage device It means removing the plates from the lab automation system as well as removing the plate identifications from the record of the plates in the system that VWorks keeps Who should read Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX this incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before you start Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 Ways to remove There are two ways to remove plates from a plate storage device plates Q Robotically Q Manually Removing plates To move plates from a storage device robotically robotically 1 Create a protocol like the one shown in the following screenshot Tes Veli gt
15. resisa manea a ea ee eee 429 Setting the Flexispense M device properties 0 000 eee eee 430 Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters 0 000 ce ees 431 Using Flexispense M Diagnostics 0 0 ccc ee ee 433 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using 437 Workflow for configuring the Multidrop 2 0 00 aa 438 Creating a Multidrop profile 0 0 ee ee 439 Setting the Multidrop device properties n 2 aae es 440 Setting MultiDrop task parameters 2 0 es 441 Using Multidrop Diagnostics 2 saaa aa es 443 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using 447 Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent 0 000 eee eee eee 448 Creating a Multiskan Ascent profile 0 0 00 cc ee ee 449 Setting the Multiskan Ascent device properties 2 000 eee ee eee 450 Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters 0 000 eee eee eee 452 Using Multiskan Ascent DiagnosticS 20 0 000 ee es 454 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using 457 Workflow for configuring the Nanodrop 2 000 eee eee ee eee 458 Creating a Nanodrop profile 2 0 0 ec ee eee 459 Setting the Nanodrop device properties 000 eee ee es 461 Setting Nanodrop task parameters 2 0 ce ee 462 Using Nanodrop DiagnosticS 0 0 cee eee 463 Chapter 25 QEFill setting up and using 465 Workflow for configuring the QFill
16. 11 MicroWash 384 11 MicroWash 96 11 Tip Box 384d30 11 Tip Box 384d40 11 Tip Box 96d200 A v MAM 358 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide About the Labware In the Labware Classes sub page if you select a type of plate in the Classes sub page labware entry box on the left the far right hand column displays the classes that it is a member of Labware Entries Please select a labware entry from the list below in order to view and edit its properties 384 ABGene deepwell 384 ABGene short well plate 384 Matrix clear polystyrene 384 REMP micro tube rack 384 REMP square well 96 ABGene deepwell block 96 ABGene tube rack TRIPOS 96 Matrix clear polystyrene 96 Matrix tube rack 96 Micronics tube rack ALSB Costar 384 black flatbottom Costar 384 polypro round bottom Costar 96 well plate Falcon 384 clear bottom Falcon 384 clear polystyrene User Defined Labware Classes Matrix 96 well Block Palypro All labware classes Labware classes that this labware MJ Research 384 well plate entry belongs to New plate Renamed Intermediate Height TipBoxes Polyfiltronics 384 filter plate TallPlates Uses Filter Platepad Uses Standard Platepad Uses Vacuum Platepad Velocity11 Labware Test plate Tip Box Lid 11 Autofilling Reservoir 384 11 Autofilling Reservoir 96 11 Manual Reservoir 384 11 MicroWash 384 11 MicroWash 96 11 Tip Box 384d30 Vil i Box 384d4
17. Bar code Readers Profle name Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No E VSpin with Access2 properties 3 Expand the VSpin with Access2 properties group 4 Double click in the field next to Profile name and select the correct profile from the list 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 157 VWorks User Guide For information about See The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the VSpin with Access2 on page 154 Opening Access2 device Adding devices on page 107 properties page Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Managing profiles and settings Access2 User Guide Using VSpin with Access2 Access2 User Guide Diagnostics VSpin with Access2 tasks Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters on page 216 Workflow for configuring the VStack About this topic Workflow This topic presents the workflow for configuring the VStack in VWorks The VStack is a microplate stacker used in lab automation systems to dispense and receive plates It holds deepwell and shallow well plates pin tools tipboxes and lids Typically several VStacks are used ina single lab automation system Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2
18. Before you can send an email from VWorks Q The VWorks computer must be connected to a network with internet access Q The outgoing email server must be set up on the system s computer To set up the outgoing email server 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe VWorks Options dialog box click the Email Setup tab 3 Inthe Mail Server Setup group box enter the name of your SMTP server name outgoing email server 4 Ifthe server requires a user name and password a Select the Server requires authentication check box b Enter the User name and Password that you use to access email on the network Related information Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide This information only needs to be set up once provided the email account remains active All email sent from VWorks is authenticated using this account For more information about See Sending a bug report Sending a bug report on page 518 375 376 Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide 377 VWorks User Guide AliQuot setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The AliQuot is a low volume liquid dispenser for the delivery of reagents reaction mixes cells beads chemical solutions and liquids into 96 384 and 1536 well microplates that can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This cha
19. Identify the VStack on the network See the VStack User Guide fora procedure 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the VStack device properties on page 158 158 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 VStack tasks Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters on page 193 Using VStack Diagnostics VStack User Guide Setting the VStack device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to set the VStack device properties Before you start you need to add the VStack to the device manager and verify communications To set the VStack device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set VStack s generic properties x Device Properties Be em E General H S Mal Device name YS5tackl v M Device type YStack Modular Plate Stacker bot Approach height mm 9 7 velocty11 Allowed prohibited labware my Robe E Teachpoints jle From robot Human robot No jle From robot Robot Ye robot Robot le Readers has south side BCR EEE nas east side BCR k Modular Plate Stacker properties Profile name Stack height mm 660 Expand the VStack Modular Plate Stacker properties group Double click in the field next to Profile name
20. Related information This topic describes how to set the Envision device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Envision s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the Envision device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the Envision generic device properties evice List x Device Properties g System E General a Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name H Bio Tek Washer Device type Genetix Aliquot H E Labcyte Echo550 5 j Perkin Elmer Envision Reader Allowed prohi E Teachpoints Envision Perkin Elmer Envision Reader Approach height mm 9 ibited labware Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes E A Velocity11 Robot Teachpoint for robot Robot Device is accessible from robot Robat2 No E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No Device has we st side BCR No Device has north side BCR No New Device E Perkin Elmer Envision Reader propertie Delete Device Profile name Envision profile Device Diagnostics Device has east side BCR No Expand the Perkin Elmer Envision Reader properties group If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box 5 Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about Setting Envision generic devi
21. Robot motion events as they happen This applies only to the protocol log file Log pipettor debug messages Event messages that are generated by VPrep pipettors This applies only to the protocol log file Log measurement readings Environmental values as they are recorded in real time This applies only to the protocol log file In the File Settings group box a Inthe Max number of each log file to maintain text box type the maximum number of log files that you want to store IMPORTANT After this number has been reached each new log file replaces the oldest existing log file b Select one or more of the following options as needed Log options Create new logs for every run Append timestamps to log file names Description A separate log file is created for every run If the check box is cleared each run appends data to the same log file and a new log file is created when VWorks is started This affects all log files The date and time of the run is appended to the name of the log file This affects all log files c Click the ellipsis button for a log file or folder LJ d Navigate to the folder to which you want to save the log file e Click Save In the VWorks Options dialog box click OK Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 51 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The database connection string Setting up th
22. Setting the Remp CSP device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set Remp CSP s device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Remp CSP s current configuration The device property settings are saved in the device file To set the Remp CSP s device properties Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the generic device properties Works Untitled dev Ol x File Edit View Tools Help 2 bel Gil x H3 ara o 2 E Loson Z compie Q son JJ Peuse BY sir Progress Pre Protocal Editor Protocol Editor Pipette Process Editor Post Protocal Editor Device Manager e ist x Device Properties gf System E General a amp Remp CSP Device name Remp amp mm Device type Remp CSP E A Velocith4 Robot Approach height mm 9 My Roboti Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible from robot Robot1 Teachpoint for robot Robot1 E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR Device has north side BCR Device has east side BCR Initialize all devices Remp CSP properties Profile name For Help press F1 3 Expand the Remp CSP properties group 4 Double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box Note Profile names match the device names created in Remp CSP software Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Sa
23. Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek on page 390 Setting the Bio Tek task parameters on page 392 397 VWorks User Guide Echo 550 Setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Echo 550 transfers drops of liquid between microplates for compound reformatting applications This chapter describes how to configure the Labcyte Echo 550 set the Labcyte Echo 550 task parameters and use Echo 550 Diagnostics 398 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Echo 550 in VWorks The Labcyte Echo 550 device is configured as three parts in VWorks Q Labcyte Echo 550 LI Labcyte Echo 550 source stage Q Labcyte Echo 550 destination stage All three components must be added as devices in the device manager When configuring the Labcyte Echo 550 device you first create a profile for the Echo 550 and then configure each stage as a child of the Echo 550 Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 COP NN SO ot Pe ws page 403 Related information For information about Setting up devices Setting Echo 550 task parameters Using Echo 550 Diagnostics Creating an Echo 550 profile on page 399 Settin
24. The name appears in the Current Envision Profile list box 414 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using VWorks User Guide Current Envision Profile New Profile Save profile as Rename profile Delete profile To set the profile attributes 1 Select the name of the Envision device profile that you want to edit or modify in the Current Envision Profile list box 2 Enter the name of the computer that controls the Envision device into the Server name field 3 Inthe Authentication Information group box enter the username name of the domain and the password for the user account on the Envision s computer that you want to use Server Selection Server name Authentication Information Username Domain Password 4 Click Save profile Related information For information about See The next step Setting the generic properties for a device The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the Envision belongs to on page 412 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Opening Envision Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting Envision task parameters Setting Envision task parameters on page 416 Using Envision Diagnostics Using Envision Diagnostics on page 417 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using 415 VWorks User Guide Setting the Envision device properties About this topic Procedure
25. This tells VWorks the communication pathway to the instrument Q Setting the device properties This provides VWorks with additional information about the current configuration of the instrument These settings are stored in the device file Where to find There are three types of procedures associated with each device device associated Q Configuring the device in VWorks procedures U Setting the device s tasks parameters Q Using the device s diagnostics software The procedures for these types of tasks are in different locations depending on how the device is controlled in VWorks Use the tables below to locate the information for a specific device Configuring devices Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 119 VWorks User Guide The following table shows where to find procedures for configuring devices If the device is A Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in A non Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in Any device controlled by a driver plug in Setting task parameters Then the procedure for configuring the device is found in This chapter Its own chapter within this user guide Device Driver User Guide The following table shows where to find procedures for setting task parameters for devices If the device is A Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in A non Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in Any
26. defined 377 deleting 315 versus plate group 326 log file bar code 48 189 importing into Excel 57 pipette 47 protocol 47 52 searching in 76 setting options for 49 types 46 Log measurement readings check box 53 Log toolbar 14 63 75 adding a note 76 adding delimiters 77 clearing 77 message display 49 options for 75 log txt file about 47 adding a note to 76 logging in to VWorks 28 logging out of VWorks 79 Loop pipette task Index 531 VWorks User Guide defined 248 JavaScript properties 284 setting parameters 248 lower plate at VCode property 350 M Main toolbar 14 manifold of MicroWash tray 265 Matrix WellMate see WellMate maximum robot handling speed property 350 menus Edit 19 File 19 Help 19 Tools 19 View 19 MicroWash tray 264 265 Mix pipette task defined 249 JavaScript properties 282 setting parameters 249 mixing cycles 249 mixing volume 249 Molecular Devices FLIPRTETRA see FLIPRTETRA Molecular Devices instruments with SoftMax Pro see Softmax Pro Mount Dismount task defined 200 setting parameters 201 Multidrop device properties setting 440 diagnostics using 443 profile for creating 439 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 438 Multidrop task defined 441 setting parameters 442 Multimek device properties setting 109 profile for creating 109 setting parameters 169 supported instrument 11 Multiskan Ascent device
27. on page 81 Q Setting up devices on page 101 Q Creating a protocol basics on page 161 26 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Workflow for preparing a run About this topic This topic lists the procedures that you need to follow before performing arun in VWorks Workflow The general workflow for starting VWorks and preparing fora run is given in the following table Step Topic 1 Starting VWorks on page 27 2 Logging in to VWorks and changing your password on page 28 3 Opening a protocol in VWorks on page 33 4 Setting general options on page 34 5 Setting general errorhandling options on page 38 6 Notification of errors by email on page 40 7 Setting protocol options on page 41 8 Setting pre protocol rules on page 43 9 Setting protocol rules on page 44 10 Setting log options on page 49 11 Adding an alarm on page 53 12 Using start finish protocol scripts on page 55 13 Printing a protocol on page 57 14 Testing auxiliary bar code readers on page 58 Related information For information about See Performing a run in VWorks Performing a run on page 59 Starting VWorks About this topic Starting VWorks Related information Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 27 VWorks User Guide This topic describes how to start VWorks To start VWorks l Make sure that everyone
28. 0 ee ce eee 351 Defining VPrep well properties 2 2 Erna eaa E eee 354 mering amima c Fes cce b ois aie Bo eects Ber atlas Se ee Wk SuSE Shs 356 Defining labware cClaSS S 1 ee ee 357 Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions 361 About the liquid library editor 2 0 ee ee 362 Opening the liquid library editor esa traa porekao ee es 363 Creating a liquid ClaSS 2 eee 364 Performing an accuracy calibration 2 0 ce es 366 V vi Table of Contents VCode User Guide Chapter 15 Administrator procedures 369 About user accounts and privileges 1 0 2 0c es 370 Adding and deleting a user account s a sasaaa ae ee ees 371 Moving or sending a registry file nannaa aaa ee 372 Setting up Emal s sane deeds E a chewed Dane oe hates won eee 374 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using 377 Workflow for configuring the AliQUOt 2 2 es 378 Creating an AliQuot profile 0 a d a e eee 379 Setting AliQuot device properties reri p Eora i ee eee 382 Setting the AliQuot task parameters 0 000 ee eee 384 Using AliQuot DiagnosticS 1 0 es 385 Perrorming a TUNE St y e rarae Soe ee oe waite eae w Seed ate eee ate eas Be niga eee 386 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using 389 Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek 0 000 ce ee ee es 390 Setting the Bio Tek device properties 2 0 ee 390 Setting the Bio Tek tas
29. 0 eee ees 95 Installing and starting DHCP server software 0 0 00 eee ee ees 96 Turning off Ethernet firewall SoftWare oa rer irere iip Ura es 98 Uninstalling VWOK S ie eper rapea ea e aa a E o a ws Se Sad 99 Chapter 6 Setting up devices 101 ADOUTAEVICES eni a fet odd a e a a E a a e A TE E ies TE aoe ok 102 About profiles is a oe SBP ee a ee ee ee E 103 About diagnostics sonw e sceri arerp eenen ee ee 104 Opening diagnostics software a aa saaa e ee es 105 Workflow for setting up dEviCES eero ta PREE DUOPE ee ee 106 Adding Jove scnien eat coed 86 Bate ae Gla aes Gi ae ae Ge oes 4 107 Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device 200 108 Setting the generic properties fora device 1 112 Loading a device file ee ees 115 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 117 About configuring Velocity11 deviceS 1 saasaa es 118 Workflow for configuring the delid station 1 0 0 eee es 120 Setting the delid station device properties 2 aaa ee eee 121 Workflow for configuring the human robot 0 000 ee es 122 Setting the human robot device properties 1 2 aaaea es 123 Using the human robot in a protocol 2 2 es 124 Workflow for configuring the lid hotel 0 0 cee ee 126 Creating a lid hotel profile annann aaaea eee 127 Setting the lid hotel device properties 1 0 0 0 ee 128 Setting the lid hotel sto
30. 9000 eceo Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 251 VWorks User Guide 5 Ifyou want the tips to touch one or more sides of the plate wells a Select the Enable tip touch check box b Type a value for the tip touch rise height This is the height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells c Type a value for the tip touch horizontal distance When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want the tips to touch harder increase this value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value d Inthe Number of sides to touch text box type a value for the number of sides of the wells that you want the tips to touch In the Plate to mix list box select the type of labware or device to mix in For more information about See Configuring a pipette process Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Configuring a VPrep shelf Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 Other pipette task parameters Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 252 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Pump Reagent pipette task parameters About this topic Pump Reagent task define
31. An array of pairs of integers Task parameters Plate name Dispense acceleration Blowout volume Liquid class list box Post dispense volume Quadrants diagram Comments The name of the plate The rate of increase in velocity before the Dispense Velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The volume of air to blow out when the tips are in the liquid This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume The name of the liquid class The volume of air to blow out when the tips are out of the liquid A quadrant is an evenly spaced array of locations that is addressable by the tips ona pipette head A 96 well head can dispense into a 96 well plate four quadrants of a 384 well plate and 16 quadrants of a 1536 well plate A 384 well head can dispense into a 384 well plate or the four quadrants of a 1536 well plate Property task retract task tipOffset task tipTouch task tipTouchHorizontalDi stance task tiptouchRiseHeight task tipTouchSides Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 281 Data type Task parameters Float Retract distance Float Distance from well bottom Boolean Enable tip touching Float Tip touch horizontal distance Float Tip touch rise height Integer Number of sides to touch VWorks User Guide Comments The distance that the tips should move upwards per unit volume
32. C VWorks Workspace docs helpsystem PDF file of the user guide C VWorks Workspace docs The VWorks user manual in PDF format is located on the software CD ROM as a file that you need to copy onto your computer It is not automatically installed with the software Note You can also download the latest version of all the documentation from our website at www velocity11 com support support html Online help The online help is the best format to use when you are working at the computer and when you want to perform fast or advanced searches for information It is also the only format in color To open the online help 1 Do one of the following Use the shortcut installed to your desktop by the help installation program or Open the help from within the VWorks application by clicking the help button Main features The online help includes a navigation pane content pane and navigation buttons 3 4 Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide Navigation pane Contents Introduction Who should read this guide About Velocity11 user guides Supported software versions Finding your software versions Reporting VWorks problems VWorks overview Basic description Instruments you can use with VwWorks Overview of the VWorks user interface Showing and hiding tabs and toolbars in VWorks Relationships of configuration VWworks components Preparing for a run Workflow for preparing a run Starting VWorks Logging in to VWorks
33. Click OK The file path appears in the Save results field If you want to include the time the plate was read in the file name select Include timestamp in file name If you want to include the plate number in the file name select Include plate number in file name 10 Optionally enter any comments in the Notes field For information about See Configuring the Multiskan Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent on page 448 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using Multiskan Diagnostics Using Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics on page 454 454 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using VWorks User Guide Using Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to load and read a plate on a Multiskan Ascent and to manage its profiles Procedures To load and read a plate 1 Open Multiskan Ascent Device Diagnostics 2 Click the Control tab Multiskan Ascent 2 0 0 xi Control Profiles Measure Plate Plate Agitation Time s On period s 0 Off period s 10 Frequency Hz 1 File names Motes O verbose 3 Place the plate you want to read on the Multiskan Ascent loading platform Click Move plate in If you want to shake the plate set the Plate Agitation parameters a Enter the total amount of time in second
34. My Computer in My Network File name Testo ata txt Places Files of type Text Documents txt gt Cancel b In the new dialog box that opens check the list of names of the columns of the text file and the total number of rows in the file In the following screenshot the first six columns of the plug in file are repeated for each side of the plate FileReaderDIl xi Field 1 South Field 2 South2 Field 3 South3 Field 4 Southt Field 5 Souths Field 6 South There are 19 lines c Click OK If the file is not the one you intend to use you can cancel the run at the next step if needed 5 Inthe Number of Cycles dialog box type in the number of times that you want to execute the protocol during the run i Number of times to run protocol What happens after a run starts Related information 6 Chapter 4 Performing a run 63 VWorks User Guide Click OK The run starts If User Message tasks are included in the protocol you are prompted to respond to them as they execute If there are no User Message tasks to remind you to empty liquid waste containers and refill liquid source containers set your own reminders using lab timers After you start the run the following events occur Q Q QO The Start button becomes unavailable and the Pause button becomes available Log messages on the Log toolbar indicate the start of the run Also Log files record events
35. N Transfer from one column to N columns ON 1 Transfer from N columns to one column Will mixing in the destination plate be performed after each transfer Yes O No Will additional operations be performed after each transfer No additional operations will be performed Tips will be washed Wash plate O Tips will be changed Tipbox H i Cancel a Choose the type of transfer 1 N type of transfer removes fluid from a reservoir and dispenses it to N columns or quadrants of a destination plate N 1 type of transfer removes fluid from N columns or quadrants and dispenses it to a single location such as waste b Choose whether or not to perform mixing after each transfer c Ifyou are washing tips select Tips will be washed and then choose the Wash plate from the list box d Ifyou are changing tips select Tips will be changed and then choose the Tip box from the list box Note Tip changing can only be performed if you are using a disposable tip head Click Next to go to step 2 of the Fill Plate Wizard and assign source and destination locations and volume to transfer 242 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Fill Plate Wizard Eg Step 2 Specify the transfer selections and volume Specify the column to be aspirated From for plate Diluent Reservoir 1 selection column 1 Source Specify the maximum volume 100 Maximum v
36. Opening diagnostics software on page 105 The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Using the lid hotel tasks Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 128 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting the lid hotel device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the device properties for the lid hotel Procedure To set the lid hotel s device properties 1 Open the lid hotels Device Properties page 2 Set the lid hotel s generic properties Ee System Eig Beckman Multimek Pipettor E General Device name Device type multimek Delid Station Vacuum gt DelidStation x Device Properties Lid Hotel Lid Hotel Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware Human Robot E Bar code Readers A Human robot Device has south side BCR No E ff Lid Hotel Device has west side BCR No Lid Hotel Device has north side BCR No E A Velocity11 Robot Device has east side BCR No A Robot Lid Hotel properties Profile name LidHotel profile New device Delete device Initialize all devices Expand the Lid Hotel properties group If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related informa
37. Setting Seal task parameters on page 212 Setting Pierce task parameters on page 203 No task parameters Setting Load Unload and Incubate at storage device task parameters on page 198 172 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide For this device or devices StoreX IO Pad Teleshake High speed 1536 Teleshake Standard Thermo Labsystems Multiskan Ascent Reader Ultramark Vacuum Station VCode 3k Bar Code Print and Apply Station VCode pre 2003 Bar Code Print and Apply Station Velocity11 Robot Vici Multiport Valve VPrep Precision Pipetting Station VSpin Integrated Microplate Centrifuge VSpin with Access2 VStack Modular Plate Stacker VStack Modular Plate Stacker Old ST6 Style Waste And this task No tasks Teleshake High Speed Teleshake Multiskan Ascent Ultramark Vacuum Apply Label Apply Label No tasks Vici Valve Pipette Process Centrifuge VSpin with Access2 Downstack Upstack Waste Find parameter information here Setting Teleshake task parameters on page 482 Setting Teleshake task parameters on page 482 Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters on page 452 Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Setting Vacuum task parameters on page 215 About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 About setting Apply Lab
38. Setting the Envision device properties on page 415 Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Setting the PlateLoc device properties on page 135 Setting the PlatePierce device properties on page 140 Setting the Remp CSP device properties on page 476 Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 Device Driver User Guide Device Driver User Guide Device Driver User Guide Setting the Teleshake device properties on page 481 For this device Thermo Labsystems Multiskan Ascent Reader Ultramark Vacuum Station VCode 3k Bar Code Print and Apply Station VCode pre 2003 Bar Code Print and Apply Station Vici Multiport Valve VPrep Precision Pipetting Station VSpin Integrated Microplate Centrifuge VSpin with Access2 VStack Modular Plate Stacker VStack Modular Plate Stacker Old ST6 Style Waste Wellmate Dispenser Zeiss Plate Vision Reader Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide Look here to set up a profile And look here to set device properties Creating a Multiskan Ascent profile on page 449 Setting the Multiskan Ascent device properties on page 450 Setting the Ultramark device properties on page 487 Setting the Ultramark device properties on page 487
39. Stopping and There are two ways to stop and start the server service starting the service To stop and start the DHCP server from Windows 1 Navigate to Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Administrative Tools gt Services Consult your Windows documentation for more information about working with services in this way To stop and start the DHCP server using the DHCP server file 1 Navigate to C Program Files Velocity11 DHCP server 2 Double click the file named dhcpsrv exe 3 Click Stop to stop the service or Start to start the service Related information For information about See Ethernet networks About Ethernet networking on page 86 The workflow that this procedure Workflows for Ethernet networking on belongs to page 89 98 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Turning off Ethernet firewall software Introduction If you are using an Ethernet network read this topic to learn about the effect of firewalls and how to turn them off Firewall defined A firewall is a security system that protects a computer on an Ethernet network against external threats Types of firewall Hardware firewalls protect computers from threats outside the local network Software firewalls prevent worms from propagating on the internal network Sources of software The computer controlling your device may have one or more software firewall firewalls running on it There are two software firewall sources
40. The next step Opening Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Setting Multiskan task parameters Using Multiskan Diagnostics See About protocol files on page 162 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent on page 448 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters on page 452 Using Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics on page 454 Setting the Multiskan Ascent device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the Multiskan Ascent device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Multiskan s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the Multiskan device properties l 2 3 group name Save Open the Device Properties page Set the generic device properties Expand the Thermo Labsystems Multiskan Ascent properties If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile Choose a profile from the list box Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Related information Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using 451 For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a
41. When selected the button changes its appearance When you are ready to dispense click Dispense To stop the dispense process before it is finished click Abort dispense For information about Configuring the WellMate Adding a device to the device manager Opening WellMate Diagnostics Opening WellMate Command page Setting WellMate task parameters Creating an WellMate profile See Workflow for configuring the WellMate on page 504 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Moving the plate stage on page 510 Setting WellMate task parameters on page 507 Creating a WellMate profile on page 505 513 VWorks User Guide Zeiss setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Zeiss plate vision reader is a plate reader that can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device and set the Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameters 514 Chapter 31 Zeiss setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring a Zeiss Plate Vision reader About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Zeiss Plate Vision reader in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Sett
42. __i ft I Black 783092 ae called plate 1536 Greiner Low Unload from plate Upstack to wstack volume Black Storage device 783092 called plat 2 Make sure that the Upstack task is configured to use the stacker Stackers that this task will use vstack 3 Inthe inventory editor identify the plates that you want to move a Click the Unload task b Click Edit location groups to open the inventory editor c Click the Inventory Management tab 322 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Bee ee eee riInventory View Current filter Select view type View by plate shows only plates that are currently in a mass storage device m cassette device eastbe labware northbe plate_name slot southbe PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 783092 plate 1 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 783092 plate 2 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 3 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 783092 plate 4 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 5 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 plate 6 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 783092 plate 7 OK PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 8 OK Create a location group in the inventory editor saving the changes and confirming it by making sure that it is listed in the Available locations list of the Load Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Available locations Edit location
43. application that includes a JavaScript interpreter VWorks is an example of such an application it uses a JavaScript 1 5 interpreter 270 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide JavaScript resources There are many JavaScript resources available online and in print If you Examples of use Where scripts are written About VWorks defined functions and objects want to learn more about JavaScript for use in VWorks look for resources that cover the core JavaScript language separately from the browser client side language and Document Object Model Web References You can find useful information at http www mozilla org js Print Reference A good print reference is JavaScript The Definitive Guide Fourth Edition published by O Reilly You can use JavaScript to Q Print the parameters of a task to the VWorks log Q Run a command line that launches an external application such as a batch file or database updating program Q Simplify protocol writing for example by incrementing pipetting volumes each cycle of a protocol to perform a dilution series Scripts can be written in two places Q Pre post protocol scripts Q The Advanced Settings tab Scripts can be written in two ways U Directly into the text box Q As an external file that is located by clicking Browse Note You can also call an external file by embedding the open function in the text box The following
44. cc ee 58 Chapter 4 Performing arun 59 Overview of performing a Tunen 2 es 60 Starting a run from VWorkS 0 00 ee eee 61 Starting a run from a command line aisr zre kere careers iea ees 64 About starting runs automatically aoaaa aaa ee ee 65 Working with the run set manager aa 0 0 00 ees 66 Pausing and stopping A rUN 1 ees 69 Monitoring a UN sister ew Share ewe Aan te iS ec ae bee Ds 71 i Table of Contents VCode User Guide Monitoring UPS status on the BioCel 1 2 2 nend aeaiee eee 72 Locating plates in the system 0 0 ec ees 74 Working with the Log toolbar 2 serenana raea ees 75 Cleaning up after a TUN esr ee ee 78 LOCE OUL preen tare M8 EET EE atc me layt Se tert wee Ee eed tere eee eA teem ec 79 GIOSINE VWOKKS wi ae A Baie Sod tei bce CO sed ha ee tale Tan as tee ees ass teat al ea Tne ect 79 Chapter 5 WVWWorks installation 81 Workflow for installing VWorkS 2 2 eee 82 Computer requirements and networking 00 ee ees 82 Installing VWorks software 2 0 aaaea ee ee 84 Choosing between serial and Ethernet 0 000 cee eee eee 85 About Ethernet networking 0 ccc ee eee 86 Workflows for Ethernet networking 0 0 0 ees 89 Setting the network card s IP addreSS 0 00 ce eee 90 Connecting Ethernet cables 0 0 0 0 ec ee a aa 93 Checking the network card s IP addreSS 1
45. more than that A safe number to start with when testing a new protocol is 1 2 The protocol should be run in simulation to optimize the number of simultaneous plates 168 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The Task Settings page where the Setting up a plate icon on page 164 number of simultaneous plates is entered Adding a task or pipette task About this topic Adding a task Deleting a task Moving tasks After you have set up a plate icon for a process you can start adding tasks and pipette tasks This topic describes how to do this You must always add a task to a process before you can define its task parameters To add a task 1 Ifthe Protocol Tasks toolbar is not showing click View and then select Toolbars gt Protocol Tasks 2 There are various ways to add tasks to the protocol Click on a task icon and drag it from the task list to the protocol editor window until a vertical dashed line appears Double click the icon Copy or cut and paste task icons in the protocol To delete a task 1 Ina protocol editor select a task that is in a protocol process 2 Press the DELETE key on the keyboard 3 Click Yes in the Delete Task dialog box to delete the task When editing a protocol drag and drop or use cut and paste commands to move tasks and groups of tasks To move tasks in a protocol 1 Ina protoco
46. o Simulation is off E Diagnostics C Ensble run set manager The buttons on the Control toolbar have a variety of uses in VWorks and are documented as needed in this guide Log toolbar This is the Log toolbar Chapter 2 VWorks overview 15 VWorks User Guide 8 17 05 2 11 37 39 PM Info VWorks Application product version 3 0 0 file version 20 1 1 started 8 17 05 2 11 37 39 PM Seript VWorks Initializing scripting engine 8 17 05 2 11 37 399 PM Seript VWorks Wed Aug 17 2005 14 11 37 GMT 0700 Pacific Standard Time 8 17 05 2 11 97 99 PM Info VWorks Preparing device drivers 8 17 05 2 12 39 78 PM Info VWorks Creating AliquotDevice 8 17 05 2 12 39 85 PM Info VWorks Creating BenchCel Device 8 17 05 2 12 39 85 PM Info VWorks Creating BenchCelStackDevice 8 17 05 2 12 39 87 PM Info VWorks Creating BioTekWasherDevice 8 17 05 2 12 39 90 PM Info VWorks Creating DelidStationDevice 8 17 05 2 12 39 90 PM Info VWorks Creating Echoss5o0DestinationStageDevice 8 17 05 2 12 39 90 PM Info VWorks Creating EchossoDevice The Log toolbar contains six sub pages The All sub page displays the complete log The other sub pages display only certain types of log messages for example only error messages Protocol Tasks toolbar This is the Protocol Tasks toolbar Protocol Tasks P Apply Label m Pipette Process gt Place Plate Oina Sub Process Multimek D User Mess
47. passes During the first pass every second well in a column is filled The plate stage then moves over by one well so that the dispensers sit above empty wells In the second pass the stage returns to the starting position and the remaining wells are filled Columns Rows 441 442 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Procedure To set Multidrop parameters l 2 Add a Multidrop task to a protocol process If VWorks has more than one Multidrop select the one you want to use for the task from the Select the Multidrop to work with list box If you want to prime the Multidrop enter the volume of liquid to prime with in the Prime volume text box Priming moves liquid through the dispensing system into waste to make sure that there is no air in the lines In the Dispense volume text box enter the volume of liquid that you want to dispense into each well To shake the plate after the dispense enter a value into the Shake time text box To purge the lines after the dispense select the Purge x times when complete check box and enter the number of times to purge Purging moves liquid back into the liquid reservoir or reservoirs If you want to return all liquid the value of x may need to be greater than one To dispense into all wells make sure that the Entire plate option is selected To only dispense into some of the wells a Select the Selected columns op
48. setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the WellMate About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the WellMate in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a WellMate profile on page 505 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the WellMate device properties on page 506 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting WellMate task parameters Setting WellMate task parameters on page 507 Using WellMate Diagnostics Using WellMate Diagnostics on page 509 Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using 505 VWorks User Guide Creating a WellMate profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the WellMate in VWorks Before you start Before you can create a profile you need to add the device to the device manager Procedure To create a WellMate profile 1 Open WellMate Diagnostics 2 Click the Profile tab Wellmate Diagnostics Yersion 1 2 2 Eg Profile Command Dispense Profile Operations Profile Options hd COM 1 y COM port i Pump speed Eisai cee PR 500 fast 1000 slow Create a copy of this profile Stage speed 1700 fast 15000 slow Rename this profile Volume to prime on initialization 0 2499 pL Delete this profile
49. window 2 Inthe Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select the dilution plate from the Available plates for serial dilution list Pipette Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Available plates for serial dilution es Launch serial dilution wizard 3 Click Launch serial dilution wizard The dialog box for step 1 specifying the type of serial dilution opens Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 255 VWorks User Guide Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 1 Specify the type of serial dilution How much information do you know about the plate to be diluted don t know the volume parameters of the plate volume of the diluent How will you specify the transfer volume The volume will be the same for each transfer The transfer volume will be specified i 0 Transfer volume 0 120 uL O The volume will be determined by a concentration gradient 2 Concentration gradient 1 01 2500 The volume may differ for different transfers Next p gt Cancel Ms In step 1 of the Serial Dilution Wizard choose whether or not you want to specify the volume and concentration parameters Specifying these parameters enables you to Determine the dilution according to a desired concentration gradient The wizard calculates the necessary transfer volumes View resultant concentration if you choose to specify volumes Choose how the transfer volumes will b
50. x Device Properties Device name Echoss Device type Labcyte EchoS50 Source Stage Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints New device Device is accessible From robot Robot Yes bese deie Teachpoint for robot Robot E Labcyte Echo550 Source Stage pr Initialize all devices Parent device Echo550 Device diagnostics Expand the Labcyte Echo 550 Source Stage properties group Select the parent to the source stage a Double click in the field next to Parent device b Select the correct Echo 550 from the list 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information For information about The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening Echo 550 source stage s device properties page Setting up devices Setting Echo 550 source stage s generic properties Setting Echo 550 task parameters Using Echo 550 Diagnostics Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 403 VWorks User Guide See Setting the Echo 550 destination stage device properties on page 403 Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices on page 398 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics on page 408 Setting the Echo 550 de
51. 0 Last cycle blowout volume p 0 Mixing cycles 3 Well selection 1 selection column 1 Distance from well bottom rr 1 Retract distance mm uL 0 Enable tip touch No Liquid class lt None gt Z axis aspirate velocity mmj 90 Z axis aspirate accleration n 75 Z axis dispense velocity mm 90 Z axis dispense acceleration 75 Executing the Serial Dilution task Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 261 VWorks User Guide VWorks treats the Serial Dilution task as a series of Mix Aspirate and Dispense tasks In the example shown here the serial dilution of one plate is comprised of 70 Mix Aspirate and Dispense tasks These 70 tasks are also recorded as such in the Process and Error log files For more information about Using the Fill Plate task in conjunction with the Serial Dilution task Configuring a pipette process Autofill configuration with the VPrep See Setting Fill Plate pipette task parameters on page 239 Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 VPrep User Guide 262 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Wash Tips pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Wash Tips task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep instrument Wash Tips pipette A Wash Tips pipette task is used with a VPrep to wash pipett
52. 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the Bio Tek device properties on page 390 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Bio Tek task parameters Setting the Bio Tek task parameters on page 392 Using Bio Tek Diagnostics Using Bio Tek Diagnostics on page 393 Setting the Bio Tek device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the Bio Tek device properties The device properties provides VWorks with information about the Bio Tek s current configuration The device properties settings are stored in the device file Before you start Before you can set the Bio Tek device properties you need to add the Bio Tek device to the device manager Procedure Related information Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using 391 VWorks User Guide To set the Bio Tek device properties 1 Open the Bio Tek Device Properties page 2 Set the Bio Tek s generic properties x Device Properties g System E General Bio Tek Washer Device name BioTekWasher BioTekWasher Device type Bio Tek Washer Genetix Aliquot Approach height mm 9 amp Aliquot Allowed prohibited labware E A Velocity11 Robot E Teachpoints A Robot Device is accessible From robot Robot Teachpoint For robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR Device h
53. 260 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 17 18 Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 6 Specify common mix parameters Will mixing be done after a transfer Transferred contents will not be mixed Transferred contents will be mixed Select mixing parameters to use EB Mix properties Volume uL 10 Pre aspirate volume UL 0 Last cycle blowout volume UL 0 Mixing cycles 3 Distance from well bottom mm 1 Retract distance mm uL 0 Enable tip touch No Liquid class lt None gt Z axis aspirate velocity mm s 90 Z axis aspirate accleration mm s 75 Z axis dispense velocity mm s 90 Z axis dispense acceleration mm s 75 Select whether or not you want to mix after each transfer If you choose to mix enter the desired values for the Mix task that will take place during the serial dilution task Note The Well selection field is not available because this information was entered in a previous step of the wizard Click Finish The Pipette Task Parameters toolbar displays the properties of the first step in the Serial Dilution task Arrows appear at the bottom of the toolbar Use these to scroll through each step of the serial dilution Pipette Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Available plates for serial dilution Plate A Ne Launch serial dilution wizard E Mix step 1 of 70 Volume UL 10 Pre aspirate volume UL
54. 3 Perform a fill test To perform a test fill 1 Select or create a profile that has the settings you require 2 Inthe Fill Test group box click in the text box and type the volume of liquid to dispense into each well of the plate 3 Click Fill The plate fills Related information For information about Create a profile Adding a device Configuring the AliQuot Setting AliQuot task parameters Managing profiles Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using 387 VWorks User Guide See Creating an AliQuot profile on page 379 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the AliQuot on page 378 Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Using AliQuot Diagnostics on page 385 388 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide 389 VWorks User Guide Bio Tek setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Bio Tek ELx405 is an automated microplate washer that can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Bio Tek set Bio Tek task parameters and use Bio Tek Diagnostics 390 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek About this topic This topic gives the workflow for configuring the Bio Tek in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107
55. 3 The robot moves the plate to a VCode The bar code that was read is used as a key to look up the bar code fields to print on the other sides of the plate using the bar code data file as the lookup table 5 The VCode prints a bar code on the north side east side and west side of the plate Bar code data files can also be used with incoming plates that have west side bar codes In this case the bar code must be read at the VCode or platepad and not by the robot s bar code reader IMPORTANT Bar code data files cannot currently be used with incoming bar codes on the north or east sides Bar code data files can still be used if the downstacked plate has no bar code provided that incoming bar code verification is turned off The plate could be moved to the VCode and labelled on its south or west side That label could then be read and used with a bar code data file to specify the labels to be printed on the other sides of the plate Where they are specified The use of bar code data files is specified when configuring task parameters for an Apply Label task Field 1 DB Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 297 VWorks User Guide File structure An example of a bar code data file is shown below The columns are separated by tabs IMPORTANT The columns must be in the order north east south and west from left to right P barcodedata dat Notepad ioi x File Edit Format Yiew Help eastoool southo
56. 496 Creating a Vici Multiport Valve profile 2 20 0 ce ee es 497 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve device properties 2 0000 eee eee 498 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameterS 00 eee eee ee 499 Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics 0 aa aaa eee 500 Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using 503 Workflow for configuring the WellMate 2 000 cece ee eee 504 Creating a WellMate profile 1 2 aaa eee 505 Setting the WellMate device properties 20 00 eee 506 Setting WellMate task parameters 2 0 00 eee 507 Using WellMate Diagnostics a an aaaea ees 509 Chapter 31 Zeiss setting up and using 513 Workflow for configuring a Zeiss Plate Vision reader 00 000 eee 514 Setting the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties 00005 515 Setting Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameterS 0200 cee eee 516 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting 517 Abouterror handling sa 21 6 ectoe seo le wet a bs eee ae ene wees eG a el eee 518 Sending a DUR TEPO vse dag Reece a Deer ee a eee ee eb we See we oa 518 Compilation warnings and errors 1 es 520 Resolving device CMOS assia es 521 Resolving non VCode bar code reader errors anaua aaa 522 Resolving plate inventory problemS 0 00 ec ee ees 524 VWorks User Guide Introduction This chapter introduces the VWorks User Guide Before you
57. 55 task object 272 276 variables 274 VWorks objects 271 JavaScript script writing service 275 JavaScript uses 270 job roles for readers of this guide 2 K KiNEDx robot 72 L Labcyte Echo 550 see Echo 550 labware general properties defining 347 plate icon 29 standards for 340 labware class associating plate with 359 defining 357 labware classes page 357 labware classes Sub page 358 labware database 22 237 251 264 281 284 288 372 labware editor about 338 classes 338 opening 347 properties 338 relationship with other configurations 290 Labware Entries page 339 labware entry adding 342 344 copying 346 renaming 345 length of filter tip pin tool property 350 Liconic STR see StoreX Liconic STX StoreX see StoreX lid departure height property 350 lid gripper offset property 349 Lid Hotel device properties setting 128 diagnostics using 130 profile for creating 127 workflow for configuring 126 lid hotel storage bay setting device properties 129 lid resting height property 349 lidded stacking thickness property 349 lidded thickness property 349 linking a pipette process 227 liquid class 235 liquid library 22 adding an entry 364 liquid library database 372 liquid library editor about 362 definition 363 opening 363 relationship with other configurations 290 Load task 308 310 defined 198 308 setting parameters 198 location group 307 creating 314
58. Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Chapter 6 Setting up devices 115 VWorks User Guide Loading a device file About this topic Reason do to this Procedures This topic describes ways to load a device file Every protocol needs a device file to run When you open a protocol file the device file associated with it is automatically loaded To load a different device file use one of the these procedures If you need to load a different device file for your current protocol use one of the following methods Procedure 1 Load a device file from Windows Use this method only if VWorks is not open To load a device file from Windows 1 In Windows navigate to the device file 2 Double click the file VWorks is launched and the device file is loaded Procedure 2 Load a device file from VWorks Use this method if VWorks is open To load a device file from within VWorks 1 Navigate to File gt Device File click Open and select your device file Procedure 3 Associate a device file with an existing protocol Use this procedure to open a device file and associate it with an existing protocol To associate a device file with a protoc
59. Alphanumeric increments use 0 9 A Z whereas numeric increments use 0 9 From a plug in that you have developed Select From user plug in completed 7 Return to step 6 and fill out another field until all required fields are Note If you enter information in a field that does not exist in the format you have chosen the information is ignored 8 Return to step 3 and define labels to put on other sides of the plate 187 188 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Apply Label task parameters About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Combining bar code modifiers About combining bar code modifiers on page 188 Configuring a VCode as a device Workflow for configuring the VCode on page 146 Bar code formats and symbologies VCode User Guide FileReader plug in About the FileReader plug in on page 298 About combining bar code modifiers About this topic This topic describes how to combine bar code modifiers for the Apply Label task Bar code modifiers are text numerical strings that are appended to the bar code Typically they are used to add a readable text numerical string to a bar code which increments for each plate giving each plate a unique label Combining barcode You can combine bar code modi
60. Chapter 2 VWorks overview 21 VWorks User Guide Showing and hiding tabs and toolbars in VWorks About this topic Showing hiding tabs procedure Showing hiding toolbars procedure Related information This topic describes how to show and hide toolbars and tabs on the VWorks user interface When you first start VWorks not all the tabs and toolbars are visible For example the tabs Pre Protocol Editor and Post Protocol Editor are hidden To show all tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe Protocol Editor Settings group box select the Show Pre Post Protocol Editor check box The Pre Protocol Editor and the Post Protocol Editor tabs become visible To hide the Pre Protocol Editor and the Post Protocol Editor tabs 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe Protocol Editor Settings group box clear the Show Pre Post Protocol Editor check box The Pre Protocol Editor and the Post Protocol Editor tabs are now hidden To show or hide toolbars 1 Select View gt Toolbars gt toolbar name For example to show or hide the log toolbar select View gt Toolbars gt Log Note Not all toolbars are available for all tabs For information about See Starting VWorks Starting VWorks on page 27 Tabs toolbars and menus on the Overview of the VWorks user VWorks user interface interface on page 13 22 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Relationships of configuration VWorks components
61. Click Create a copy of this profile In the Copy Profile dialog box enter the new name for the copied profile and click OK To delete a profile Click the Profiles tab in the Multiskan Ascent dialog box From the Profile list box select the profile you want to delete Click Delete this profile In the alert dialog box click Yes to delete the profile To rename a profile 1 2 3 4 Click the Profiles tab in the Multiskan Ascent dialog box From the Profile list box select the profile you want to rename Click Rename this profile In the Rename Profile dialog box enter the new name and click OK 456 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Opening Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics Configuring the Multiskan Adding a device to the device manager Setting Multiskan task parameters Creating a Multiskan profile See Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent on page 448 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters on page 452 Creating a Multiskan Ascent profile on page 449 457 VWorks User Guide Nanodrop setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Nanodrop is an 8 channel pipettor that dispenses 0 1 40 uL of liquid into each well of a microplate It can be integrated
62. Diagnostics on page 130 Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to use the Lid Hotel Diagnostics to identify which positions contain lids and to manage profiles When to use Typically you use diagnostics to troubleshoot a communication problem between the software and storage bay Use diagnostics when you want to verify that the software can detect the presence of a lid or when you need to adjust the storage bay s detection sensitivity level Use the profiles page when you want to change add or otherwise modify a profile Procedures To view full lid hotel positions 1 Open Lid Hotel Diagnostics page The Diagnostics page shows an array of lights The lights are green for positions that contain lids Related information Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 131 VWorks User Guide To manage Lid Hotel profiles 1 Open the Lid Hotel Device Diagnostics dialog box and click the Profile tab Lid Hotel Diagnostics x Diagnostics Profile Parameters Profile Control LidHotel profile COM Port com 1 X Number of slots 10 Rename po Save settings 2 To delete a profile or change a profile name select the profile you want to manage from the list box and then click the appropriate command 3 To modify the profile select the profile from the list box make the desired changes and then click Save settings For information about See Adding a d
63. Ea Look in S FileReaderPluginD ata z Q B La E My Recent Documents E Desktop E FileReaderData txt S My Documents PE My Computer EL My Network File name TestDate txt z Places Files of type Text Documents txt 7 Cancel Encoding Jansi 7 In the FileReader dialog box that opens check the list of names of the columns of the text file and the total number of rows in the file FileReader ixi South field 1 Plate Name South field 2 Barcode South field 3 Plate ID South field 4 User South field 5 Date West field 1 Barcode West field 2 Plate ID West field 3 Destination There are 7 lines Click OK The Number of Cycles dialog box opens Number of Cycles x Number of times to run protocol 304 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Related information 6 Enter the number of cycles to run If the file is not the one you intend to use you can cancel the run If the number of rows in the file is greater than the number of cycles that are run the extra rows will be unused If the number of rows is less than the number of cycles that are run an error occurs when the rows are executed If the error is ignored additional labels are left blank The input file does not change during a run so if you perform another run with the same file the same labels will print If a power outage occurs during a run and you are unab
64. Hardware Version Software Version 3 1 1 Related information For information about See Configuring the Ultramark Workflow for configuring the Ultramark on page 486 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Opening the Ultramark settings Opening diagnostics software on dialog box page 105 Setting Ultramark task parameters Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Setting up a data file Setting up the Ultramark plate reader data file on page 488 494 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using VWorks User Guide 495 VWorks User Guide Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges It describes how to configure the Vici Multiport Valve set the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters and use Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics 496 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring a Vici Multiport Valve About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Vici Multiport Valve in VWorks The Vici Multiport Valve is a switching device that enables you to change between reservoirs of incoming fluids Source and reservoirs of outgoing fluids destinations It can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks In order to use it as an integrated device it needs to be configured in VW
65. If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name s Choose a profile from the list box 6 Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Multidrop on page 438 Adding the Multidrop to the Adding devices on page 107 device manager Opening Multidrop device Adding devices on page 107 properties page Setting Multidrop task parameters Setting MultiDrop task parameters on page 441 Using Multidrop Diagnostics Using Multidrop Diagnostics on page 443 Setting MultiDrop task parameters About this topic Multidrop task defined This topic describes how to set the Multidrop task parameters The Multidrop task moves a plate to a Thermo Labsystems Multidrop 384 or 96 dispenser and instructs the dispenser to fill the plate You can specify whether to include prime shake or purge operations The Multidrop is capable of dispensing up to eight different liquids into one plate During a dispense the plate stage moves in the left right axis and the wells are filled in columns starting with column 1 In a 96 well plate there are eight rows so every well in a column is filled at the same time In a 384 well plate there are 16 rows requiring two dispense
66. Nunc Black 253601 4 Matriy Glace Tithe Rack 340 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Labware Entry General Properties group box Each sub page has an identical Labware Entry General Properties group box Labware Entry General Properties Description O Filter plate O Reservoir MicroWash Reservoir O Pin tool O Tip box O Lid 6007617 Manufacturer part number Number of wells 1 Labware Classes In the Labware Classes page you create labware classes and assign page defined labware to a labware class Labware Editor 12 0 6 xi Labware Entries Labware Entry Membership Labware entries that are not a member Labware entries that are a member of of this labware class this labware class 1 Packard Lid 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black w Greir 1536 Nunc Black 253601 24 Matrix Glass Tube Rack 384 BD Biocote Plate Black 354663 384 Costar Square Wells Clear w Lid 384 Falcon TC Plate Black 353962 384 Greiner Low Volume Black 788076 384 Greiner PP Y Bottom 781280 384 Greiner PP Bottom w Greiner Lid 7 384 Matrical Low Volume Black MCR101 384 Matrix PP ScreenMates 384 Matrix PP ScreenMates w Greiner 384 Matrix PS ScreenMates 4331 384 Matrix PS ScreenMates w Greiner 384 PE Optiplate Black 6007270 384 PE Optiplate Black w Packard Lid 6 384 PE Optiplate White 6007290 384 PE Optiplate White w Packard Lid 96 Costar Flat Bottom w Lid 96 Costar F
67. Plate task can be used in combination with a platepad bar bar codes code reader to read a bar code The requirements for this are as follows Q The platepad must be set up in the device manager as a bar code reader for the platepad U The plate icon for the plate must indicate that the plate has a bar code on the side that the bar code reader reads Whenever a plate is placed on this platepad the scheduler tells the bar code reader to read the plate s bar code Procedure To set the Place Plate task parameters 1 Click the Place Plate task icon in the Protocol Tasks list and drag it to the desired location in the protocol process window 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar select the device to which you want to move the plate You may need to scroll down to make your selection 3 Ifthe Place Plate task is the first task in the protocol and you want to require that the operator confirms the bar code on the plate that is placed check the Manually confirm bar code check box This can prevent the wrong plate from being used in the protocol To confirm the bar code when the plate is picked up the operator is prompted to enter the bar code of the plate that should be in the placed position If the two codes do not match an error is generated Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 205 VWorks User Guide For information about See Configuring
68. Post aspirate volume The volume of air to be drawn up after the liquid is drawn up task preAspirateVolume Float Pre aspirate volume The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid task quadrants An array of Quadrant selection A quadrant is an evenly pairs of diagram spaced array of locations that integers is addressable by the tips ona pipette head A 96 well head can dispense into a 96 well plate four quadrants of a 384 well plate and 16 quadrants of a 1536 well plate A 384 well head can dispense into a 384 well plate or the four quadrants of a 1536 well plate Property task retract task tipOffset Distance from well bottom task velocity task volume Property task plateName Data type Float Float Float Float Data type String Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 279 Task parameter Tip retract distance Distance from well bottom Aspirate velocity Aspirate volume Change Tips task These properties are the same as the properties described for the Change Tips task Task parameter Plate name VWorks User Guide Comments The distance that the tips should move downwards per unit volume of liquid being aspirated This value allows the tips to move downwards during aspiration to maintain a certain height below the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you
69. Procedure To set the VSpin device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the VSpin s generic properties System Beckman Multmek Pipettor 4 Human Robot 5 1 a vebcty Spn New device Delete device Initiaize al devices Device agnostics Profile name obo Devi excessble from robot Robot No E VSpin Integrated Microplate Centrifuge propi VSpin VSpin Integrated Microplate Centrifuge VSpin Profile Expand the VSpin Integrated Microfuge properties group Double click in the field next to Profile name and select the correct profile from the list 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 154 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about The workflow this topic belongs to Opening VSpin s device properties page Setting up a device Managing profiles and settings Using VSpin Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring the VSpin on page 151 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 VSpin User Guide VSpin User Guide Workflow for configuring the VSpin with Access2 About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Access2 in VWorks The Access2 is a VSpin accessory for crane style robots that cannot deliver plates directly to the VSpin A c
70. Profile Settings a From the COM port list box select the port that the FlexiSpense M uses to connect to the computer running VWorks Enter the number of times to attempt priming before displaying an error message in the Primer retries field c Enter the amount of time in milliseconds the software should wait for a response from the device before an error message is displayed in the Program timeout ms field Click Update this profile Click Close 430 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening FlexiSpence Diagnostics Adding a device to the device manager Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters Using FlexiSpense M Diagnostics See Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M on page 428 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding devices on page 107 Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters on page 431 Using Flexispense M Diagnostics on page 433 Setting the FlexiSpense M device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the FlexiSpense M device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the FlexiSpense s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To
71. Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 4 Specify or verify the individual transfers View each transfer 000000 000000 000000 a Ue Aspirate from column 2 Dispense to column 3 Previous transfer Transfer 2 of 23 What is the volume for this transfer 10 Transfer volume 0 20 pL What is the resultant concentration in the destination column quadrant 0 8264 Resultant concentration 0 100 12 If you selected I know the volume parameters of the plate in step 1 of the wizard the final concentration for each dilution step can be viewed in the Resultant concentration field To view the information about a particular column click Next transfer or Previous transfer 13 If you selected Volume may differ for different transfers in step 1 of the wizard examine each transfer volume by clicking Next transfer and adjust the values in the Transfer volume if necessary Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 4 Specify or verify the individual transfers View each transfer Le 000000 000000 e00000 5000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 4 Aspirate from column 3 Dispense to column 4 Previous transfer Transfer 3 of 23 What is the volume For this transfer 20 Transfer volume 0 20 uL What is the resultant concentration in the destination columnjquadrant 0 1377 Resultant concentration 0 100 Chapter 10 Setting V
72. Set the generic device properties for the Vici Multiport Valve x Device Properties E General Device name Vici valve System B Vici Multiport Valve Vici Valve Device type Vici Multiport Valve B ici Multiport alve properties New device Profile name Vicit Delete device Initialize all devices Expand the Vici Multiport Valve properties group Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using 499 For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening the Vici Multiport Valve device properties page Adding a device to the device manager Setting Vici Multiport Valve task parameters Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring a Vici Multiport Valve on page 496 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters on page 499 Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics on page 500 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters About this topic Vici Multiport Valve task defined Procedure This topic describes how to set the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters in VWorks The Vici Multiport Valve task is used to change the position of the valve in the device To set the Vici Multiport Valve ta
73. User Guide Related information For information about See Configuring a VSpin with Access2 Workflow for configuring the VSpin as a device with Access2 on page 154 Configuring a VSpin as a device Workflow for configuring the VSpin on page 151 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 The VSpin VSpin User Guide The Access2 Access2 User Guide Setting Waitfor task and Signal task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Waitfor and Signal task parameters Waitfor and Signal The Waitfor task and a Signal task work together to specify the order in tasks defined which tasks are performed across processes You must first set the Waitfor task and then set the Signal task Procedure To set Waitfor task parameters 1 Add a Waitfor task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar type a name for the task To set Signal task parameters 1 Add a Signal task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Available waitfors text box of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the Waitfor task that you want to reference 3 Click Add The task moves to the lower box 218 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices For information about Creating a protocol Using the Waitfor and Signal task in a protocol See Workflow f
74. VPrep Related information For information about See Setting Restack parameters Setting Restack task parameters on page 207 Setting Downstack and Upstack Setting Downstack and Upstack task task parameters parameters on page 193 Configuring a VPrep as a device Workflow for configuring the VPrep on page 148 212 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting Seal task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Seal task parameters Seal task defined The Seal task places a seal on a plate using a PlateLoc If you are sealing more than one type of plate that requires different sealing temperatures we recommend that you use a separate PlateLoc for each temperature This avoids time delays as the PlateLoc heats and cools between different plate types When you open a protocol containing one or more Seal tasks the PlateLoc immediately starts adjusting to the temperatures defined in the task parameters Procedure To set Seal task parameters 1 Add the Seal task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar enter a seal time and seal temperature When you enter a seal temperature the PlateLoc immediately starts adjusting to that temperature 3 Select the PlateLoc to use for the sealing operation from the Select PlateLoc to use list box If you are using more than one PlateLoc make sure that you select the device with the
75. VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Setting the network card s IP address About this topic This topic describes how to manually set a static IP address for an Ethernet connection between the controlling computer and a device Procedure To manually set the network card s IP address 1 In Windows click Start gt Settings gt Network and Dial up Connections 2 Right click the icon for the new local area connection which may be Local Area Connection 2 on your system and click Properties File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help ay sak O T JO search Folders hes E X 1 Ez Address e Network Connections Go New Connection Wizard Disable Status Repair Bridge Connections Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties Chapter 5 VWorks installation 91 VWorks User Guide 3 Double click Internet Protocol TCP IP J Local Area Connection Properties 2 xi General Authentication Advanced Connect using E9 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX This connection uses the following items Client for Microsoft Networks A File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks JZ QoS Packet Scheduler 4 4 a Internet Protocol TCP IP Install Uninstall Properties Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across d
76. Wash tips tasks In the example shown here a single Fill Plate pipette task is actually comprised of 113 tasks These 113 tasks are also recorded as such in the Process and Error log files For information about See Configuring a pipette process Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Using the Serial Dilution task Setting Serial Dilution task parameters on page 253 Configuring a VPrep shelf Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 247 248 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Loop pipette task parameters About this topic Loop task defined Procedure This topic describes how to set the Loop task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep This is illustrated with an example in which an Aspirate Dispense pair of tasks is looped four times The Loop pipette task allows you to repeat a set of tasks within a process To set Loop pipette task parameters l Open the Pipette Process Editor to display the process in which you want to add the Loop pipette task An example is shown below Pipette Process 1 Aspirate 10 00 pL Dispense 10 00 pl on VPrep1 from unnamed 1 into unnamed 1 in in 1 quadrant s 1 quadrant s In the pipette process window click to select the Loop pipette task icon and drag it into the process in front of the first task that you want to be in the
77. a bar code data file a Make sure that you have created a bar code database file and selected it in VWorks general options b Make sure that the incoming plates have bar code labels on the south or west side or a previous Apply Label task is set up to print labels on the south or west side c Ifthe incoming plates are labelled make sure that the system verifies the labels by setting up bar code control on the plate icon d Click From text database This places the code DB in the text box e Inthe use side side list box under the From text database button select the side of the plate that has the bar codes you want to use as a reference IMPORTANT Although you can select any side only the south and west sides can currently be used Aseries of bar codes that increment but which are not specified by a bar code input file a Type the root data that you want in the Field 1 text box b Click Increment This adds the code INC to the root data c Inthe Increment chars text box type the number of alphanumeric characters that you want to be appended to the root data For example if you want the series to increment from 01 enter 2 If you want it to increment from 001 enter 3 d Inthe Starting increment text box type the number that you want to be printed on the first label for example 100 e Select either Numeric or Alphanumeric depending on the increment style you prefer
78. a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Setting up the inventory management database Who should read this About setting up the database Setting the database connection Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic Storex Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub and you are using or want to set up inventory management with a database To set up the inventory management database contact Velocity 1 for assistance The database connection is specified in VWorks To set the database connection 1 Navigate to Tools gt Options 2 Click the Log Options tab 3 Inthe Database connection string text box type dsn velocityll 4 Click Test amp Save to test the connection 310 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Inventory groups plate groupsand About inventory groups on page 311 location groups Moving plates in and out of a Q Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Incubating plates Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Using bar code input files Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Opening the inventory editor About this topic Who should read this Before you start Opening th
79. and changing your password About tasks processes and protocols Opening a protocol in VWorks Setting general options About setting error handling options Sattina aonoral orrnr handlina antiane PDF user guide Content pane Navigation buttons Main Page Mm lt gt E O D lt lt ff gt About Velocity11 user guides Introduction Each Velocity11 user guide is delivered to you as gt Online help gt A PDF file gt A printed book The information in each format is the same but each has different strengths To work most effectively it helps to know when it is best to use each format Where to get the online help and PDF Online help The VWorks online help file is installed separately from the software from the VWorks Help CD_ROM The file that launches the help is called help html and is located in this directory C VWorks Workspace docs helpsystem PDF file of the user guide C MWorks Workspace docs The VWorks user manual in PDF format is located on the software CD ROM as a file that you need to The navigation pane has four tabs The Contents Index and Search tabs provide different ways to locate information The Using tab contains information about using the help system The content pane displays the online help topics Navigation buttons in the content pane allow you to navigate through the pages Filename The VWorks user guide in PDF format is a file named VWorksUs
80. and select the correct profile from the list 5 Ifyou have an old style VStack in the field next to Device number enter the number of the VStack assigned to it 6 Inthe field next to Stack height enter the height of the stack in millimeters 7 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 159 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the VStack belongs to on page 157 Opening VStack s device Setting the generic properties for a properties page device on page 112 Verifying communications VStack User Guide Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 VStack tasks Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters on page 193 Using VStack Diagnostics VStack User Guide Workflow for configuring Waste About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring Waste in VWorks Waste is a location teachpoint where the robot releases the labware that it has in its grippers A receptacle for trash is typically positioned under this teachpoint Because it is accessed by a teachpoint of the robot it is treated as a device Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the Waste device properties on page 160 Re
81. box or click Browse to open a file that contains a script To enter a script to run before the protocol type the script into the Finish Script text box or click Browse to open a file that contains a script 56 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Related information For information about What to do next The workflow that this procedure belongs to JavaScript in VWorks Running pre and post protocol tasks Understanding the protocol About this topic What you should know Related information See Printing a protocol on page 57 Workflow for preparing a run on page 26 Q Using JavaScript in VWorks on page 269 Q The JavaScript task object and properties on page 276 Setting up a pre or post protocol process on page 268 If you are not already familiar with the protocol you intend to run you need to take some time to understand it At a minimum you should be familiar with the following Q Which instruments you need to prepare Q Where you need to position the plates before the run and where they are moved to during the run Q Whether User Message tasks prompt you to perform certain actions after you start the run or whether you need to perform the actions on your own initiative before you start the run For information about Printing a protocol Q Whether you need to replace fluids and empty waste during the run Q Whether you n
82. cassette slot PlateHub 2 1 PlateHub 2 2 To show all plate records Right click on the database list and select Show all For information about See Opening the inventory editor Opening the inventory editor on page 310 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 333 VWorks User Guide Reinventorying the plate inventory About this topic Who should read this Before you start About performing an inventory Reinventorying logic This topic describes how to use the reinventory feature of plate inventory This feature can be used to check for mismatches by comparing the identities of the plates actually in a plate storage device with the plates that the inventory database says should be in the plate storage device Mismatches can arise for example if you physically load plates into the storage device and then use the simulator to virtually move the plates into the database In this case there will be no labware associated with the plates The reinventory feature can also be used to enter bar code information for plates that have been manually placed into the storage device Read this topic if your lab automation system has a plate storage device that includes an optional bar code reader Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 The accuracy of the inventory database can be checked by performing a new inventory of the database You can perform an inventory
83. click OK to save and close the dialog box or click Apply to initialize the device with the new profile To delete a profile 1 From the list box of the Control tab select the profile you want to delete Click Delete In the alert dialog box click Yes to delete the profile To rename a profile 1 From the Profile list box of the Control tab select the profile you want to rename Click Rename In the Rename Profile dialog box select the existing name and type in the new name and click OK 386 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Opening AliQuot Diagnostics Create a profile Adding a device Configuring the aliQuot Setting aliQuot task parameters Performing a fill test Performing a fill test About this topic Procedure See Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Creating an AliQuot profile on page 379 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the AliQuot on page 378 Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Performing a fill test on page 386 This topic describes how to use AliQuot Diagnostics to perform a fill test The general process for performing a manual operation on the AliQuot is the following 1 Select or create a profile that has the basic settings you require for the operation 2 Define the other settings not stored in the profile
84. code 1 The pipettor transfer log contains the following information separated by tabs U Aspiration timestamp Pipettor name Name of the plate aspirated from North bar code of plate aspirated from East bar code of plate aspirated from South bar code of plate aspirated from West bar code of plate aspirated from Quadrant of the plate aspirated from number 1 16 Dispense timestamp Name of the plate dispensed to North bar code of plate dispensed to East bar code of plate dispensed to South bar code of plate dispensed to West bar code of plate dispensed to Quadrant of the plate dispensed to number 1 16 Volume of liquid dispensed in microliters COBOL Oke OB oO OO ob bu Status of the dispense Values are ERROR or OK These refer to the status of the bar code verification and not the dispense itself 48 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Bar code log file Measurements output log file VersaScan image file root folder Note One log entry is created for every dispense task pair For example if 20 uL are aspirated and half is dispensed to one plate and half to another plate two piplog entries are created This example is treated as two dispense task pairs The bar code log file contains the date and time at which each bar code is applied and the text of each field Bar code fields are displayed in human readable form What is recorded The measurements output log file r
85. complete before moving the tips out of the wells in milliseconds 6 Enter values for the dispense properties The following table describes these properties Dispense property Velocity Acceleration Z axis velocity into wells Z axis acceleration into wells Z axis velocity out of wells Z axis acceleration out of wells Post dispense delay 7 Click Save changes Definition Specifies the maximum speed of the dispensing stroke in microliters per second VPrep only Specifies acceleration during the dispensing stroke in microliters per second squared Specifies how fast the pipettor moves as the tips enter the wells in millimeters per second VPrep only Specifies the acceleration of the pipettor as the tips enter the wells in milliliters per second squared Specifies how fast the pipettor moves as the tips leave the wells in millimeters per second VPrep only Specifies the acceleration of the pipettor as the tips leave the wells in millimeters per second squared Specifies the time the pipettor waits after the dispense stroke before moving the tips out of the wells in milliseconds The changes are now stored in the liquid library database 366 Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Opening the liquid library editor Opening the liquid library editor on page 363 Calibrating a pipettor Per
86. contd Reagent pipette task parameters on page 252 Serial Dilution Setting Serial Dilution task parameters on page 253 Wash Tips Setting Wash Tips For information about Task parameters Pre and post protocol task parameters The workflow that this procedure belongs to What to do next pipette task parameters on page 262 See Setting task parameters on page 169 Setting up a pre or post protocol process on page 268 Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Using breakpoints on page 176 176 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Using breakpoints About this topic When to use breakpoints About running a protocol that contains breakpoints This topic describes when and how to use breakpoints A breakpoint is a point in the protocol where you want the system to pause operation Breakpoints are useful in situations where you are troubleshooting a specific device Breakpoints pause the protocol before it carries out the task that has a breakpoint For example if you want to ensure that you are aspirating from a suitable height in the plate you may choose to insert a breakpoint at the aspirate step to ensure that you can watch the pipettor as it carries out that operation Breakpoints can be added during a protocol run and the run stops when that task is reached in the next cycle A breakpoint stops the protocol every time it
87. controlling computer Q To email a labware or liquid library database when requested by personnel at Velocity11 The labware and liquid libraries are maintained in the Windows registry of the controlling computer When you use VWorks to make a change to the labware or liquid libraries the change is seen when accessing that information from the networked instrument s software This is because VWorks and instrument software run on the same controlling computer and access the same databases If you make a change to the labware or liquids database you can use a two step process to propagate the change to another computer 1 Export the Windows registry key containing the data to a file 2 Import the file to the other computer s registry IMPORTANT Making a mistake when editing the registry may cause critical failures with your operating system Exporting a registry key Importing a registry key Emailing a registry file Chapter 15 Administrator procedures 373 VWorks User Guide To export a registry key 1 From the Windows Start menu select Run 2 Inthe Open text box type regedit 3 Click OK The Windows registry editor opens 4 Expand folders to display the following folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Welocity11 Shared 5 Expand the Shared folder and select either Labware Liquid Library 6 From the Registry or File menu select Export The Export Registry File browser box opens Navigate to the folde
88. delimited text file the data can easily be imported into a spreadsheet program P barcodelog txt Notepad of x File Edit Format View Help ht ae ae F NNNNNNNNNN OLpHTS 1 PHTSOLOOL Q2pHTS 1 No No PHTSO2001 O3pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTSO3001 O4pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTSO4001 OSpHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTSO5001 O6pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTSO6001 O7pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTSO7OOL O8pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHTS08001 OSpHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pPHTS09001 10pHTS 1 No bar code No bar code pHT510001 No No No No No No No No No bar bar bar bar bar bar bar bar code code code code code code code code 189 190 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Setting Apply Label task Setting Apply Label task parameters parameters on page 185 Apply Label task parameters About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 Configuring a VCode as a device Workflow for configuring the VCode on page 146 Bar code formats and symbologies VCode User Guide Setting Centrifuge task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Centrifuge task parameters for the VSpin Centrifuge task The Centrifuge task spins microplates according to the specified defined controls set in the task parameters toolbar One plate with a coun
89. device are found in the chapter for setting up and using the device Setting general To set the general properties for a device properties 1 Add the device to the device manager This sets the Device name and Device type Open the Device Properties page Expand the General Property group Device Properties E General Device name YCode1 Device type YCode 3k Bar Code Print and Apply Station Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware 4 If different from the default value of 9 enter the value in millimeters in the Approach height field The approach height is the height to raise the robot gripper above the teachpoint when the robot moves the plate horizontally towards or away from it 5 Assign allowable and non allowable labware a Double click in the field next to Allowed prohibited labware to open the Allowed Prohibited Labware Classes for dialog box Setting teachpoints Chapter 6 Setting up devices 113 VWorks User Guide Allowed Prohibited Labware Classes for VCode Labware classes prohibited from using Unassigned labware classes Labware classes allowed to use this this device device Uses Standard Platepad _ crest Uses Fiter Platenad Uses Vacuum Platepad M A HAAR 7 ALA b Move the labware classes as desired by selecting them and clicking one of the arrow buttons Teachpoints are the coordinates in space that a robot travels to in order to interact
90. device controlled by a driver plug in Using device diagnostics Then the procedure for setting task parameters is found in Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices on page 183 Its own chapter within this user guide The Device Driver User Guide The following table shows where to find procedures for using diagnostics for a device If the device is A Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in A non Velocity11 instrument not controlled by a driver plug in Any device controlled by a driver plug in Then the procedure for configuring the device is found in The Velocity11 User Guide for that device Its own chapter within this user guide The Device Driver User Guide 120 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Setting up devices Specific device tasks Users and accounts See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting task parameters on page 169 About user accounts and privileges on page 370 Workflow for configuring the delid station About this topic The delid station is an instrument that uses a suction cup to remove a lid from a plate The lid then can be replaced or dropped into the trash Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the delid station devic
91. device file Using the lid hotel Diagnostics Using the lid hotel tasks See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics on page 130 Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 127 VWorks User Guide Creating a lid hotel profile About this topic Before you start Procedure Related information This topic describes how to create a profile for the lid hotel in VWorks Before you can create a profile you must add the lid hotel to the device manager To create a lid hotel profile 1 Inthe Lid Hotel Diagnostics dialog box click the Profile tab Lid Hotel Diagnostics Eg Diagnostics Profile Control __ Parameters COM Port com Number of slots o X Create X Save settings 2 Click Create enter a name for the lid hotel in the New Profile dialog box and click OK 3 From the COM Port list box select the port on the computer that you are using to connect the lid hotel 4 Inthe Number of slots field enter the number of storage bays that are on this lid hotel 5 Click Save settings and then close the dialog box For information about See Adding a device Adding devices on page 107 The next step Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Open the diagnostics dialog box
92. devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Centrifuge task parameters on page 190 VSpin User Guide 152 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Creating a VSpin profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the VSpin Before you start Before you can create a profile you must add the VSpin to the device manager Procedure To create a VSpin profile 1 Inthe VSpin Control dialog box click the Profile tab 2 Click Add Profile enter a name for the profile in the Add Profile dialog box and click OK 3 Enter the appropriate communication settings for the profile IMPORTANT Do not change the motor settings 4 Click OK Related information For information about The next step The workflow this topic belongs to Opening VSpin s control dialog box VSpin profile settings and management Setting up a device Managing profiles and settings Using VSpin Diagnostics Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 153 VWorks User Guide See Setting VSpin device properties on page 153 Workflow for configuring the VSpin on page 151 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 VSpin User Guide Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 VSpin User Guide VSpin User Guide Setting VSpin device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the VSpin device properties
93. dialog box To create a program 1 Open Bio Tek Diagnostics 2 Click New 3 Type a name for the program in the New Program dialog box 4 Click OK 5 Complete the parameter settings as required in the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics dialog box Refer to the parameter tables below and the parameters described in the Bio Tek ELx405 Washer Operator s Guide 6 Click Save Bio Tek Diagnostics programs You can run any program that was created using Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics software IMPORTANT Before running a program make sure that the Bio Tek Washer display does not read UNDER EXTERNAL CONTROL If it does VWorks will freeze when you run the program and you will have to end the application from the Microsoft Windows Task Manager To run a program 1 Select the program from the Program list box 2 Click Run Standard programs The Bio Tek Washer includes a number of standard programs for uses such as measuring the accuracy and precision of dispense volumes To run a standard program 1 Select the program from the Standard program list box 2 Click Run Parameter tables Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using 395 VWorks User Guide Some of the parameter names used in Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics are slightly different to the names given in the Bio Tek ELx405 Washer Operator s Guide The names that are different are listed in the following tables to help you when looking up information Aspirate
94. dynamic scheduler Protocols are compiled and simulated Manual and automatic starts Real time manipulation and troubleshooting This topic briefly introduces VWorks VWorks is software that manages and controls lab automation systems VWorks can control very simple systems such as a single pipettor that is fed microplates by a human and it can control complex systems such as a BioCel that use a robot to move plates between a dozen or more instruments Users create and run protocols which are sequences of tasks Each task performs an activity such as moving a microplate to a plate sealer where the plate is sealed Because VWorks is a multithreaded application a single protocol can simultaneously run more than one sequence of tasks A dynamic scheduler analyzes the protocol as it is run and performs the tasks in a manner that uses the instruments simultaneously and most efficiently This efficiency reduces the overall time of the run Before a protocol is run a compiler checks it for logical errors that would otherwise prevent the protocol from completing Users also have the option of running simulations of the protocol before committing expensive samples Protocols can be started one at a time by a user or started unattended using a timer and a list of protocols Users can be automatically informed of errors by email or pager VWorks can also manipulate each instrument in the system in real time by sending individu
95. e Maximum robot speed e General description of labware e Assignment of labware class such as TipBoxes and TallPlates Liquid class y Plate to y task parameters toolbar ia 6 3 o G gt 2 Ss Legend To open in the Device List toolbar double click Labware To open click a pipette task _ Flowofdata Pipette Task protocol file 292 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide About bar code reading and tracking About this topic Who should read this Bar code readers VCode bar code printer and optional reader Related information This topic gives an overview of the bar code reading and tracking that can be set up through VWorks Technicians and administrators who write protocols with bar code reader tasks or VCode tasks A customized lab automation system can have bar code readers installed that can read bar codes on one side of a plate the side varies depending on your application needs These may be installed on VPrep shelves or platepads Every time a plate is moved to one of these devices the bar code is read Note To read a bar code at a platepad bar code reader or VCode use the Place Plate task If your lab automation system has a VCode you have the ability to print and apply bar code labels If the VCode includes an optional reader bar code labels can be read on any side of the plate because the VCode
96. easier to manage than many individual labware entries Labware classes are used in combination with the device manager to restrict which types of labware can be used on which devices during a protocol run This helps to prevent wasted runs and damage to the devices on the platform An example of how damage can be prevented by labware restriction is where a tipbox that is too tall for a device crashes into the device as the robot delivers it Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 339 VWorks User Guide Labware editor overview About this topic Labware Editor pages Labware Entries page This topic gives an overview of the organization of the labware editor s user interface The labware editor has two tabbed pages Q Labware Entries where labware definitions are entered Q Labware Classes where defined labware is assigned to classes Labware Editor Labware Classes Sub pages The Labware Entries page has the following sub pages Plate Properties Stacker VPrep Well Definition Image DODDO Labware Classes The sub page tabs are located at the bottom of the page Some tabs may be hidden if they are not relevant Labware selection box The labware selection box which is the left hand column is the same on each page Please select a labware entry from the list below in order to view and edit its properties 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black w G 1536
97. f Cancel Password a 3 Enter your password and click OK Note If this is the first time anyone has logged in to this installation of VWorks there is one administrator account and its password is blank Changing your You can change the password for your user account at any time password To change your user account password l 2 3 4 Click the Login button Select your account User Name from the list box Click the Change Password button In the Change Password dialog box a Type your old password in the Old text box If the Old text box field is gray if there is no password currently selected for the account b Type your new password in the New text box c Type your new password again in the Confirm New text box d Click OK Click OK Related information Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 29 VWorks User Guide For information about See What to do next Opening a protocol in VWorks on page 33 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 About tasks processes and protocols About this topic Plate icon defined Task defined This topic defines some important terms related to protocols and processes In order to fully understand this guide you need to know the definitions of the terms in this topic A plate icon represents the basic information about a plate or collection of plates and is the first icon in a process displayed in the pro
98. have occurred during the protocol including any bar code errors This data is not saved in a separate log but is included in the protocol log file Notes Notes that you add You can search for specific text in the log toolbar To perform a search in the Log toolbar 1 Select the appropriate tab in the Log toolbar 2 Click in the toolbar pane 3 Click CTRL F The Find dialog box opens Find 29 xi Find what l Eind Next J7 Match whole word only Direction Cancel I Match case C Up Down You can type notes into the Log toolbar during a run Any notes that you type are also incorporated into the protocol log file To add a note to the Log toolbar and protocol log file l 2 3 4 5 At the bottom of the Log toolbar click the Notes tab Click in the toolbar pane at the end of a line Press ENTER on the keyboard to create a blank line Type the note Press ENTER A timestamp is appended to the note Adding a delimiter Chapter 4 Performing a run TL VWorks User Guide You can add a dotted line to the Log toolbar and log file For example you can use this line to mark the start of a run or an important note that you add You can add the delimiter to all the logs Process Pipettor Fluid Transfers Measurements and so on To add a delimiter to the Log toolbar and log files 1 Right click in the Log toolbar pane 2 Select one of the following Add delimiter to this log Ad
99. help us to troubleshoot the problem File Find in Protocol file you were running The location set by your when the problem occurred administrator when saving protocols Device file The location set by your administrator when saving device files Protocol log file The location set in log file options Velocity11 registry file The Windows registry HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWAR E Velocity11 a Select the Attach log files check box b Click the ellipsis button Co c Browse to one of the files listed above and click Open d Repeat this step to attach each remaining file 4 Click Email Velocity11 and wait until a Message Sent message box appears 520 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Setting up email so that you can Setting up email on page 374 send a bug report Compilation warnings and errors About this topic Compilation warnings Compilation errors This topic briefly describes compilation warnings and errors Warnings alert you to situations that seem to have incorrect intent but that will not cause a collision or a device to fail Compilation warnings are displayed in the VWorks log toolbar listing the task that caused the warning Warnings are generated for example when U Pipette tips are on the VPrep head at the start of the protocol so a tips off task is run before a tips on task Q No label i
100. ie 1 PlateHub 3 plateHub Ji J4 1 PlateHub 4 Plater j1 Js 1 PlateHub 5 plateHub i Je 1 PlateHub 6 Matera 1 7 1 PlateHub 7 PlateHub i 1 PlateHub 8 9 Miaka bh 1 Click Save Changes Click the close box to close the inventory editor The location group is listed in the Available locations list of the Load Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Available locations Edit location groups Name _ Number of plates Deleting a location group Related information Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 315 VWorks User Guide To delete a location group from the inventory 1 Open the inventory editor 2 Select a location group in the Saved Locations group box 3 Click Delete For information about Creating a plate group Opening the inventory editor Moving plates in and out ofa storage device Incubating plates Using bar code input files See Creating a plate group on page 316 Opening the inventory editor on page 310 Q Moving plates into a storage device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 316 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Creating a plate group About this topic This topic describes how to create a plate group which is a
101. into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Nanodrop instrument set the Nanodrop task parameters and use Nanodrop Diagnostics 458 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Nanodrop About this topic This topic gives the workflow for configuring the Nanodrop Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a Nanodrop profile on page 459 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the Nanodrop device properties on page 461 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Nanodrop task parameters Setting Nanodrop task parameters on page 462 Using Nanodrop Diagnostics Using Nanodrop Diagnostics on page 463 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using 459 VWorks User Guide Creating a Nanodrop profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Nanodrop in VWorks A profile is one or more settings that are remembered after you exit VWorks In the case of the Nanodrop the only setting stored in a profile is the COM port which identifies the serial port on the computer to use when connecting the Nanodrop You need to have a unique profile for each Nanodrop in your system Before you start Before you can create a Nanodrop profi
102. is clear of the lab automation system and that there are no objects that could obstruct the robot INJURY HAZARD When VWorks starts robot and instrument parts may unexpectedly move to their home positions Double click the shortcut to VWorks on the Windows desktop Note If the shortcut has been deleted open the folder C VWorks Workspace bin and create a new shortcut from the executable file VWorksversion exe The VWorks splash screen opens VWorks opens at the Progress tab and you are logged in with guest privileges Vwrorks Untitled Cle Yew Ios io Ogua PG tL secure tom J JE JCanm J an IL Eames C Enable noet manager Progets Procol Editor Pipette Process Edir Device Manager wy Protocol T pate Tne ture T rte T Protocsi netes anas T PEA For information about What to do next The workflow that this procedure belongs to See Logging in to VWorks and changing your password on page 28 Workflow for preparing a run on page 26 28 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Logging in to VWorks and changing your password About this topic This topic describes how to log in to VWorks and if necessary change your password Logging in To login to VWorks 1 Click Login Fou Log In 2 Select your account User Name from the list box User Authentication xi User Name Example User
103. is functioning and correctly aligned before starting runs Auxiliary bar code readers are set up in the Device Properties page Device Properties General Teachpoints a Device has south side BCR Yes South side BCR COM port 6 Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No Procedure To test auxiliary bar code readers 1 Select Tools gt Test Auxiliary Bar Code Readers The Bar Code Test dialog box opens 2 From the list box select the reader you want to test Bar Code Test x R Plate Pad 1 Default Location south side Plate Pad 2 Default Location south side Plate Pad 1 Default Location south side 3 Click the Test button The result of the test appears at the bottom of the dialog box Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 59 VWorks User Guide Performing a run This chapter describes how to set up and start an existing protocol run or run set All of the procedures in this chapter and the preceding chapter Preparing for a run on page 25 can be performed by someone with Operator privileges eai Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Overview of performing a run About this topic Ways to set up a run Overview This topic introduces the various ways you can start runs There are three ways to set up and start a
104. list b Click Add and the device name appears in the Devices to use list Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Dispense only Program number to run 1 E Prime only Prime volume 0 Available devices Remove Devices to use Flexispence Use earlier Use later 4 If you have added more than one FlexiSpense M you can change the order in which a particular FlexiSpense M is used a Select a FlexiSpense M in the Devices to use list b Click Use earlier to increase the priority of the FlexiSpense M or Use later to decrease its priority Related information Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using 433 VWorks User Guide For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to FlexiSpense M on page 428 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using FlexiSpense M Diagnostics Using Flexispense M Diagnostics on page 433 Using Flexispense M Diagnostics About this topic To modify a dispense program This topic describes how to use FlexiSpense M Diagnostics to U Modify dispense programs Q View plate definitions Q Manually control the pump To modify dispense programs 1 Open the Flexispense M Diagnostics Program Definitions Program number 1 Y Columns to dispense to Use plate definiti
105. list box 400 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Opening Echo 550 Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 The next step Setting the Echo 550 device properties on page 400 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring Echo 550 belongs to devices on page 398 Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Echo 550 task parameters Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics Using Echo 550 Diagnostics on page 408 Setting the Echo 550 device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the device properties for the Echo 550 parent device The device properties provide VWorks with additional information about the Echo 550 s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the Echo 550 device properties l 2 3 4 Open the Echo 550 Device Properties page Set Echo 550 s generic properties Expand the Labcyte Echo 550 properties group Device List x Device Properties ra System E General 5 amp Labcyte Echo550 Device name Echo550 Echo550 Device type Labcyte Echo550 E A Velocity11 Robot E Labcyte Echo550 properties A Robot Profile name Delete device Initialize all devices Device diagnostics If not already selected doub
106. list of specific plates that can be moved to or out of a plate storage device without regard for in which slots they are stored Who should read Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX this incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before you start Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 Procedure To create a plate group 1 Add a Load task to a protocol and select it 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the Groups tab 3 Click Edit plate groups to open the inventory editor 4 Click Create new and enter a name for the group Inventory Editor Please enter a new name Plate Group 5 Click OK 6 Select a group of available plates Available Plates cassette device eastbe labware Te 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 78309 eal 1536 Greiner Low rome Black 7 Pater ETT 1536 Greiner ro TETA Black 7 j PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black LEED PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7 If there are no available plates you must first move plates into the storage device You can use CTRL click or SHIFT click to select more than one slot 7 Drag the group into the Group Members list Group Members EE SO 3 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 a a En n n 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 CET a Ca A a A es 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 1 Plate
107. load into the storage device Click OK 320 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide 12 Confirm that the plates are in the inventory a Click the Load task b Click Edit location groups to open the inventory editor c Click the Inventory Management tab riInventory View Current filter Select view type view by plate shows only plates that are currently in a mass storage device b cassette device eastbe labware northbe plate_name slot southbe status 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 1 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 2 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 3 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 4 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 5 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low volume Black 783092 plate 6 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 7 OK 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 783092 plate 8 OK Loading plates To load plates manually cassettes of plates are physically put in to the manually storage device and a run is simulated to create the matching list of plates in the inventory To load plates manually 1 Physically load the cassettes of plates in to the storage device 2 Follow the procedure for loading plates robotically but click Simulation is off to turn on the simulator Make sure that the location group matches the cassettes that you
108. not confuse this task with the Delid Relid task which uses a vacuum to remove lids from plates Procedure To set the Vacuum task parameters 1 Add the Vacuum task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar a Inthe Amount of time to draw vacuum text box enter the length of time that you want the vacuum to pull b Inthe Post vacuum delay field enter the time that you want to elapse between the time the vacuum pump stops and when the plate is available to be picked up by the robot The delay is the time that elapses before the robot picks up the plate allowing the vacuum under the plate to dissipate If this value is too small the robot may not pick up the plate correctly Task Settings Advanced Settings Amount of time to draw vacuum 0 1000 sec 10 Post vacuum delay 0 1000 sec 1 Related information For information about See Configuring a Vacuum Station asa Setting the vacuum station device device properties on page 145 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Delidding plates Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 216 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the VSpin with Access2 task parameters VSpin with Access2 This task moves a plate to an Access2 and centrifuges it Setting VSpin with To set VSpin
109. of liquid being dispensed This value allows the tips to move upwards during dispensing to maintain a certain height above the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you use You might want this value to be the same as the Tip Retract Distance for the Aspirate pipette task The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel Whether you want the tips to touch the sides of the plate wells or not When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want the tips to touch harder increase this value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value The height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells The number of sides of the wells that you want the tips to touch Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Property task velocity task volume task enableShake task shakeRPM task shakeDelay task shakeTime Property task plateName Data type Float Float Boolean Integer Integer Integer Mix task Task parameters Dispense ve
110. of the image file Image filename 3 Double click the image file O The image appears below in the user interface Image filename Related information For information about Opening the labware editor Creating a labware entry before defining it Defining general properties Defining plate properties Defining stacker properties Defining VPrep well properties What to do next See Opening the labware editor on page 341 Adding a labware entry on page 342 Defining general properties on page 347 Defining plate properties on page 348 Defining stacker properties on page 351 Defining VPrep well properties on page 354 Defining labware classes on page 357 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide 357 Defining labware classes About this topic About labware classes Two places to define classes About the Labware Classes page This topic explains how to set up labware classes Labware classes contain labware entries When you set up a device you can associate labware classes with the device to indicate what labware can and cannot be used with the device Before you create labware classes consider what labware you want allowed or prohibited on each of your devices VWorks comes with three labware classes ready defined Q Uses Filter Platepad Q Uses Standard Platepad Q Uses Vacuum Platepad You can
111. procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 Saving the protocol Saving protocols on page 180 180 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Saving protocols About this topic Saving a protocol Adding notes about the protocol Related information This topic describes how to save a protocol and how to add notes toa protocol To save a protocol you must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account IMPORTANT When you edit a protocol the changes take effect immediately However unless you explicitly save the protocol the changes are lost when you exit VWorks To save a protocol 1 Navigate to File gt Protocol File click Save or Save As Before you save the protocol you may want to add notes to it You can add a description of your protocol to remind yourself of its features or for VWorks operators to review before performing a run To add notes about your protocol 1 Click Tools and select Protocol Options 2 Type your notes into the Description Notes text box Description Notes This is a description of my latest protocol Note When you open a new protocol its associated description replaces the description of the previous protocol For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next Simulating a run on page 181 Chap
112. pumps pump These properties are the same as the properties described for the Wash Tips task Data type String Task parameters Plate name Comments The name of the plate 286 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Property Data type Task parameters Comments task aspirate Velocity Float Aspirate velocity The rate at which to draw up liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor task aspirateAcceleration Float Aspirate acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the maximum aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor task blowoff Float Last cycle blowout The volume of air to blow volume out when the tips are in the liquid This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume task cycles Integer Number of wash cycles The number of aspirate dispense operations task dispenseAcceleration Float Dispense acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the Dispense Velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor task dispenseToWaste Boolean Dispense to waste at The tips will dispense height of check box outside the MicroWash tray chimneys task dispenseVelocity Float Dispense velocity The rate at which to dispense the liquid I
113. screenshot shows a short script that prints the parameters of a task to the log toolbar just before the task runs In this case the script is written directly in the Advanced Settings text box Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Enter pre task script or click the browse button to load a script from an external file Browse ie in task print task x task x The VWorks interpreter supports the JavaScript 1 5 core functions and objects Velocity11 has also defined its own functions and objects that can be used in VWorks scripts Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 271 VWorks User Guide VWorks defined The following VWorks defined functions are available globally meaning global functions that they are not restricted to a particular object or programming context Function Description printO Prints time stamped messages to the VWorks log Parameter Text string Example print plate name open Opens a file Parameter Text string Example open c VWorks workspace text txt runQ Runs a program as though it is being called from a command line Parameters Text string Required Allows you to initiate a command that you could otherwise enter into the Windows Run dialog box suchasnotepad text txt opens a file named text txt in Windows Notepad Q Boolean True False Optional Default is False If True VWorks waits for the function to complete before
114. stackers you need to add a dynamic stacker to the Device Manager for each stack you expect to require You can determine which stackers contain which plates at the end of the run by consulting the run log Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 195 Related information For information about Configuring a VStack device Adding tasks to protocols Restacking parameters Restacking example Velocity11 robots VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the VStack on page 157 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Setting Restack task parameters on page 207 Restack task example on page 208 BioCel User Guide Setting Incubate task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Incubate task parameters Incubate task The Incubate task performs a timed incubation of a plate It is typically defined used for short incubations The number of plates that can be incubated simultaneously is limited by the number of platepads and plate hotels that are available for holding plates Process overview The overall process for a typical incubation is as follows 1 Incubation of the plate starts with the addition of an initiating reagent This would be performed by a liquid handling task such as QFill task or Pipette Process task 2 The plate is moved to a platepad When the plate arrives at the platepad the incubation time parameter that
115. start the computer The server software is included in the DHCP Server Kit from Velocity11 IMPORTANT You should only run one DHCP server on one network so do not install the Velocity11 DHCP server if you are integrating your device into an existing network that has dynamic IP address assignment Note Because the DHCP software runs as a service you may need additional privileges on the controlling computer to install it Please check with your network administrator if you think you may not have sufficient privileges To install and start the DHCP server software 1 Create the following folder on the controlling computer C Program Files Velocity11 DHCP server In Windows navigate to the VWorks CD ROM drive Navigate to the folder and copy all of the files into the new folder on your computer s hard drive 4 Double click the file named dhcpsrv exe The DHCP Server window opens DHCP Server xi Do you want to install the DHCP server as a Windows NT 2000 service Q Yes No I Don t ask this question again 5 Click Yes This installs the DHCP server on your computer The DHCP Server window opens and displays the status as Running Chapter 5 VWorks installation 97 VWorks User Guide DHCP Server me xi m Service Welcome to the DHCP Server Y1 5 2 Install Remove Start Stop Written by Uwe 4 Ruttkamp Status Running 6 Click the close box to close the window
116. such as plate seal and bar code labels 72 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide System monitoring What is monitored by VWorks during a run depends on the options selected for the protocol What to do if you get If you get an error during a run refer to Maintenance and an error troubleshooting on page 517 for help Related information For information about See Options for system monitoring U Setting general options on page 34 U Setting general errorhandling options on page 38 Q Adding an alarm on page 53 Q User guides for your devices Monitoring UPS status on the BioCel About this topic If you are using the BioCel you can monitor the UPS uninterruptible power supply status at any time Note If you are not using a BioCel and want a UPS that can be monitored from VWorks contact the Velocity11 Service Center This topic explains how to view this status in the UPS Diagnostics dialog box Procedure To monitor the UPS status 1 Select Tools gt Options 2 Inthe VWorks Options dialog box make sure that the Options tab is selected 3 In the UPS Settings group box click UPSDiags If there are two UPSs on your BioCel you can click UPS2Diags for the status of the secondary UPS Chapter 4 Performing a run 73 VWorks User Guide This opens the UPS Diagnostics dialog box Battery level i z Power load z i Internal temperature C i i Pow
117. tab wells 1 2000 mm s Delete liquid entry Aspirate Equation Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions 363 VWorks User Guide Opening the liquid library editor About this topic This topic explains how to open the liquid library editor You open the liquid library editor when you want to U View the properties that are defined for a liquid class U Edit the properties that are defined for a liquid class Q Add new liquid classes Before you start You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to open the liquid library editor Procedure To open the liquid library editor from VWorks 1 Click the Device Manager tab 2 Inthe Device List select Liquids from the System device 3 Click Device Diagnostics The Liquid Library Editor opens Related information For information about See Creating a new liquid class entry Creating a liquid class on page 364 The liquid library editor About the liquid library editor on page 362 364 Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions VWorks User Guide Creating a liquid class About this topic Before you start Types of liquid classes to create Procedure This topic describes how to create a new liquid class You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to perform this procedure You may want to create different classes for different Q Q Types of liquids For e
118. task parameters Setting MultiDrop task parameters on page 441 446 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide 447 VWorks User Guide Multiskan Ascent setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Thermo Labsystems Multiskan Ascent is a 96 and 384 well microplate reader that can be integrated into a lab automation system using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Multiskan Ascent instrument set the Multiskan Ascent task parameters and use Multiskan Diagnostics 448 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent About this topic This topic gives the workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a Multiskan Ascent profile on page 449 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the Multiskan Ascent device properties on page 450 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Multiskan task parameters Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters on page 452 Using Multiskan Diagnostics Using Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics on page 454 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using 449 VWorks User Guide Creating a Multiskan Ascent profile Abou
119. task parameters The task side property is an array of four label_data objects Q task side SOUTH Q task side EAST Q task side NORTH Q task side WEST Each of these task side properties has nine properties representing the fields on the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar for the Apply Label task In the table below point can be replaced by SOUTH EAST NORTH or WEST For example the Printing option field for the south label see screenshot is represented as task side SOUTH printLabel Chapter 11 Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings South West North East Creating a protocol advanced topics 277 VWorks User Guide Property task side point field task side point format task side point increment Chars task side point startingIn crement task side point base task side point verifyBarc ode task side point maxVerify Attempts task side point sourceBar codeSide task side point printLabel Printing option Use this label Data type Task parameter s An array of Field 1 Field 2 Field 3 six strings Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 Integer Format to use Integer Increment chars Integer Starting increment Integer Numeric 0 9 Alphanumeric 0 Z Integer Verify bar codes Integer reapply up to __ times Integer Use existing bar code from side Integer Printing option Comments For example task side WEST field 2 matches the Field 2 te
120. that protocol opens The device file tells the software which devices are connected to the system Then for some kinds of devices an initialization step tests the communication between VWorks and the device During this process a message window opens displaying the name of the devices that the software expects to find Devices are removed from the list as the system computer determines that the devices are ready In the following example there are six devices that the software is trying to initialize Waiting for Devices x Please wait while the following devices initialize If there is a problem with initializing a device you receive an error message dialog box for that device The problem encountered is stated in the text field of the dialog box In this example VWorks could not initialize the Robot device Robot Error Could not communicate with robot Ignore amp Continue leaving device in current state Make sure that the device is turned on and that the communications cable is connected properly 522 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting VWorks User Guide Click Diagnostics and try to resolve the problem in the device profile If that does not solve the problem contact the Velocity11 Service Center Resolving non VCode bar code reader errors About this topic Types of bar code misread errors Bar code error option Bar code no read errors The information in this topic refers
121. that a firewall should remain on it is possible through the firewall to configure the firewall to allow data that is transmitted on a particular port to pass through If you are using dynamic IP addresses the firewall should pass data though on UDP ports 67 and 7611 If you are using static IP addresses the firewall should pass data though on UDP port 7611 For help configuring the firewall consult an experienced network administrator Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflows for Ethernet networking on belongs to page 89 Uninstalling VWorks About this topic This topic describes two ways to uninstall VWorks When to remove In general it is sufficient to uninstall the VWorks program without Velocity11 registry removing the registry files However you can remove the Velocity I files files from the registry if Q You want to make a completely fresh start with VWorks removing all user accounts teachpoints device profiles and liquid and labware definitions or Q You do not intend to run VWorks on your system again 100 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Procedures Related information To remove VWorks 1 Use the Add Remove Programs control panel For more information see the online help for your Windows operating system IMPORTANT The following procedure deletes the user accounts labware definitions liquid library data devi
122. the partial completion of a task has not made changes that will cause an error or cause samples to be switched around when the run continues For example errors can be caused when manually moving a plate toa position that should not have a plate Use VWorks to stop a run under normal circumstances such as when you want to Add or remove labware from stackers Clean up a spill Add buffer to a VPrep reservoir Diagnose a problem that you notice CODODD Perform an operation that is not part of the protocol Also use VWorks to abort a run in a non emergency situation When you stop a run in VWorks the currently scheduled task continues to completion After this you can either continue or abort the run To stop a run using VWorks 1 In VWorks click Pause 4 Pause The Scheduler Paused dialog box opens and the currently scheduled task continues to completion This may take up to a minute After that no more tasks are performed 70 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Scheduler Paused c Abort process Scheduler paused 2 You now have the following choices If you want to Then Continue with the run Click Continue Troubleshoot a problem or Click Diagnostics select the device perform a manual operation that you want to interact with and open the diagnostics software Abort the protocol Click Abort Process Using an emergency If your lab automation system has an emergency stop butt
123. the tip box that will contain the tips Creating a process for the tip box 1 2 ORNO ET Oe SOR Click the Protocol Editor tab Click Add A plate definition icon appears in the Protocol Editor window If the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar is not showing select View gt Toolbars gt Protocol Task Parameters In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar a Type a name for the plate in the Plate Name text box b Inthe Plate type list box select the tip box that has already been configured for use on the shelf of the VPrep that you intend to use When you select a tip box Stacker Pipette process and Waste tasks are automatically added c Inthe Simultaneous Plates text box type the maximum number of plates of this type that you want to be available to the system at one time d Ifthe tip boxes have lids select the Plates have lids check box If the check box is unavailable make sure that the selected plate type is set to allow the use of a lid in the labware editor IMPORTANT If this option is not selected and the tip box has a lid the VPrep head will crash into the tip box lid and return a z axis position error that will require a recovery procedure e Leave the Plates enter the system sealed check box clear f Ifthe tip boxes have a bar code on the south side select the first Incoming plates have a bar code check box g Inthe Bar Code Control group box select one or more of the options if you
124. the tips to touch harder increase this value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value d Inthe Number of sides to touch text box type a value for number of sides of the wells that you want the tips to touch 7 Inthe Plate to dispense to list box select the plate or device to dispense to If you do not want to record this dispense in the transfer log clear the Record in transfer log check box You might do this for example if you are running a casual test protocol For more information about Creating a pipette process Creating protocol basics Setting pipette task parameters See Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 238 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Dry Tips pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Dry Tips task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep Dry Tips pipette task The Dry Tips task is used with a tip dryer on a VPrep with a fixed tip defined head to dry the pipette tips There are two phases to drying Q Initial Rapidly raises the temperature from ambient to a temperature suitable for drying Q Final Maintains a suitable drying temperature The goal when setting Dry Tips task parameters is to raise the temperature quickly for a short time and
125. to be concerned with Q Windows XP operating system has a built in firewall that may be turned on by default or may have been turned on by someone in your organization Q Your computer may be running a separate firewall program that your organization has purchased and installed Either of these types of firewall can prevent the devices on the network from showing up in the Discovered BioNet Devices dialog box Device Id Device Type IP Address Status a OK YCode 192 168 0 2 0 VCode 00 30 rz Not Found With dynamic If your Ethernet network is using dynamic IP addressing the firewall may IP addressing block the request for an IP address from your device when it is turned on With static If your Ethernet network is using static IP addressing the VWorks IP addressing software sends out a request for devices on the network to identify themselves but the firewall may block the response About turning off To turn off the firewall for your operating system follow the directions in firewalls Windows Help and Support on your computer To turn off a separate firewall program follow the directions in the documentation that accompanies the program You can either uninstall the program or stop it If you choose to stop it make sure that the program is not configured to start up again every time you restart the computer Chapter 5 VWorks installation 99 VWorks User Guide Passing data If your organization insists
126. to errors generated by bar code readers that are not attached to a VCode These include Q Robot bar code readers Q Optional VPrep shelf bar code readers Q Optional platepad bar code readers There are two types of bar code misread errors Error type Description Bar code no read A bar code reader is unable to read a bar code when it picks up a plate Bar code mismatch The bar code of the plate that is picked up does not match the bar code that VWorks expects for that plate Note VWorks does not attempt to read a bar code unless you have specified in the plate icon parameters that incoming plates have bar codes on that side The result of a bar code misread error depends on whether Halt on bar code misreads error option is selected If the option is selected Q The protocol pauses Q An error is generated in the log txt file and VPrep log file Q A dialog box opens allowing you to enter the correct bar code If the option is not selected Q An error is generated in the log txt file and VPrep log file Q The protocol continues without pausing so there are no recovery steps When a bar code cannot be read and the Halt on bar code misreads error option is selected an error message is generated stating Could not read side bar code on plate at device Bar code mismatch errors Recovering from bar code errors Related information Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting 523 VWorks U
127. to start incubating is now on the bottom Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader VPrep If plates are moved directly to a reader from this position the plate that has incubated for the least time is read first leading to a large inconsistency in interplate incubation times The plates must be restacked so that the plate that started incubating first is read first 210 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide 4 The plates are moved to another stacker reversing their order Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader VPrep PLL 5 The remaining plates are restacked so that the plate that started incubating first lies on the bottom Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader i VPrep 6 The plates are moved from the stack to the reader after the time interval specified in the Task Parameters toolbar The plates are moved one at a time to a plate reader when their individual incubation times have elapsed and then to storage In this example the final stack is the same as the starting stack Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader VPrep lai The actual incubation continues as the robot moves the plate to the reader and the reader prepares to take measurements Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 211 VWorks User Guide 7 When the run is complete all plates are in the final stack ready for removal from the system Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader
128. types of transfer in which fluid aspirated from a single column of the source is dispensed into five columns of the destination 1 N transfer Volumes Resulting Wash tasks Max volume 50 uL A single Wash task is executed after Transfer 10 uL the Dispense task Max volume 10 uL Five Wash tasks will be interleaved Transfer 10 uL with the five Aspirate and Dispense tasks Max volume 10 uL Five Wash tasks will be interleaved with the 25 Aspirate and Dispense tasks After each destination column has received 50 uL washing will occur Transfer 50 uL 12 If the tip changing option in step 1 was selected click Next to go to step 5 of the FII Plate Wizard and specify tip changes 245 246 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Fill Plate Wizard xi Step 5 Specify the tip changes Verify the number of tip changes required 22 tips on operations are required for this transfer 23 tips on operations are allowed by the tip box Tip Shelf The transfer begins with tips on the pipette head Where is the first tips off 1 selection column 1 Specify the columns to put tips on for plate Tip Shelf 1000000000 0000000 oo 900000000 jeeeaaanne 22 selections columns 2 23 For tip changing the Fill Plate pipette task assumes that the task begins with clean tips on the pipette head and that the Fill Plate pipette task will end with dirty tips on the pipette head T
129. use You might want this value to be the same as the Tip Retract Distance for the Dispense pipette task The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel The rate at which to draw up liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The volume of liquid to be drawn up into each pipette tip Comments The name of the plate 280 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Property task quadrants task action Dispense task Data type An array of pairs of integers Integer Task parameter Quadrants diagram Q Press On New Tips integer 1 Q Tips off integer 2 Comments A quadrant is an evenly spaced array of locations that is addressable by the tips on a pipette head A 96 well head can dispense into a 96 well plate four quadrants of a 384 well plate and 16 quadrants of a 1536 well plate Puts tips on to a VPrep head or removes tips from a VPrep head These properties are the same as the properties described for the Dispense task Property task plateName task acceleration task blowoutVolume task liquidClass task postDispenseVolume task quadrants Data type String Float Float String Float
130. use VWorks to operate your lab automation system you need to become familiar with the contents of this guide Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide Who should read this guide Job roles This user guide is intended to be read by people with the following job roles Job role Responsibilities Integrator Someone who writes software and configures hardware controlled by VWorks Lab manager administrator or Someone who is responsible for lechnician Q Developing the applications that are run using VWorks U Solving the more challenging problems that may arise Q Developing training materials and standard operating procedures for operators Operator Someone who performs the daily production work using VWorks and solves routine problems Your organization may choose to create its own procedures for operators based on the information in this guide Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide About Velocity11 user guides Introduction Each Velocityl1 user guide is delivered to you as Q Online help Q APDF file Q A printed book The information in each format is the same but each has different strengths To work most effectively it helps to know when it is best to use each format Where to get the Online help online help and PDF The VWorks online help file is installed separately from the software from the VWorks Help CD_ROM The file that launches the help is called help html and is located in this folder
131. value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value The height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells The volume of liquid to be drawn up into each pipette tip Related information Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 289 For information about Using JavaScript in VWorks The JavaScript plate object and properties Apply Label task parameters Change Tips task parameters Dispense task parameters Dry Tips task parameters Loop pipette task parameters Mix task parameters Pump Reagent task parameters Wash Tips task parameters VWorks User Guide See Using JavaScript in VWorks on page 269 Using JavaScript in VWorks on page 269 About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 Setting Change Tips pipette task parameters on page 232 Setting Dispense pipette task parameters on page 235 Setting Dry Tips pipette task parameters on page 238 Setting Loop pipette task parameters on page 248 Setting Mix pipette task parameters on page 249 Setting Pump Reagent pipette task parameters on page 252 Setting Wash Tips pipette task parameters on page 262 290 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Understanding the configuration settings in a pipette task About this topic Information flow diagram Dozens of separate pieces of da
132. view and define which plate types are associated with which labware classes in U The Labware Classes page U The Labware Classes sub page of the Labware Entries page These views present the same information in different ways In the Labware Classes page if you select a class in the labware selection box on the left the plate types that are members of that class are displayed in the far right hand column Labware Entries Labware Classes Please select a labware class from the list below in order to view and edit its properties Labware Entry Membership Labware entries that are not a member of this labware class 384 ABGene short well plate Labware entries that are a member of this labware class Intermediate Height 1384 ABGene deepwell TallPlates 384 Matrix clear polystyrene TipBoxes 384 REMP micro tube rack Uses Filter Platepad 384 REMP square well Uses Standard Platepad 96 ABGene deepwell block Uses Vacuum Platepad Velocity11 Labware 96 ABGene tube rack TRIPOS 96 Matrix clear polystyrene 96 Matrix tube rack 96 Micronics tube rack ALSB Costar 384 black Flatbottom Costar 384 polypro round bottom Costar 96 well plate Falcon 384 clear bottom Falcon 384 clear polystyrene Matrix 96 well Block Polypro MJ Research 384 well plate New plate Renamed Polyfiltronics 384 Filter plate Test plate Tip Box Lid 11 Autofilling Reservoir 384 11 Autofilling Reservoir 96 11 Manual Reservoir 384
133. 0 Procedure Related information To add a labware class l 2 3 Open the labware editor New labware entry and click OK Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 359 VWorks User Guide In the Labware Classes page click New labware class Under the labware selection box on the left of the window click In the New Labware Class dialog box enter a name for the plate The entry appears in the list of labware classes To associate a type of plate with a labware class Open the labware editor In the Labware Classes page or Labware Classes sub page select an item from the middle column To select more than one item use SHIFT click or CTRL click If you want to move all entries click gt gt hand column Click gt to move the labware entries or labware classes to the right Click Save Changes to save your changes Or if you are in the Labware Classes page you can click Save Changes As to save as a new labware class For information about Opening the labware editor Creating a labware entry before defining it Defining general properties Defining plate properties Defining stacker properties Defining VPrep well properties Associating an image with a labware entry to make the entry easily recognized See Opening the labware editor on page 341 Adding a labware entry on page 342 Defining general properties on page 347 Defining
134. 0 Object_Type DownstackPlate Release _Time_MS 10000 gt sStackers_To_Use gt lt Stacker Name stacker2 gt lt Stackers_To_Use gt lt TaskO gt Task1 Description Bar code plate Device vcode1 Icon 1 Object_Type BarcodePlate Type BarcodePlate gt south Bar_Code_Names 0 Base 10 File_Name Format 1 Increment_Characters 3 Lookup_Key 2 Max_erification_Attempts 0 Number_Of_Fields 2 Plugin_Name Preprinted_Side 0 Print_Label 1 Starting_Increment 1 Verify_Barcodes 0 gt Fields j gt You can also open a protocol file in any browser that contains an XML parser such as Internet Explorer version 4 or later XML Schema To create and edit protocols directly in XML you need to have the XML schema that defines the logical rules of a VWorks protocol If you want the schema please contact the Velocity11 Service Center Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 163 VWorks User Guide Workflow for creating a protocol About this topic This topic outlines the procedures you need to follow to create a protocol in VWorks Workflow The general workflow for creating a basic protocol is Step Topic 1 Creating a new protocol on page 164 2 Setting up a plate icon on page 164 3 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 4 Setting task parameters on page 169 5 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Applies only to VPrep and Multimek devices Optiona
135. 0 0 ee eee eee 466 Creating a QFill profilen a eaw ee ena e e a es 467 Setting QFill device properties escor raet da Ar a a ER es 468 Setting QFill task parameters aserra tapa pree oa r EEO a a Ea N a aa 469 Using QEIll DiaSNOStiCS pa darea Sa wwe bad A E et Bal ee ee ERA 470 Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using 473 Workflow for configuring the Remp CSP 0000 cee ee eee 474 Creating a Remp CSP profile re rare 0 ee eee 474 Setting the Remp CSP device properties a na 0 2 0 ce ees 476 Setting Remp CSP task parameterS e eesse edr hoere r ee eee 477 Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using 479 Workflow for configuring the Teleshake 0 0c eee ee eee 480 Setting the Teleshake device properties 0 00 ee ees 481 Setting Teleshake task parameters 0 00 eee ee eee 482 Using Teleshake Diagnostics 00 cee ee ees 483 vil viii Table of Contents VCode User Guide Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using 485 Workflow for configuring the Ultramark aaas saaa aaa 486 Setting the Ultramark device properties n anaana aa 487 Setting up the Ultramark plate reader datafile 0 0000 ee eee ee 488 Setting Ultramark task parameters 0 0 0 ce ee 489 Using Ultramark Diagnostics 0 0 0 cc eee 491 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using 495 Workflow for configuring a Vici Multiport Valve 2 0 0 cee ee ee
136. 0 plin 1 Dispense 10 plin 1 ultimek 1 on quadrant s quadrant s In this setup you place plate A at Frame 1 of the Multimek and plate B at Frame 2 When you start the protocol the aspirate and dispense pipette tasks are carried out When the process is completed you are prompted to move the plates from the Multimek to the device receptacle you labeled ManualStack For information about Adding the human robot as a device Using the human robot ina process The workflow that this procedure belongs to See Adding devices on page 107 Using the human robot in a protocol on page 124 Workflow for configuring the human robot on page 122 126 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the lid hotel About this topic The lid hotel is a device that stores plate lids To use the lid hotel one or more lid hotel storage bays must be associated with the lid hotel This topic presents the workflow for configuring the lid hotel with a lid hotel storage bay in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a lid hotel profile on page 127 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 2 3 4 Setting the lid hotel device properties on page 128 5 Setting the lid hotel storage bay device properties on page 129 Related information For information about Setting up devices Saving the
137. 30 3 Select the Unload task and in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the plate group to the Unload list Unload Name Number of plates Type New plate group 5 Group 4 Select the Incubate task and exclude any devices that you do not want to be used for the incubation task In this example the plates should not be incubated on a PlateHub that is available 328 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Available devices storex Devices that will be e PlateHub 5 Select the Load task and in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the plate group to the Unload list Assigned groups Name New plate group 6 Run the protocol Related information For information about See Creating a plate group Creating a plate group on page 316 Moving plates in and out of a Q Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Using bar code input files Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Starting a run Starting a run from VWorks on page 61 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 329 VWorks User Guide Creating a plate group with a bar code input file About this topic Who should read this Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to use a bar code input file to crea
138. 384 p Offset 100 to 100 ticks 1 tick 0375 mm Current plate type unknown Prime Purge 3 Perform the desired task using the following table as a guide To Then Home the WellMate Click Move to home Move the stage to the priming Click Move to prime area area Move the 384 plate offset Click Move to 384 plate offset The stage moves to the end of its travel and then shifts to the next stage for dispensing on a 384 well plate Move to a column Enter the column number you want to move to in the Column number field and click Move to column Change the offset This works in conjunction with the Move to Column command Enter a value in the Offset field and the desired column in the Column number field and click Move to column Offset defines how far away from the center of the well to dispense Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using 511 VWorks User Guide Querying the plate To query the plate type type 1 Open the Command page 2 To find out the plate type 96 or 384 well that the WellMate is set for click Query plate type The plate type is displayed next to Current plate type text Priming and purging Priming moves the fluid from the reservoir to the tips and purging moves the fluid from the tips to back to the reservoir To prime or purge 1 Open the Command page 2 Click and hold the mouse on the Prime or Purge button Fluid is pumped at the Pump Speed set in the Profi
139. 5 Tips Manually Make sure the Al Make sure Downstack from deepwell called attach tips to 384 Wells are inthe far stacker is fully stacker1 SourceA pipetter on Prep left position loaded with fresh384plates Procedure To set User Message task parameters 1 Add the User Message task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select a Message will appear option using the following table as a guide Option Description First plate of the series only Displays the message the first time it is encountered for that process during the run Every x plates Displays the message the first time it is encountered for that process and then every x number of times it is encountered for that process during the run For example if the value of x is 3 the first plate and the fourth plates in the protocol will trigger the message Last plate of the series only Displays the message the last time it is encountered for that process during the run Sound alarm Sounds an alarm when message is displayed 214 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information Option Description Email notification Sends an email when message is displayed User data entry into variable named Displays a message that asks for input from the user The message is generated from a script that is added to one of the tasks 3 Type
140. 7 FLIPRTETRA VWorks User Guide device properties setting 109 profile for creating 709 setting parameters 170 supported instrument 77 G Genetix aliQuot see AliQuot Genetix QFill2 Dispenser see QFill2 Guest privilege 370 H H P Labortechnik VARIOMAG Teleshake see Tele shake Handle plates in instance order protocol rule 45 Help menu 19 hiding toolbars and tabs 27 human robot about 72 device properties setting 123 example using 124 workflow for configuring 122 l image inserting 356 Incubate at plate storage device task 308 Incubate at Storage Device task defined 198 setting parameters 198 Incubate task defined 195 setting parameters 195 Innovadyne Nanodrop see Nanodrop Inoculate task defined 198 setting parameters 198 installing VWorks 82 84 106 instruments definition 11 list of 11 supported 11 inventory editor close 310 opening 310 inventory group defined 311 inventory management database 306 inventory manager database connection checking 524 filters 331 overview 306 views 331 inventory synchronizing 308 inventory see reinventory IP address about 86 assigning dynamically 96 checking 95 configuring computer s 90 dynamic 86 98 static 86 87 98 iSeries controller monitoring 72 J JavaScript about 269 cautions when using 275 examples 275 global functions 277 plate object 277 resources 270 start finish protocol scripts
141. 85 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for installing VWorks on belongs to page 82 84 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Installing VWorks software About this topic Procedure 1 Procedure 2 Related information This topic describes how to start the VWorks installer Two procedures are given If you are installing VWorks Q For the first time on the system use Procedure 1 LJ On asystem where a version of VWorks is already installed use Procedure 2 To install VWorks for the first time 1 Insert the VWorks CD ROM into your CD ROM drive 2 Double click the setup exe file 3 Follow the instructions in the wizard to complete your installation If you are reinstalling VWorks or installing a newer version of VWorks use this procedure To install VWorks if a version of VWorks is already installed 1 Exit the VWorks application 2 Insert the VWorks CD ROM into your CD ROM drive 3 Double click the setup exe file You should be prompted to remove your old VWorks application If this does not happen you need to uninstall VWorks before continuing the new installation See Uninstalling VWorks on page 99 You do not need to delete the Velocity11 registry files 4 Follow the instructions in the wizard to complete your installation For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for installing VWorks on belongs to page 82 Uninstalling VWork
142. 85 Serial Dilution pipette task defined 253 setting parameters 254 showing toolbars and tabs 21 Signal task example 218 setting parameters 217 simulating a protocol 181 simultaneous plates 165 setting number of 167 slot defined 306 SoftMax Pro device properties setting 110 profile for creating 110 setting parameters 170 supported instrument 12 software versions finding 6 supported 5 SQL database 306 stacker gripper offset property 357 352 Stacker task defined 193 setting parameters 193 stacking thickness property 349 stand alone connection 88 start finish protocol scripts 55 starting runs 67 runs automatically 65 VWorks 27 Static Stack device properties setting 110 profile for creating 110 stopping a run 69 storage device manually loading plates 320 manually unloading plates 323 reinventorying 334 robotically loading plates 379 robotically unloading plates 327 Storex 378 device properties setting 110 manually loading plates 320 manually unloading plates 323 moving plates between 324 profile for creating 770 robotically loading plates 379 robotically unloading plates 327 supported instrument 12 with inventory manager 306 switch 94 synchronizing inventory database 308 system defined for inventory management 308 T tabs showing and hiding 27 task object JavaScript 272 properties 276 Task Parameters toolbar see Protocol Task Pa rameters toolbar 300
143. About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the Nanodrop device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Nanodrop s current configuration The device properties settings are stored in the device file To set the Nanodrop device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the generic device properties x Device Properties E General Device name Nanodrop1 Device type Innovadyne Nanodrop Approach height mm 9 g System Innovadyne Nanodrop T Nanodrop1 E A Velocity11 Robot 7 Roboti Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible From robot Robot1 Yes Teachpoint for robot Robot1 E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No New device Device has west side BCR No METRE Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No E Innovadyne Nanodrop properties Initialize all devices Profile name NanodropProfile1 3 Expand the Innovadyne Nanodrop properties group 4 Double click on the field adjacent to Profile name 5 Choose a profile from the list box 6 Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Nanodrop on page 458 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 mana
144. Access2 11 configuring workflow 154 creating a profile 755 device properties setting 756 VSpin with Access2 task defined 216 setting parameters 216 VStack 77 configuring workflow 157 defining labware properties 357 device properties setting 158 VWorks exiting the application 79 finding the version number 6 installing 82 84 106 introduction to 70 logging in 28 logging out 79 starting 27 uninstalling 99 user interface overview 73 version supported by this guide 5 WwW Waitfor task example 278 setting parameters 217 Wash Tips pipette task defined 262 JavaScript properties 285 wash volume 262 washing pipette tips 262 Waste configuring workflow 159 device properties setting 160 well depth property 355 well diameter property 355 well geometry property 355 well tip volume property 355 well bottom shape property 355 WellMate device properties setting 506 diagnostics using 509 profile for creating 505 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 504 WellMate task defined 507 setting parameters 507 Windows XP 98 Windows registry key copying 373 workflow for installing VWorks 106 Index 537 VWorks User Guide x x teachpoint to well property 355 x well to well property 355 XML schema 162 Y y teachpoint to well property 355 y well to well property 355 Z z axis acceleration into wells property 364 365 z axis acceleration out of wells property 365 za
145. Alarms Enabled Device Alarm type _ Process v Low Alarm High Alarm _ Ale Delete the selected alarm 3 Inthe Log measurements every text box type in the time interval between measurements taken by the device If you change this value the existing time interval instance expires before the change is implemented If the existing time interval is long and you want to implement the change as soon as possible you may need to restart VWorks 54 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide 4 Click the Create a new alarm button A row with default values is added to the Measurement Alarms table Click to select the row and then click a value to edit it using the following table as a guide An example of a field ready to be edited is shown below Measurement Alarms Alarm name Enabled Device Alarm type Process MERE No liconic 0 Field Comments Alarm name A name of your choice Enabled Yes turns the alarm on Device The name of the device on which the alarm is set Alarm type The parameter that is being measured It could be temperature relative humidity mass volume and so on Process value The current measurement with units being dependent on the alarm type Low Alarm The low value at which you want the alarm to be turned on High alarm The high value at which you want the alarm to be turned on Alarm Timer minutes Determines when a critical alarm is triggered An initial alarm
146. Description Looking at the plate from the perspective of the robot select the corresponding notch or notches for your plate in the Notch Locations group box When checked turns on plate orientation checking See Opening the labware editor on page 341 Adding a labware entry on page 342 Defining general properties on page 347 Defining plate properties on page 348 Defining VPrep well properties on page 354 354 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Defining VPrep well properties About this topic Who should read this Defining properties Well Dimensions Well tip volume UL Well depth mm Well diameter mm Well Geometry Round oO Square Well Bottom Shape Rounded O Flat Shaped Plate Properties BenchCel VStack YPrep Well Definition image Labware Classes This topic describes the parameters used to define a plate or other piece of labware in the VPrep Well Definition sub page of the labware editor Because the properties described in this topic only apply to the VPrep and Multimek only those administrators or technicians who define labware for use with these devices should read this topic To define VPrep well properties l 2 Enter the values for the available parameters according to the type of plate or labware you are defining 200 00000 26 50000 3 60000 Click the VPrep Well Definition sub
147. Do one of the following Select Tools gt Clear All Breakpoints Right click any task icon and select Remove all breakpoints For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next Disabling tasks on page 178 Simulating a run Simulating a run on page 181 178 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Disabling tasks About this topic When to use disable tasks Disabling a task After you have placed the tasks in your protocol you may want to disable some of the tasks as you test the protocol You can disable some of the tasks that you have included in a protocol The advantage of disabling a task instead of deleting it is that a disabled task is easily re enabled This topic describes how to disable and then enable tasks in a protocol Here are two scenarios where you might want to skip tasks in a protocol a While a protocol is running A device is not working properly and you want to avoid stopping and restarting the run VWorks avoids moving plates to that location and executing the disabled task A specific task is not required at the start of the protocol run For example a protocol may be run continuously with a Seal task You may choose not to seal plates in that particular run Disabling the task allows you to do this without having to create and save a new protocol Disabling t
148. FlexiSpense s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file Before you can set the FlexiSpense device properties you need to add the FlexiSpense device to the device manager To set the FlexiSpense device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page Set the generic properties Expand the Flexispense properties group Double click in the field adjacent to COM port Select the computer s serial COM port to which the FlexiSpense is connected HT S INO 6 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Opening the Device Properties page Setting generic properties Setting FlexiSpense task parameters Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics FlexiSpense on page 420 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting FlexiSpense task parameters on page 422 Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics on page 424 422 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting FlexiSpense task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the FlexiSpense task parameters in VWorks FlexiSpense task The Flexispense task moves a plate to the FlexiSpense where a defined dispensing process is i
149. Help General SUBNETMASK 255 255 255 0 NODETYPE 8 Hybrid settings Trace 0 IPBIND_O 192 168 0 1 1 just keep quiet on unknown clients 0 decline requests from unknown clients Ignoreunknownc lients 1 IPPOOL_0 192 168 0 100 254 Because the IP address and subnet mask in the file is static the value of the network card s IP address and subnet mask must always match the values in this file INJURY HAZARD Itis possible to run a device on a general network in which both the device and the controlling computer have dynamic IP addresses but we caution against this for safety reasons Remote computer operators may accidentally initiate an operation that causes the device to move unexpectedly when lab personnel are nearby If the computer is also part of a general network it requires a second network card This card probably has a dynamic IP address because the computer does not control the network and the computer is easier to administer this way The devices IP addresses The devices can have IP addresses that are either static or dynamic 88 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Choosing an addressing method DHCP Server Kit Whether to assign the IP address of the device statically or dynamically depends on the network s architecture With a stand alone connection If you are connecting a single stand alone device that will be set up this way long term set the IP address of the
150. Hub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 78309 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78309 Changing the processing order Deleting a plate group Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide 8 Click Save Changes 9 Click the close box to close the inventory editor The plate group is listed in the Available locations list of the Load Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Locations Groups Available groups Name Number of plates Plate Group 4 You can change the order in which the plates in a plate group will be processed To change the processing order 1 Inthe plate group list select a plate 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 8 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 z 1536 Greiner Low Yolume Black 7830 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black Ete r a 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black platehub platehub platehub 2 Drag itto a higher position in the list Group Members CONE To delete a plate group from the inventory 1 Open the inventory editor 2 Select the plate group in the Saved Groups group box 3 Click Delete 317 318 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Creating a location group Opening the inventory editor Moving plates in and o
151. Index 535 VWorks User Guide tasks adding 168 defined 29 deleting 168 disabling 178 enabling 178 moving 168 setting parameters 169 setting parameters finding procedures for 119 teachpoint file 22 23 teachpoints setting for devices 112 Tecan Systems Cavro Pumps see Cavro pump Technician privilege 370 Teleshake device properties setting 481 diagnostics using 483 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 480 Teleshake task defined 482 setting parameters 482 Test Auxiliary Bar Code Readers command 58 Thermo Labsystems Multidrop see Multidrop Thermo Electron Multiskan Ascent see Multiskan Ascent thickness property 348 third party robots supported 12 tip touch horizontal distance 237 251 tip touch rise height 237 251 tip touching 237 251 tipbox 233 tips see pipette tips toolbars Control 14 Device List 18 Log 14 Main 14 Pipette Task Parameters 17 Pipette Tasks 16 Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters 18 Pre Post Protocol Tasks 17 Protocol Task Parameters 16 Protocol Tasks 15 Run Set Manager 18 showing and hiding 21 Tools menu 19 transfer log 237 troubleshooting files to send 519 U Ultramark device properties setting 487 Index VWorks User Guide diagnostics using 497 file format 488 setting the output folder 488 supported instrument 77 workflow for configuring 486 Ultramark task defined 489 setting parameters 489 uninstalling VWorks 99 Un
152. K For information about Adding a device The next step Opening PlateLoc Diagnostics The workflow this topic belongs to Using the PlateLoc task Using the PlateLoc Diagnostics See Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Workflow for configuring the PlateLoc on page 132 Setting Seal task parameters on page 212 PlateLoc User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 135 VWorks User Guide Setting the PlateLoc device properties About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the PlateLoc s device properties To set the PlateLoc device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the PlateLoc s generic properties x Device Properties E General Device name Fe System Beckman Multimek Pipettor PlateLoc1 a multimek El Human Robot Human robot a PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer Device type PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints a PlateLoc Device is accessible from robot Human robot No E Velocity11 Robot Device is accessible From robot Robot No A Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No New device Device has east side BCR No Delete device Profile name Initial
153. Location groups are used to move plates from a specific location in the storage device Example In this example a location group that contains the plates in cassette 1 slots 1 10 is created When an Unload task uses this location plate group the robot moves whatever plates are in cassette 1 slots 1 10 regardless of the identity of the plates out of the storage device and in to the system When a Load task uses a location group it moves the plates that are in the system into to cassette 1 slots 1 10 of the storage device regardless of the identity of the plates When to use Location plate groups are used Q When the storage device is being filled or emptied Q When groups of plates are removed from the lab automation system and replaced with other groups of plates on a regular basis This would be done by replacing a cassette of plates with a new one 312 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Plate groups Group membership Plate groups are used to move specific plates to or from the storage device but without regard for the location Plate groups can be used when operators do not routinely remove and replace whole cassettes of plates When a plate is first moved into the system by VWorks such as when it is downstacked it is assigned an identifier in the database After that VWorks tracks where that plate is at all times This tracking does not require the plates to have bar code labels VW
154. N N Oo wn oO a wu 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 Set Dispense Volume uL The dashed line is a reference line where the set dispense volume equals the measured dispense volume The equation is the polynomial for the line calculated by the spreadsheet program 6 Enter the curve information into the equation editor of the liquid library editor 367 368 Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions VWorks User Guide Using the equation editor If you repeat the experiment you will find that the curve is much closer to a straight line This is because the equation you entered adjusts the action of the servo motor that determines aspirate and dispense volumes thereby calibrating the dispense The equation editor in the liquid library editor is where you enter the calibration curve data to correct for pipetting inaccuracy To enter a polynomial into the equation editor l In the text box enter the value for the highest order of the polynomial This is the largest exponent in the equation and tells you how many terms are in the equation For example if the highest order of the polynomial is 3 the equation will have the general form y a bx cx dx and four terms With an exponent of three four rows are added to the equation editor table In the equation editor table in turn enter the coefficient and exponent for each of the terms in the equation starting with the zero order term To enter
155. Nanodrop task parameters on page 462 Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 Setting MultiDrop task parameters on page 441 Device Driver User Guide For this device or devices PerkinElmer Envision Reader PerkinElmer PlateStak PlateHub Plate Pad Filter Plate Plate Pad Standard Plate Pad Vacuum PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station Remp CSP Robo Cylinder Translator Robot Shelf Filter Shelf Reagent Shelf Servo Shelf Shaking Shelf Standard Shelf Tip Box Shelf Tip Chute Shelf Vacuum Shuttle Robot StoreX Incubator Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 171 And this task Envision Downstack Upstack Load Unload Incubate at plate storage device Dismount Incubate Mount Seal Pierce Remp CSP No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks No tasks Load Unload Incubate VWorks User Guide Find parameter information here Setting Envision task parameters on page 416 Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters on page 193 Not currently available contact the Velocity11 Service Center for information Setting Mount Dismount task parameters on page 200 Setting Incubate task parameters on page 195 Setting Mount Dismount task parameters on page 200
156. Offset 100 to 100 ticks 1 tick 0375 mm Gheck all Glear all Column mask 0 CECE HEERE 3 Enter values for one or more of the following parameters Parameter Description Prime volume The volume of liquid to move through the tubing cartridge before dispensing liquid into a plate Dispense The volume of liquid to dispense into a plate volume Purge volume The volume of liquid to move through the tubing from the tips back to the reservoir Offset Offset defines how far away from the center of the well to dispense 4 To dispense into all wells make sure that the Dispense to entire plate option is selected 5 To only dispense into some of the wells a b c Select the Dispense to selected columns option Click Clear All In the number matrix click the numbers corresponding to the columns to which you want to dispense In the following example liquid will be dispensed into columns 2 4 6 and 8 of a 384 well plate Dispense to selected columns Check all Clear all Column mask 170 PEELE TL ER Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using 509 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Configuring the WellMate Workflow for configuring the WellMate on page 504 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Using WellMate Diagnos
157. Prep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 14 Click Next to go to step 5 of the Serial Dilution Wizard and enter the aspirate and dispense property parameters for these tasks that occur during the Serial Dilution task Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 5 Specify common aspirate and dispense parameters Select the transfer parameters to use B Aspirate properties Pre aspirate volume UL Post aspirate volume UL Distance from well bottom rm Retract distance rmm pL Liquid class Z axis aspirate velocity mm s Z axis aspirate accleration mm s E Dispense properties Empty tips Blowout volume UL Post dispense volume uL Distance from well bottom mm Retract distance mm yL Enable tip touch Liquid class Z axis dispense velocity mm s Z axis dispense acceleration mm s Record in transfer log lt None gt 90 75 No lt None gt 90 75 Yes Cancel 15 Enter the desired values for the Dispense and Aspirate tasks that will take place during the serial dilution process 16 Note These values are applied to all Aspirate and Dispense tasks that occur within the Serial Dilution task The Volume and Well selection fields are not available because this information was entered in steps 2 and 3 of the wizard Click Next to go to step 5 of the Serial Dilution Wizard and enter the mix property parameters for this task that takes place during the Serial Dilution task 259
158. Procedure This procedure assumes that there are already plates in the PlateHub To incubate a plate group 1 Create a protocol like the one shown below 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 called plate 1536 Greiner Low Unload from plate Incubate at an Load into plate Volume Black storage device storage device storage device 783092 called plate 2 Create a new plate group in the inventory editor and save the changes Location Groups Plate Groups Inventory Management Saved Groups Group Members Select a plate group Sec Test Tet T easte abu ate T pete rone Tse Available Plates CEST an Fn ee ee ee as A 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 cS aaa 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 EE SS Ss EEE 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 FER Ca Fl a LT 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 2 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 2 PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 platehub2 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 7830 1 platehub2 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 78
159. Profile dialog box and click OK 4 Inthe Com port text field enter the number of the COM port you are using to connect the Multidrop with the computer running VWorks 5 Ifyou want the Multidrop to prime whenever it is initialized select the Prime check box and enter the volume to prime in the text field 6 Click Save 440 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Profiles About profiles on page 103 The next step Setting the Multidrop device properties on page 440 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Multidrop on page 438 Adding the Multidrop to the Adding devices on page 107 device manager Opening Multidrop Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting Multidrop task parameters Setting MultiDrop task parameters on page 441 Using Multidrop Diagnostics Using Multidrop Diagnostics on page 443 Setting the Multidrop device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the Multidrop device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Multidrop s current configuration The device properties settings are stored in the device file To set the Multidrop device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the generic properties 3 Expand the Multidrop properties group 4
160. QFill2 in real time Procedure To dispense into a plate 1 Make sure that there is a plate on the QFill stage 2 Make sure that the reagent bottle has sufficient liquid in it for the dispense 3 Set the dispense volume a Inthe Volume Setup group box type the QFill volume into the text box b Click Update Volume Click OK The volume you last entered is saved until the next time a protocol is run which will override this value In the Filling Test group box click Start Monitor the success of the fill by looking at the Success and Fail indicators The Success and Fail indicators provide feedback from a sensor that measures pressure in the dispensing bottle The Fail indicator light is illuminated if the QFill2 is not turned on QFill2 has a disconnected communication cable Bottle fails to pressurize About the filtration The Filtration Port defines the Bio I O port used to provide vacuum port sensor information for an optional filtration station on the QFill2 You should not need to change this number Related information For information about Preparing to fill a plate Configuring the QFill Adding a device to the device manager Setting QFill task parameters Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using 471 VWorks User Guide See QFill User Guide Workflow for configuring the QFill on page 466 Adding devices on page 107 Setting QFill task parameters on page 469 472 C
161. Setting the Echo 550 device properties on page 400 Setting the Echo 550 destination stage device properties on page 403 Setting the Echo 550 source stage device properties on page 402 Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Creating a Multidrop profile on page 439 Device Driver User Guide Device Driver User Guide Setting the Multidrop device properties on page 440 110 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide For this device PerkinElmer Envision Reader PerkinElmer PlateStak PlateHub Plate Pad Filter Plate Plate Pad Standard Plate Pad Vacuum PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer PlatePierce Seal Piercing Station Remp CSP Robo Cylinder Translator Robot Shelf Filter Shelf Reagent Shelf Servo Shelf Shaking Shelf Standard Shelf Tip Box Shelf Tip Chute Shelf Vacuum SoftMax Pro Static Stack StoreX Teleshake High speed 1536 Teleshake Standard Look here to set up a profile Creating an Envision profile on page 413 Device Driver User Guide Device Driver User Guide No profile required No profile required No profile required Creating a PlateLoc profile on page 133 Creating a PlatePierce profile on page 139 Creating a Remp CSP profile on page 474 Device Driver User Guide And look here to set device properties
162. Spense or Use later to decrease its priority Related information For information about See Configuring the FlexiSpense Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense on page 420 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics on page 424 424 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using VWorks User Guide Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to Q Modify dispense programs Q Define plate types Q Manually control the pump and reset the device For more information about using the FlexiSpense see the FlexiSpense user documentation Procedures To modify dispense programs 1 Open Flexispense Diagnostics Programs Current Program fi Columns to fill Use plate definition l x Dispense volume uL 0 Pump speed X 2 Select the program you want to modify from the Current Program list box The settings for that program will load into the dialog box 3 Select the desired plate type from the Use plate definition list box 4 Enter the volume to dispense in microliters in the Dispense volume field 5 Select a pump speed from the Pump speed list box 6 Click Save Program 7 Todo a test run place a plate on the FlexiSpense and click Run Program 8 Click OK to save changes an
163. Task parameter Comments Integer Number of times to Number of times to loop loop Pump Reagent task These properties are the same as the properties described for the Pump Reagent task Property task action task howOften task maxLevel task minLevel task plateName task shelf task speedPercent task time Property task plateName Data type Integer Integer Integer Integer String String Integer Integer Wash Tips task Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 285 Task parameter Q Fill reservoir value 0 Q Empty reservoir value 1 Every Max level Min level Plate name unnamed list box at for VWorks User Guide Comments The Fill reservoir and Empty reservoir values determine whether the pumps will fill or empty the reservoir To empty the reservoir you must complete the Autofill Configuration information on the Shelves tab of the VPrep Diagnostics software For more information see the VPrep User Guide The number that controls how frequently the liquid is pumped For example if you type 3 the pump will run every third time the task runs The maximum percentage of liquid that you want the reservoir to contain The minimum percentage of liquid that you want the reservoir to contain The name of the plate The shelf on which the reservoir is located The percentage of maximum pumping rate The time in seconds that the
164. The following table shows the equivalent parameter names for aspirating Velocity11 Bio Tek Diagnostics label Horizontal position Horizontal y position Crosswise aspirate options Crosswise aspirate height Crosswise horizontal position Crosswise horizontal y position Final aspirate delay Dispense Parameters Bio Tek parameter Horizontal Aspr Pos Horizontal Y Aspr Pos Crosswise On Crosswise Height Crosswise Horiz Pos Crosswise Horiz Y Pos Final Aspr Delay The following table shows the equivalent parameter names for dispensing Velocity11 Bio Tek Diagnostics label Prime before dispense Dispense volume per well Horizontal position Horizontal y position Bottom wash volume Bottom wash flow rate Bottom wash height Bottom wash horizontal position Bottom wash horizontal y position Bio Tek parameter Prime Before Start Dispense Volume Horizontal Disp Pos Horiz Y Disp Pos Bottom Disp Volume Bottom Flow Rate Bottom Disp Height Bottom Horiz Pos Bottom Horiz Y Pos 396 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Setting Bio Tek device properties Opening Bio Tek Diagnostics Setting Bio Tek s generic device properties Adding a device Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek Setting Bio Tek task parameters See Setting the Bio Tek device properties on page 390 Opening diagnostics software on page 105
165. The process of moving a plate out of a stacker is called downstacking The process of moving a plate into a stacker is called upstacking Plates may be returned to the same or different stackers You can make a single task upstack to or downstack from more than one stacker For example in a downstacking task when all of the plates are removed from one stacker the robot will begin to pick plates from a second stacker The two stackers are referred to as pooled downstackers To set Downstack and Upstack task parameters 1 Add the Downstack or Upstack task to a protocol process gt J _ j 1 Packard Lid Downstack from Fpply label Upstack to called unnamed 1 VStack1 VStack2 VStack3 2 Inthe list of available stackers in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select a stacker to downstack from or upstack to and click Add To select more than one stacker SHIFT click or CTRL click before clicking Add An asterisk next to a stacker in the list means that the stacker is currently assigned to a task that uses the same labware 3 To remove a stacker from your list of available stacker devices select it and click Remove 194 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide 4 If you have added more than one stacker you can change the order in which particular stackers are used a Select a stacker b Click Use earlier to increase the priority of the stacker or Use later to decr
166. To load plates robotically l 10 11 Make sure that a robot device has been added and configured in the device manager Make sure that the plate storage device has been correctly configured in the device manager All slots must be accessible to the robot and must use labware of a class that is allowed Make sure that if you have made changes to the device file it has been saved If you are using the simulator to virtually load plates make sure that the Enable plate tracking in simulation mode check box is selected in the Log Options dialog box Create a protocol like the one in the following screenshot 1536 Greiner igo Ta Low Volume gt 4 o ii Black 783092 e i i called plate 1536 Greiner Low Downstack from Load into plate Volume Black vstack storage device 783092 called plat Make sure that the Downstack task is configured to use the stacker Stackers that this task will use vstack Create a location group Make sure that the location group is listed in the Available locations list of the Load Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Available locations Edit location groups Name Number of plates iLocation group 8 Drag the group into the Assigned locations list Assigned locations Name Number of plates Location group 8 Click Start and resolve any error messages In the Number of Cycles dialog box enter a number that equals the number of plates you want to
167. Update this profile hitialize device using profile TE 3 Click Create a new profile enter a name for the device in the New Profile dialog box and click OK 4 Set the Profile Options a From the COM port list box select the port that the WellMate uses to communicate with the controlling computer b Enter a value for the Pump speed using the range shown as a guide c Entera value for the Stage speed using the range shown as a guide d Enter a volume in the Volume to prime on initialization field if you want to prime the lines when the profile initializes Click Update this profile If you want to open communications to the WellMate and send the profile settings immediately click Initialize device using profile 7 Click OK 506 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using For information about The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening WellMate Diagnostics Adding a device to the device manager Setting WellMate task parameters Using WellMate Diagnostics See Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the WellMate on page 504 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding devices on page 107 Setting WellMate task parameters on page 507 Using WellMate Diagnostics on page 509 Setting the WellMate device properties About this topic Proced
168. VSpin v Which location atthis device would you like to use Default Location v What labware do you wantto place atthis location v A labware entry The Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar can be viewed from the Pre Protocol Editor and the Post Protocol Editor pages Device List toolbar This is the Device List toolbar Device List System gt BiolO s gt Environment E re gt Liquids 5 Beckman Multimek Pipettor Human Robot H Shelf Shaking s gt Shelf Standard H Code 3k Bar Code Print and Apply Station H rl Prep Precision Pipetting Station B Spin with Access2 yy WeighPad Device Diagnostics The Device List toolbar can be viewed from the Device Manager page Run Set Manager toolbar This is the Run Set Manager toolbar Protocol Date Time Runs Plugin Protocol Notes Status iC iWWorks Workspaceip Friday August 06 2 00 13PM Scheduled C WWorks Workspaceip Friday August 06 2 00 19PM 1 Scheduled el Runset Manag The Run Set Manager toolbar can be viewed from the Progress page Menus Chapter 2 VWorks overview 19 VWorks User Guide Each of the menus is briefly described here File menu The commands on the File menu are used for Q Opening closing and saving files Q Printing Q Closing VWorks Edit menu Use this standard menu to cut copy paste and delete tasks in a protocol V
169. VWorks3 software User Guide ot Agilent Technologies Notices Agilent Technologies Inc 2009 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means including electronic storage and retrieval or translation into a foreign language without prior agreement and written consent from Agilent Technologies Inc as governed by United States and international copyright laws User Guide Part Number G5415 90001 January 2009 rebranded edition September 2005 first edition Contact Information Agilent Technologies Inc Automation Solutions 5301 Stevens Creek Blvd Santa Clara CA 95051 USA Technical Support 1 800 979 4811 or 1 408 345 8011 service automation agilent com Customer Service 1 866 428 9811 or 1 408 345 8356 orders automation agilent com European Service 44 0 1763853638 euroservice automation agilent com Documentation feedback documentation automation agilent com Web www agilent com lifesciences automation Acknowledgements Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Warranty The material contained in this docu ment is provided as is and is sub ject to being changed without notice in future editions Further to the max imum extent permitted by applicable law Agilent disclaims all warranties either express or implied with regard to this manual and any information contained herein
170. Velocity11 VPrep Change Instance pipette task defined The Change Instance pipette task is used in combination with a pipette loop to perform replicate dispense operations from a mother plate into a series of daughter plates Part of an example protocol which contains a mother plate and the first of 10 daughter plates is shown below 1536 Greiner Black a j _ W Polystyrene a called Mother 1536 Greiner Black Downstack from Pipette process 1 Plate Polystyrene called stacker1 Mother Plate 1536 Greiner 2 29 7779 Black p _ W Polystyrene kanai 5 called Daughter 1536 Greiner Black Downstack from Pipette process 1 Plate 1 Polystyrene called stacker2 Daughter Plate 1 en t o End of loop Dispense 10 00 pL Change instance into Daughter Plate 1in 1 quadrant s Pipette Process 1 Aspirate 100 00 pL from Mother Plate 1 quadrant s Loop 10 times Note This example has been simplified for the purposes of explanation Procedure Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 231 VWorks User Guide When the protocol runs 100 ul from each well of the mother plate are aspirated and 10 ul are dispensed into the first daughter plate Daughter Plate 1 When the Change Instance task is reached Daughter Plate 2 is moved into the system and 10 ul are dispensed into it from the mother plate This loop repeats until all 10 daughter plates have been dispensed into To set change instance pi
171. a platepad as a device Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Using the Apply Label task Setting Apply Label task parameters on page 185 Setting Place Labware task parameters About this topic When to use Usage example This topic describes how to set the Place Labware task parameters The Place Labware task is designed for labs that use multiple types of labware for a protocol It is useful if you have devices where you want to use one type of labware on the device for some runs and another type for other runs of the same protocol This saves you from having to create a device file for each protocol that uses a different type of labware If you are always using the same labware you may not want to use this task The Place Labware task is only used in pre protocol processes The Place Labware task can only be used with labware that is stationary throughout the running of the protocol The Place Labware task allows you to associate a labware entry with a device just before starting a run instead of in the device file For example if in one protocol you restrict use of a device to labware 1 only and in another protocol you restrict use of the same device to labware only there are two ways to handle this 1 Create two device files one called device for labware and ano
172. a task or pipette task on page 168 Adding devices Adding devices on page 107 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 203 VWorks User Guide Setting Pierce task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Pierce task parameters with the PlatePierce Pierce task defined The Pierce task pierces a plate seal using a PlatePierce Procedure To set the Pierce task parameters 1 Add the Pierce task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar enter a value in the Pierce Pressure text box If you are unsure of the best piercing pressure to use for your application contact the Velocity11 Service Center Related information For information about See Configuring a PlatePierce as a Workflow for configuring the device PlatePierce on page 138 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 PlatePierce PlatePierce User Guide 204 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting Place Plate task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Place Plate task parameters Place Plate task The Place Plate task moves a plate to any location This task has many defined uses The next task in the process after a Place Plate task moves the plate to another location Place Plate task and The Place
173. a value single click the Coefficient table row twice Note that the exponents are already entered for you and cannot be edited The following example is for the curve displayed in the graph above r Equation Editor 0 1237 0 1 0176 1 0 0027 x 2 i x 3 Coefficient Term Each row represents a coefficient in the target volume polynomial First enter the highest order of the polynomial in the edit box below then enter a value for each coefficient in the table to the left The default configuration is for linear target volume with slope 1 Highest order of polynomial e g 2 for y a bx cx 3 3 Click OK 369 VWorks User Guide Administrator procedures This chapter is for people with Administrator login privileges It describes assorted administrative tasks including how to Q Administer user accounts Q Import and export VWorks data from the registry of your computer U Set up email so that you can send bug reports from within VWorks 370 Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide About user accounts and privileges About this topic You must have a user account to log in to VWorks Your user account is associated with a user role that determines the privileges you have to perform particular functions This topic describes the privileges associated with different user roles The effect of Privileges have the following effects privileges Q Ifyou do not have the
174. abware type U Any north side south side east side and west side bar codes West side bar codes are tracked only if an optional bar code reader is used The list of plates in the inventory is displayed in the Inventory Plate Group Editor Preview dialog box An example view is shown below Available Slots cassette device slot eastbe labware northbe plate name southt PlateHub 1 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 plate PlateHub 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 plate 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 plate 1536 Greiner Low Volume Black 783092 plate 1 1 1 PlateHub 1 PlateHub ON The list of plates in the inventory is updated every time a plate is moved with a robot in to or out of a storage device so that at all times the list is current The Inventory Editor dialog box is where you manage the inventory From here you can Create groups Create locations Review information about plates in a group or location Import groups from a bar code file Change the plate type associated with plates in the database Delete plates from the database OUUOLKOLHOLUD Inventory the plates in a plate storage device With long term storage devices typically only a sub set of the plates stored in the device is used in one protocol You can set up two different types of plate sub sets called plate groups and location groups Which you choose for a particular protocol depends on what you are planning to
175. age DB VSpin with Access2 QD weit Liquid Handling All Other Reading Plate Storage Plate Handling It can only be viewed from the Protocol Editor page It provides a palette of tasks available for protocols 16 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters toolbar This is the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar x Task Settings Advanced Settings Plate name Unnamed 3 Plate type Costar 96 pp black ha Edit labware settings Plugin lt no plugin gt hd Simultaneous 1 plates O Plates have lids O Plates enter the system sealed O Use single instance of plate Bar code control Special error handling Incoming plates have bar codes on south Bar Codes NOT in file z C Incoming plates have bar codes on west si Bar Codes NOT in file v O Incoming plates have bar codes on north s Bar Codes NOT in file v O Incoming plates have bar codes on east sit Bar Codes NOT in file v The Protocol Task Parameters toolbar can only be viewed from the Protocol Editor page The fields in this toolbar are specific to the task selected Pipette Tasks toolbar This is the Pipette Tasks toolbar Pipette Tasks x NT Aspirate Tt a Change Instance Ai Dispense Fill Plate Q Loop it Mix S Serial Dilution gt woi For Location m ia Wash Tips The Pipette Tasks toolbar can only be viewed from the Pipette Process Editor page Chapte
176. age 326 Using bar code input files Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Using a plate group to incubate plates About this topic Location groups versus plate groups Who should read this This topic shows an example protocol where a plate group is moved out of a PlateHub into a StoreX incubator at 42 degrees Celcius and then returned to the PlateHub Location groups are used for Q Groups of plates that are moved into the system and then to particular slots in a storage device Q Groups of plates in particular slots in a storage device that are moved out of the system Several topics in this section describe how location groups are used Some applications require that plates are stored in the storage device for a long time but where exactly the plates are stored is not important With these applications operators do not routinely remove and replace whole cassettes of plates so the plates do not need to be stored in particular cassettes As long as the identities of the plates are tracked they can be stored anywhere Plate groups can be used for these applications Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC Velocity11 PlateHub Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 327 VWorks User Guide Before you start Before reading this topic read Q VWorks inventory overview on page 306 U Creating a plate group on page 316
177. age 516 Setting Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameters Zeiss Plate Vision The Zeiss Plate Vision reader task moves a plate to a multi mode plate reader task defined reader and instructs the reader to perform a particular assay Procedure To set Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameters 1 Add a Zeiss Plate Vision reader task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Assay text box of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar type the name of the assay to run The name must exactly match the name of the assay file including the file name extension It is not case sensitive 3 From the Bar code to send list box select the side of the plate with the bar code that you want to be listed in the reader output data Related information For information about Configuring the Zeiss Reader Adding a device to the device manager Adding tasks to protocols See Workflow for configuring a Zeiss Plate Vision reader on page 514 Adding devices on page 107 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 517 VWorks User Guide Maintenance and troubleshooting This chapter tells you what to do when you encounter a problem 518 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting VWorks User Guide About error handling About this topic Causes of errors Handling errors during normal operation VWorks is a complex application that requires the interaction of hundreds of parameters configurations and op
178. agnostics on page 408 408 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide Using Echo 550 Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to use the Echo 550 diagnostic software to Q Perform a manual transfer Q Manage profiles Procedures To perform a manual transfer 1 Open the Echo 550 Diagnostics 2 Place a source plate on the Echo 550 a Select an Echo 550 plate definition from the Source plate definition list box b Click Extend source stage c Place a plate on the stage that matches the selected definition d Click Retract source stage 3 Place a destination plate on the Echo 550 a Select an Echo 550 plate definition from the Destination plate definition list box b Click Extend destination stage c Place a plate on the stage that matches the selected definition d Click Retract destination stage 4 Select an existing protocol from the Transfer protocol list box 5 Optionally select one or both of the following options Option Comments High speed transfer The stage scans across the plate and does not stop moving The alternative is for it to stop at each well Fast survey Asurvey is performed before a run in which a sample of wells are analyzed 6 Click Execute transfer protocol Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 409 VWorks User Guide To manage Echo 550 profiles 1 Open Echo 550 Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab Echo550 Diagnosti
179. aintained in the Windows registry When preparing for a protocol run you select the liquid class that you want to use Then during the run the liquid class values are referenced for pipetting operations The liquid library editor also has an equation editor that can be used to calibrate the VPrep A screenshot of the liquid library editor is shown below W Liquid Library Editor 5 0 3 Please select a liquid entry from the list below in Use this box to enter a description of the liquid entry and any notes pertaining to order to view and edit its properties its use 384 disposable tip 0 5ul 1 0ul 384 disposable tip 1 1ul SOul 384 disposable tip 1ul 2ul 384 disposable tip 3ul 6ul 384 disposable tip 6ul 10ul 384 disposable tip Wash 384 Fixed tip 0 01ul 0 05ul 384 Fixed tip prime 96 disposable tip 11 60ul 96 disposable tip 11ul SOul 96 disposable tip Siul 200ul ha 96 disposable tip wash Fixed Tip 0 005 0 010ul Enter description of new liquid type here Ej Fixed Tip 0 05ul 1ul Aspirate Parameters r Z axis Aspirate Parameters Fixed Tip O2ul 10ul ma i ae Velocity 40 Velocity into wells Fixed Tip Wash 0 1 500 pl s 1 250 mms H20 i a aot Mix Acceleration 100 Acceleration into wells 1 1000 pl s 1 2000 mm s Post aspirate delay 10 Velocity out of wells 0 300000 ms 1 250 mm s 20 Acceleration out of Copy values to dispense
180. al commands using diagnostics software This is useful for setting up and troubleshooting Comprehensive event logging allows the operator to analyze each run and troubleshoot problems Chapter 2 VWorks overview 11 VWorks User Guide Instruments you can use with VWorks About this topic Definition Velocity11 instruments Third party instruments This topic lists the instruments that you can use with VWorks If there is a product not listed here that you would like to add to your lab automation system please contact Velocity11 for customization information Instruments are individual pieces of equipment that manipulate microplates Every instrument is also a device although not every device is an instrument For a definition of devices see About devices on page 102 The following Velocity11 instruments can be used with VWorks Instrument Description and comments PlateLoc Thermal plate sealer PlatePierce Seal piercing station VCode Bar code print and apply station VPrep Pipetting station VSpin Microplate centrifuge VSpin with Microplate centrifuge and loader Access2 VStack Labware stacker The following third party instruments can be used with VWorks Instruments ASYS Hitech GmbH FlexiSpence and FlexiSpense M Beckman Multimek with or without a Labcon tip loader BioRad Ultramark Bio Tek ELx405 Washer Molecular Devices FLIPRTETRA Genetix aliQuot Description and comments Automated
181. an instrument or a location on the lab automation system that can hold a piece of labware Examples of devices Velocity11 robot Human robot PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer Labcyte Echo550 Platepad VPrep shelf Waste OUoOCOUOCD The data entered into the device manager and saved as a device file contains the configuration information for your devices Device files have the file name format lt file name gt dev and are stored in the folder location that you specify when saving the file For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Chapter 6 Setting up devices 103 VWorks User Guide About profiles About this topic Profiles defined Stored settings Related information This topic introduces profiles Profiles are required for most but not all devices A profile contains the communication settings needed for communication between a device and VWorks The data in a profile is used by VWorks to identify each device on the network A profile can also contain other basic settings that you are unlikely to want to change once set up Because profiles identify each device every device on the network must have its own profile You can create modify and delete profiles as you need to Profiles are stored in the Windows registry The settings stored in a profile include Q Whether the device is connected using serial or Ethernet Q Ifthe device is conne
182. ance When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want the tips to touch harder increase this value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value In the Plate to wash list box select the VPrep and shelf position of the MicroWash tray Plate to wash MB Grade Water MB Grade Water Rin Buffer Wash Station Waste Station unnamed 2 If the name that you chose does not appear in this list you probably associated the VPrep shelf with the labware type after adding the Wash tips pipette task to the pipette process Remove the task and add it again for the choice to appear Washing the MicroWash tray manifold Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide To wash the MicroWash tray manifold 1 Create a process that contains only a pipette process 2 Add a Wash Tips task to the pipette process 3 Enter the following values for the task Property Value Wash volume 0 Number of wash cycles 0 Inflow pump Typically set below 100 The actual rate of inflow depends on the viscosity of the liquid and the height of the reservoir above the Microwash tray It is best to observe the height of the fluid in the tray and set the inflow pump value so that there is an even flow of liquid and the he
183. and the Genetix QFill properties group Double click in the field adjacent to Device number and choose the appropriate QFill number from the list box 5 Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening QFill device properties page Adding a device to the device manager Setting QFill task parameters Using QFill Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring the QFill on page 466 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting QFill task parameters on page 469 Using QFill Diagnostics on page 470 Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using 469 VWorks User Guide Setting QFill task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the QFill task parameters in VWorks QFill task defined The QFill task dispenses liquids into plate wells and offers the options of vacuum filtration If you want to use vacuum filtration your QFill must include the vacuum station option developed by Velocity11 For more information about setting up vacuum filtration as a separate task contact the Velocityl 1 Service Center Procedure To set the QFill task parameters 1 Add a QFill task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar enter the volume of liquid that you want to dispense into each plate well 3 Inthe Availa
184. apter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide South3 south4 southsS south6 westl west2 west4 west5 west6 North ric3 ric4 rics ric6 ric ric8 riclo ricil ri ci2 ricl3 r2c3 r2c4 r2cs r2c6 rac r2c8 r2c10 r2c11 r2c12 r2c13 r3c3 r3c4 r3c5 r3c6 Psc r3c8 r3c10 Page pot Be r3cl2 r3cl3 r4c3 r4c4 r4cs r4c6 rac r4c8 r4c10 r4c11 r4c12 r4c13 r5c3 r5c4 r5c5 r5c 6 r5c7 r5c8 r5c10 r5c11 r5c12 r5c13 r6c3 r c4 r c5 r c r c7 r 6c8 r6c1o r cl1 r6cl2 r6cl3 r7c3 r7c4 r7cs r7c6 rec r7c8 r7c10 r7c11 r7c12 r7c1l3 r8c3 r8c4 r8c5 r8c6 r8c7 r8c8 r8c10 r8c11 r8cl2 r8c13 r9c3 r9oc4 roc5 ro9c roc r9oc8 r9cl10 r9c11 r9cl2 r9cl3 r10c3 r10c4 r10c5 r1loc6 rloc rloc8 r10c10 r10c11 r1 0c12 r10cl13 rlic3 r1lic4 rlics rlic6 rlic rlic8 r11 1c10 rilicll rilicl2 riicl3 r12c3 rl2c4 rl2cs r1l2c6 rl2c 7 rl2c8 r1 12c10 r12c11 r12c12 r12c13 r13c3 r13c4 r13c5 r13c6 r13c7 r13c8 r13c10 r13c11 r13c12 r13c13 r14c3 rl4c4 rl4c5 r14c6 rl4c7 r14c8 r1 14c10 r14c11 r14c12 ri4cl3 r15c3 ri5c4 r15cs r15c6 rise r15c8 r15c10 riScll ril5cl2 ri5cl3 r16c3 r16c4 r16ch r16c6 risc r16c8 riscio ricil r16c12 r16c13 The order of the Note how the order of the columns references the order of the tabs in columns the Apply label task Protocol Task Parameters toolbar The six columns of a particular side correspond to the six fields in the protocol task parameters The column South3 is the column that contains the root data that will be printed on the south si
185. apter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 145 VWorks User Guide Setting the vacuum station device properties About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the vacuum station s device properties To set the vacuum station device properties Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the vacuum station s generic properties ist x Device Properties f System E General Eig Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name Vacuum Station amp multimek Device type Vacuum Station B Human Robot Approach height mm 9 Human robot Allowed prohibited labware vacuum Station E Teachpoints meee vacuum Station Device is accessible from robot Human robot E Velocity11 Robot Device is accessible from robot Robot A Robot Teachpoint For robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR eee Device has north side BCR Delete device Device has east side BCR pas E acuum Station properties Output number Sensor input number Expand the Vacuum Station properties group This instrument can only be used with a BioCel a Double click in the field next to Output number and enter the number the Bio I O uses to initiate the vacuum b Double click in the field next to Sensor input number and select the number that the Bio I O uses to detect the presence of a vacuum Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information a
186. ar code labelling instructions Store and export log files Store and export data collected by plate readers Communicate with other computers on your company s network for exchange of files reporting of errors and accessing email Connecting computer to device Minimum system requirements Related information Chapter 5 VWorks installation 83 VWorks User Guide The controlling computer can be connected to devices by Ethernet or serial cables The controlling computer is the one that you have installed VWorks on and that you are using to control one or more devices If you connect via Ethernet and the controlling computer is already connected to a company LAN or other local network you need a second separate network card for device to computer communication This second network card allows the device to operate on an isolated network Note If you purchased your computer from Velocityl1 the computer has two network cards Before installing VWorks make sure that your computer has the following minimum requirements PC system Any PC capable of running Windows 2000 or Windows XP Communication interface Q Dedicated 10BaseT Ethernet port two network cards if connecting to your company LAN Q RS 232 serial port Monitor Q Preferred 1280 x 1024 resolution Q Minimum requirement 1024 x 768 For information about See Deciding on serial or Ethernet Choosing between serial and networking Ethernet on page
187. arlier using plate setUserData The task object is a VWorks defined generic object that refers to the currently executing task It allows the properties of the task to be accessed using a standard syntax Depending on which task is executing a different set of properties may be available Properties The task object provides a comprehensive set of properties that can be read write or read only These properties specifically affect the behavior of the task that is about to be executed by the VWorks scheduler For example the Aspirate task has a property called volume To store this property in a variable you would write x task volume To set the volume property of the Aspirate task to the value stored in the variable x you would write task volume x In this example the run time interpreter determines through the context that task refers to the currently executing Aspirate task Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 273 VWorks User Guide Attempting to access properties that are inappropriate for the current task will result in a scripting syntax error but will not halt the execution of your protocol Methods The task object has the following methods Method Comments task skipQ Skips execution of the current task Use this function to conditionally execute a task such as in this example which skips the task if the simulator is not running if isSimulatorRunning task skip task
188. as ended you would clean up according to Cleaning up after a run on page 78 Chapter 4 Performing a run 61 VWorks User Guide Starting a run from VWorks About this topic When to do this Procedure This topic explains how to start a protocol run from the Start button in VWorks Start a run after performing pre run checks and opening a protocol To start a run l Make sure that all instruments used in the protocol are in their home positions Refer to the instruments user guides for more information about homing In VWorks click Start If this is the first run with this device file VWorks confirms communication with all devices and the devices home If there are no protocol compilation errors the Number of Cycles dialog box opens If you selected from plug in as the plate type the Labware dialog box opens asking you to select the labware type select the appropriate labware type from the list Please select the labware to use OK Cancel 62 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide 4 Ifyou are using the FileReader plug in the Open dialog box opens asking you to select the text file that contains the bar code label data a Select the plug in text file that contains the data from the Open dialog box and click Open Open 1 1x Look in i FileReaderPluginD ata 0O 2 eca My Recent Documents E Desktop E FileReaderData txt a My Documents vr
189. as they are performed on all plates in the Run according to the selected log file options If you selected the option for the robot to check all plate positions for plates this operation will now be performed If an error is found correct the problem and click Retry The first instructions of the protocol are executed If User Message tasks are included in the protocol you are prompted to respond to them For information about See Breakpoints in runs Using breakpoints on page 176 Setting up runs overview Overview of performing a run on page 60 Checking positions for plates Setting general options on page 34 before every run a Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Starting a run from a command line About this topic You can start VWorks and initiate a run directly from a command line You might do this so that you can start a run remotely or so that you can start a run of a particular protocol in fewer steps Procedure To start VWorks from a command line 1 In Windows navigate to Start gt Run 2 Inthe Run text box type cmd and click OK The command prompt opens 3 Atthe command prompt change the current folder to vworks workspace by typing cd vworks workspace bin Press ENTER Type the name of the VWorks executable followed by values for the switches that specify The protocol to run Your username Your password The number of cycles for which to run the prot
190. as west side BCR Be Device has north side BCR Delte devcs Device has east side BCR E Bio Tek Washer properties a 3 COM port 3 Under the Bio Tek Washer properties group double click in the field adjacent to COM port 4 From the list box select the port connecting the Bio Tek Washer to the controlling computer 5 Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about See Opening the device properties Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek belongs to on page 390 Adding a device Adding devices on page 107 Setting Bio Tek task parameters Setting the Bio Tek task parameters on page 392 Using Bio Tek Diagnostics Using Bio Tek Diagnostics on page 393 392 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the Bio Tek task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Bio Tek Washer task parameters Bio Tek Washer task The Bio Tek Washer task moves a plate to the Bio Tek where a pre defined selected wash program is executed Procedure To set Bio Tek Washer task parameters 1 Add a Bio Tek Washer task to a protocol 2 From the Select program to run list box in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the program that you want to
191. asks there are in the protocol In general one simultaneous plate can be used for every task in the protocol This is because in general each task uses one plate position As an example a protocol with three tasks can have three plates on the table at once There are exceptions to this though such as cases where the same plate position is used for more than one of the tasks and when a VPrep is used Several plates can be positioned on a VPrep at the same time Q Positions there are in the system that will incubate plates If your lab automation system has five plate hotels and each stores ten plates you can run more simultaneous plates than if your system has only six platepads Q Plates there are in a restack task If the protocol includes a restack task the number of simultaneous plates must be equal to or greater than the number of plates in the restack task If the number of simultaneous plates is set too high the protocol may be slowed down because the robot will move around to avoid a deadlock In cases where too many plates are in the system and there is no way to move plates around further this can result in a deadlock at which point the protocol stops If the number of simultaneous plates is set too low the time for the protocol run could be extended Optimizing the number of simultaneous plates is therefore critical for maximizing efficiency A typical protocol has 5 30 simultaneous plates but it could be many
192. ates out of the system on page 321 Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Inventory editor views and filters on page 331 Setting Mount Dismount task parameters Introduction Mount Dismount task defined When to use Before you start This topic describes how to set the Mount and Dismount task parameters The Mount task places one plate on top of another plate and works in collaboration with the Waitfor task The Dismount task removes a plate from the top of another plate These tasks are associated with a platepad device and are typically used to mount a filter plate onto another plate or reservoir Before you start make sure that your labware is properly configured Labware Editor Q The plate or reservoir you want to be on the bottom is set to Can be mounted in the Labware Editor Q The plate you want to be on the top is set to Can mount in the Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Procedure To set Mount task parameters l In the protocol process that is downstacking the upper plate for example a filter plate add a Waitfor task at the position you want to mount the plate Filter plate called Downstack from Filteri Filterplate1 Select the Waitfor task In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar enter a name for the Waitfor task Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings Type a name for the waitfor Filte
193. ation about The next step The workflow this topic belongs to Setting up Ultramark generic device properties Setting up devices Opening Ultramark device properties page Setting Ultramark task parameters Using Ultramark Diagnostics See Setting up the Ultramark plate reader data file on page 488 Workflow for configuring the Ultramark on page 486 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Using Ultramark Diagnostics on page 491 Setting up the Ultramark plate reader data file About this topic This topic explains how to define where the plate reader data files are stored The Ultramark plate reader measures the absorbance of samples in microplate wells and stores the measurement data in a comma separated file on the controlling computer Setting the plate To set the data file output folder ante data file 1 Select Tools gt Options older 2 Inthe VWorks Options dialog box click the Log Options tab 3 Click the Reader output file ellipsis button SSS 4 Navigate to the folder in which you want to store the data file Enter a file name but leave off the extension File name MyD ataFile Save as type Reader Output Files dat x Cancel 6 Click Save and make sure that the correct file path is displayed Chapter 28 Ultramar
194. ation in the park position Purge Purging clears air bubbles from the pressure path and syringe path Purging is often performed after priming to make sure that the valves contain no air The actions use the settings in the selected QRM file and any calibration corrections from the selected calibration file 464 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide About calibration files About QRM files Related information To perform an individual operation 1 From the Files group box of the Actions page select a QRM file and calibration file Files ORM TestQRMFile grm Calibration TestCalibration cal fai Click a button to start an action If you want to stop the action click Abort Calibration files contain the results of gravimetric calibration tests and are used to adjust the volume delivery process to make sure that the volumes delivered are accurate Calibration files are initially provided by Innovadyne but you can perform your own calibrations the results of which are stored in a file Calibrations are performed through Innovadyne s Nanodrop software and the files can only be selected through the Velocity11 Nanodrop Diagnostics software QRM Quick Run Method files store collections of Nanodrop settings QRM files are created through Innovadyne s Nanodrop software and are selected through the Velocity11 Nanodrop Diagnostics software Examples of settings stored in QRM files are U Disp
195. b2 platehub2 platehub2 Click Save changes and close the inventory editor e e e AUN Select the Unload task and in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the location group in the first device to the Unload from list Unload from Name Number of plates Type to move 4 Location Select the Load task and in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the location group in the second device to the Assigned locations list Assigned Name Number of plates Final location 4 Compile the protocol and check for errors x s 2 os 11 20 94 58 AM Info Compiler Protocol compile complete with o errors o warnings Click Start to start the run In the Number of Cycles dialog box type in the number of plates that you are moving and click OK Open the inventory editor and click the Inventory Management tab to make sure that the plates moved as expected 326 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Creating a location group Creating a location group on page 313 Creating a plate group Creating a plate group on page 316 Opening the inventory editor Opening the inventory editor on page 310 Moving plates in and out of a U Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Incubating plates Using a plate group to incubate plates on p
196. ble devices box select the QFill that you want to use for this task and click Add The name of the device moves to the Devices to use list 4 Ifyou want to use vacuum filtration in the Filtration group box a Select the Use filtration check box b Complete the Begin filtration sentence specifying how long before or after filling you want the filtration to start c Type a filtration duration in the Filter for text box If you want to add a post filtration delay type the delay time in the remaining text box The delay is the time that elapses before the robot will pick up the plate allowing the vacuum under the plate to dissipate If this value is too small the robot may not pick up the plate correctly causing a robot crash Related information For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the QFill on belongs to page 466 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using QFill Diagnostics Using QFill Diagnostics on page 470 470 Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using VWorks User Guide Using QFill Diagnostics About this topic In stand alone mode a QFill is operated using a built in keypad Velocity11 has developed QFill Diagnostics to allow users to operate a QFill using VWorks software This topic explains how to perform simple manipulations of a Genetix
197. bout See The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring a vacuum station on page 144 Opening vacuum station s device Adding devices on page 107 properties page Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 Vacuum station tasks Setting Vacuum task parameters on page 215 146 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the VCode About this topic This topic presents a workflow for configuring the VCode in VWorks The VCode Bar Code Print and Apply Station prints bar code labels and applies them to any side of a microplate The VCode can operate as a stand alone instrument or can be configured to be used in an automation system that runs VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a VCode profile in the VCode User Guide 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the VCode device properties on page 147 Related information For information about Setting up a device Saving the device file VCode tasks Using VCode Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 VCode User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 147 VWorks Use
198. can rotate the plate in a full circle For information about See Reading bar codes on plates ata Setting Place Plate task parameters on platepad page 204 Planning to add bar code labels to Using bar code input files on plates page 293 Applying bar code labels Setting Apply Label task parameters on page 185 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 293 VWorks User Guide Using bar code input files About this topic Who should read this Bar code fields Bar code input files This topic describes how to create and use bar code input files Technicians and administrators who write protocols with bar code reader or Apply Label VCode tasks When setting up a VCode you set task parameters that specify the content of bar code fields An example of a bar code field is NAW 1001 Bar code fields can be imported from bar code input files For detailed information about bar code fields and formats see the VCode User Guide Filename and location Bar code input files are text files with the naming convention filename bar They are stored in the location specified in the general VWorks options When to use You can use bar code input files to do the following Q Verify the bar codes on incoming plates which are plates that are downstacked into the system This function is set in the parameters for the plate icon of the incoming plates Incoming plates have bar codes on sout
199. ce properties The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Opening Envision device properties page Setting Envision task parameters Using Envision Diagnostics See Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the Envision on page 412 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Envision task parameters on page 416 Using Envision Diagnostics on page 417 A Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting Envision task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Envision device task parameters in VWorks Envision task The Envision task moves a plate to a PerkinElmer Envision plate reader defined and instructs the reader to perform an Envision assay protocol Envision assay protocols are created using the Envision s dedicated computer and software The protocol to use for the task is a setting of the Envision task Procedure To set Envision task parameters 1 Add the Envision task to the desired place in the protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar check the name of the currently selected assay protocol which is displayed in the Assay protocol to run box 3 Ifthe displayed protocol is not the one you want to run click Select new assay protocol and select the profile from the Select Envision Assay Protocol lis
200. ce profiles and teachpoints To remove the Velocity11 files from the registry 1 From the Windows Start menu select Run 2 Inthe Open text box type regedit 3 Click OK The Windows registry editor opens 4 Expand folders to select the following folder HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE Welocity11 5 Make sure you have selected the Velocity11 folder IMPORTANT Making a mistake and deleting the wrong registry folder may cause critical failures with your operating system 6 Select Edit gt Delete For information about See Types of information stored inthe Relationships of configuration VWorks registry components on page 22 Exporting Velocityl1 data from the Moving or sending a registry file on registry files for example before page 372 clearing the registry 101 VWorks User Guide Setting up devices This chapter is for people with Administrator or higher privileges Before you can start using VWorks to control your lab automation system you need to set up your instruments and robots as devices in VWorks This chapter describes how to do this 102 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide About devices About this topic Device defined Device file defined Device file location Related information This topic introduces devices and the device file A device is an item on your lab automation system that has an entry in the device manager A device can be a robot
201. cedure on how to set this task up in a protocol Related information For information about See Dispensing liquids Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Setting Load Unload and Incubate at storage device task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Load Unload and Incubate at storage device tasks for a storage device Load Unload and The Load task instructs a robot to move a defined set of plates into a Incubate at storage storage device device defined The Unload task instructs a robot to remove a defined set of plates from a storage device Using the Unload task and Load task in sequence instructs the robot to move a defined set of plates from one storage device to another The Incubate at storage device task moves a defined set of plates into a storage device leaves them there for a specified time period and then removes them from the storage device These tasks are available for the following devices Q PlateHub Q StoreX incubator Procedures Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 199 VWorks User Guide To set the Unload task parameters 1 2 3 Confirm that the plates you want to move are in the system Add the Unload task to a protocol process In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the groups or locations you want to unload from the Available groups locations list to the Ass
202. cent to use list box 3 Choose a Move type Move type Comments Unidirectional Each row of wells on the plate is read in the same direction for example left to right Bidirectional The plate rows are read in both directions for example left to right followed by right to left Bidirectional plate reading is faster while unidirectional plate reading tends to be more consistent Related information Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using 453 VWorks User Guide Choose a Measurement mode Move type Comments Stepping The sensor stops at each well to take a reading Continuous The sensor takes readings without stopping Continuous measurement is faster Choose the appropriate filter from the Filter selection list box These become available after the Multiskan is turned on and scans for filters that are present Set shaking parameters if desired a Enter the total amount of time in seconds for the shake process in the Shake time field b Enter the amount of time in seconds you want to shake for each shake interval in the Shake on period field c Enter the amount of time in seconds you want to rest in between shake periods in the Shake off period field d Select the shaking frequency from the Frequency Hz list box Choose a folder in which to save the file containing the results a Click the ellipsis button and navigate to the desired folder in the Browse for Folder dialog box b
203. ckman Multimek Pipettor Device name Teleshake1 E Bio Tek Washer Device type Teleshake Standard H Genetix Aliquot Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Genetix QFill amp QFill1 E e Innovadyne Nanodrop Device is accessible from robot Robot1 Yes H 6 Labcyte Echo550 Teachpoint for robot Robot Device is accessible from robot Robot2 No E E Bar code Readers E W Teleshake High speed 1536 Device has south side BCR No x Teleshake2 Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No E Teleshake Standard properties Eg Zeiss Plate Vision Reader COM port COM 1 a Zeissi New Device Delete Device Device Diagnostics Expand the Teleshake type properties group Double click in the adjacent field to COM port and from the list box select the port the Teleshake is using to communicate to the computer running VWorks Save the Device Properties settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 482 Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Teleshake on page 480 Opening Teleshake device Adding devices on page 107 properties Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Setting Teleshake task parameters Se
204. class by clicking the Edit button which opens the liquid library editor Associating the task with the VPrep shelf In the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar of the Aspirate pipette task you need to tell the system from what type of labware to aspirate In this case there are two choices If you select Plate A the Costar 96 well plate you downstacked will be moved to the VPrep and the volume aspirated from it Instead you select reservoirl which is the name of the device that holds the buffer reservoir Plate to aspirate from Plate A Finally you specify that we want to aspirate 20 uL Aspirate volume pL 2q The modified task is shown in the following diagram Pipette Process Brk na 4 on VPrep1 iy poe It on VPrep1 from reservoirl quadrant 1 using 1XTE Adding a Dispense task Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 225 VWorks User Guide To complete the pipetting operation we have to add a Dispense task and set the parameters Drag the Dispense task into the pipette process pane Pipette Process 41 on VPrep1 Pipette Process 1 Aspirate 20 0 uL Dispense 10 0 pL on VPrep1 from reservoirl into Plate A quadrant 1 using quadrant 1 The task correctly defaults to dispense into Plate A but the dispense volume is incorrect and there is no associated liquid class After editing the task parameters the task is shown in the following diagram Pipette Pr
205. cluded for Plate 2 and this causes the process to wait until it receives an instruction to continue Meanwhile the bar code is applied to Plate 1 After the bar code has been applied to Plate 1 the Signal task called Label Me Second releases the wait condition on Plate 2 and the bar code is applied Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 219 For information about Creating a protocol Adding tasks to protocols Setting the Waitfor and Signal task parameters Other tasks VWorks User Guide See Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Setting Waitfor task and Signal task parameters on page 217 Setting task parameters on page 169 220 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide 221 VWorks User Guide Setting VPrep pipette task parameters This chapter describes how to set the pipette tasks in VWorks for the Velocity11 VPrep device Anyone who is writing protocols that uses a VPrep should read this chapter 222 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Configuring a pipette process example About this topic The example Creating a protocol Downstacking a plate Adding a Pipette Process task Selecting a VPrep This topic gives an example of how to construct a protocol sub process that performs a simple pi
206. cols When to clear the rule If your protocol has all of the following attributes consider clearing the rule check box Q The protocol has more than one pipette process that uses the same VPrep Q The duration of one of the pipetting operations is much longer than another Explanation Consider an example in which a protocol has two processes and both have a pipetting operation that uses the same VPrep When the check box is selected the pipetting operations for one process are completed before the pipetting operations begin for the other process Now consider what happens when the first pipetting operation takes significantly longer to complete than the second operation and the protocol is run several times in succession The overall time taken for the protocol to complete is much greater than it needs to be because during each cycle the system had to wait for the slower pipetting operations to complete for all the plates in the process before it could continue If the rule is turned off a plate from the fast pipetting process can be delivered to the VPrep after a plate from the slow pipetting process followed by another plate from the slow pipette process and so on This reduces the bottleneck at the VPrep because it allows the faster process to continue and its second cycle in the series to start before the first cycle is complete Handle plates in instance order Automatically release stacker racks after protocol f
207. continuing blocking VWorks defined The VWorks JavaScript interpreter provides two objects that can be objects accessed by a script They are the plate object and task object Plate object The plate object provides access to properties of the plate that the current task is operating upon Properties The plate object has the following properties Property Data type Description plate name String Name of the plate plate instance Integer Plate instance number plate labware String Name of the labware type 272 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Task object Property Data type Description plate barcode Array Array of four strings corresponding to SOUTH 0 WEST 1 NORTH 2 EAST 3 Example plate barcode SOUTH mybarcode plate volume Array of An array of floating point numbers The arrays array size depends on the number of wells in the labware 96 384 or 1536 arranged in row column format This property is only enabled on VWorks systems that have the volume tracking database option Methods Methods are JavaScript functions invoked through an object The plate object has the following methods available on those systems with the volume tracking database option Method Comments plate setUserData string key string Stores value under the key key ina value database record associated with this plate plate getUserData string key Returns the value stored e
208. correct seal type temperature and time for the plate Related information For information about See Configuring a PlateLoc as a device Workflow for configuring the PlateLoc on page 132 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 213 VWorks User Guide Setting User Message task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the parameters for the User Message task User Message task The Administrator or Technician who creates a protocol can add User defined Message tasks to provide reminders to the operator The reminders are in the form of messages that appear on the screen at the appropriate time and pause the protocol until acknowledged by the operator User message tasks can for example be used to remind the operator to empty the waste container fill a reservoir or remove plates IMPORTANT Remember to remove all user messages from protocols that you intend to run unattended Example In the example shown below the protocol has four user messages that remind the operator to perform final run preparation tasks The user messages appear before the plates are downstacked The intended sequencing of the User Messages tasks can be ensured by the addition of Signal tasks to the other processes in the protocol errr gt o 384 ABGene 38
209. crash into the reservoir because the task will be performed on the assumption that the tips are moving into a 384 V11 Reservoir manual fill 21 5 deep reservoir So you change the labware association to 384 V11 Reservoir manual fill 21 5 deep Note To save the changes in the device manager you need to have Administrator login privileges 384 V11 Reservoir Manual fill 21 5 deep Note that when you associate a type of labware with the VPrep shelf you are also associating all of the parameters for that type of labware stored in the labware database The VPrep references the labware database parameters so that the pipette tips move to the right depth position and so on as they enter the reservoir 224 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Adding the Aspirate pipette task After configuring a VPrep shelf compile the current protocol to check for errors The next step is to add the Aspirate pipette task Pipette Process TA 3 1 on VPrept i Siam It H on WPrep1 from Plate A quadrant 1 Associating the task with a liquid class In the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar of the Aspirate pipette task you need to tell the system what class of liquid it is aspirating The system then uses the parameters stored in the liquid library database for that class during the aspiration operation In this case you select the class 1XTE Liquid class You can see the parameters used for the
210. creenshot of the Excel file for the column letters Spreadsheet column Information A Date and time that the entry was added B Type of information Error Event Info Script DOODO User Origin of the information D Either the Q Name of the plate Q Name of the device if it refers to a reagent E Description of the log entry Related information For information about See Log files About log and data files on page 46 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 53 VWorks User Guide Adding an alarm About this topic Procedure You can set an alarm if your lab automation system is equipped with Q A Weigh Pad Q A StoreX incubator with environmental control Q An iSeries controller on a BioCel For the Weigh Pad you can set an alarm to inform you when the bottle on the Weigh Pad becomes too heavy or too light For the StoreX incubator and the iSeries controller you can set an alarm to inform you when a particular temperature humidity or gas concentration level is reached The alarm creates an error message when a measurement falls outside the range that you specify This topic describes how to set up such an alarm To add an alarm 1 Select Tools gt Options gt Log Options and in the Screen settings group box select the Log measurement readings check box 2 Select Tools gt Protocol Options gt Alarms Protocol Options Alarms Log measurements every J minutes Measurement
211. cs xi Diagnostics Profiles Profile Control __ p Parameters localhost Host Address 295 Rename Save settings 3 Select a profile from the list box in the Profile Control group box a To delete the profile click Delete and then click Yes in the alert message dialog box b Click Rename to save the profile with a different name Enter the new name in the profile name dialog box and click OK c To edit the selected profile make the desired changes and click Save settings 4 Click OK to close the dialog box Related information For information about See Opening Echo 550 Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Configuring the Echo 550 Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices on page 398 Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Echo 550 task parameters Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 410 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide 411 VWorks User Guide Envision setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The PerkinElmer Envision is a plate reader that can be integrated into your lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Envision set the Envision task parameters and use Envision Diagnostics 412 Chapter 19 Envision setting up a
212. cted using Ethernet the Device ID of the device on the network Q Ifthe device is connected using serial the COM port with which the controlling computer uses to communicate For information about See Creating profiles Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 104 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide About diagnostics software About this topic Background Types of diagnostics software Related information This topic introduces diagnostics The devices can be controlled in real time directly through the VWorks diagnostics software using simple commands Diagnostics software is used for Q Troubleshooting Q Setting teachpoints Q Performing manual operations outside a protocol For example if an error occurs during a run that leaves a plate and the robot where they should not be you can use the robot diagnostics to move the plate and return the robot to its home position Instruments manufactured by Velocity11 include their own diagnostics software You can find instructions for using this software in the relevant user guide For information about See Creating profiles Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 Opening diagnostics software Chapter 6 Setting up devices 105 VWorks User Guide About this topic This topic describes how to open the diagnostics software for any configured instrument Proc
213. d Run set file The data displayed in the run set manager is stored as an XML file with the file name extension rst in a location selected by your VWorks administrator Run set privileges You can only save run set files if you are logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account Run Options When setting up a run set for each run you define Q How many times the run should cycle Q The time that each run should start Run scheduling logic You can create a run set while another protocol is running If the time to start a run scheduled by the run set manager arrives while another run is being performed the start is delayed Then when the running protocol finishes the earliest scheduled run in the run set starts 66 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Setting up runs overview Overview of performing a run on page 60 Working with the run set manager About this topic This topic describes how to create edit save and open run sets Adding a run To add a run to the run set 1 Inthe Run Set Manager toolbar click Add run 2 Inthe Select a protocol file to use for this scheduled run browser box navigate to and select the protocol file that you want to add 3 Click Open A new row is added to the Run Set Manager toolbar table with a default time scheduled 5 minutes into the future 4 Ifyou want to schedule the run for a differ
214. d Procedure This topic describes how to set the Pump Reagent task parameters for a Velocity 1 VPrep The Pump Reagent pipette task is used on a VPrep to pump liquid into an installed autofilling reservoir Reservoirs are typically filled with washing buffer or water and drained through the gravity drain IMPORTANT If you run an empty reservoir step and a fill reservoir step in the same protocol check the protocol to make sure that it will not lead to an overflow To fill a VPrep reservoir l 2 In the Pipette Process Editor click the Pump Reagent icon In the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select Fill reservoir The Fill reservoir and Empty reservoir values determine whether the pumps will fill or empty the reservoir To empty the reservoir you must complete the Autofill Configuration information on the Shelves tab of the VPrep Diagnostics In the list box select the shelf on which the reservoir is located In the for text box type the pumping duration This is the time in seconds that the pumps pump In the at text box type the percentage of maximum pumping rate This combined with the pumping duration determines the volume of fluid moved In the every text box type a number that controls how frequently the liquid is pumped For example if you type 3 the pump will run every third time the task runs If you are using a WeighShelf in the Min level text box enter the minimum percentage of liquid
215. d close the dialog box To define a plate type 1 Open the Flexispense Diagnostics Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using 425 VWorks User Guide Plates Plate definition 1 h Save Plate Name 8 char limit rows columns Row spacing mm 22 4 Column spacing mm Al X position mm Al Y position mm 2 From the Plate definition list box located in the Plates group box select the plate number you want to define Enter a name for the plate in the Name field Define the well number a From the rows list box select the total number of rows horizontal axis in your plate b From the columns list box select the total number of columns vertical axis in your plate 5 Enter the rest of the plate measurements in the appropriate fields 6 Click Save Plate to save the definitions 7 Click OK to close the dialog box To manually control the pump and reset the Flexispense 1 Open the Flexispense Diagnostics Pump Priming revolutions 100 Reverse revolutions 100 Reset Flexispense2 Cancel 2 To operate the pump in the forward direction enter the number of revolutions you want the pump to turn in the Priming revolutions field and click Prime 3 To operate the pump in the backward direction enter the number of revolutions in reverse you want the pump to turn in the Reverse revolutions field and click Reverse 4 To reset the F
216. d delimiter to all logs 4 16 25 69 PM Info VWorks Device plugin loaded PlateStackDriver dll contains PlateStak Perkin Elrr 4 16 25 70 PM Info VWorks Device plugin loaded SoftMaxReader dll contains SoftMax Reader Driver 4 16 25 70 PM Info VWorks Device plugin loaded TBotDriver dll contains TBot Robo Cylinder Trans 4 16 25 70 PM Info VWorks Finished loading plugins Time was 2000 ms 4 21 27 89 PM Info went n nnn nnn nnn n nn nn nnn n enc nn nn nn nn nn nn nn mmnm 4 21 98 71 PM The dotted line above this one is a delimiter Notes Clearing logs You can clear the Log toolbar You can clear one log or all the logs For example you can do this immediately before running a protocol so that you know that the messages you see are related to the protocol Clearing the Log toolbar does not clear the log files To clear the Log toolbar 1 Right click in the Log toolbar pane 2 Select one of the following Clear this log Clear all logs fa Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Cleaning up after a run About this topic Procedure Release Protocol Stackers command VStack only Related information This topic outlines some clean up steps that you should do after a run ends Perform this procedure immediately after a run ends To clean up after a run l VSpin users only If the protocol used robotically loaded counterweight plates click Ye
217. de of the plate in field 3 Each row of the table represents a different cycle in the run The first row contains the root data that will be printed during the first run cycle and so on The following screenshots show how the same plug in is used in a total of four fields on two sides of the plate South West North East South West North East Printing Option Printing Option Use this label Use this labe Format to use Format to use 1 Number of Fields 2 Number of Fields 2 Field 1 Field 1 PLUGIN Field 2 PLUGIN Field 2 Field 3 PLUGIN Field 3 PLUGIN Field 4 Field 4 Field 5 Field 5 Field 6 Field 6 Increment Chars 3 Increment Chars 3 Starting Increment Starting Increment 1 Using these parameters data from the above plug in file would print the following labels Field Printed labels in run cycle 1 South Field 2 rlc2 South Field 3 r1c3 West Field 1 rlc7 West Field 3 rlc9 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 301 VWorks User Guide Repeating columns A text file with data for labels on only one side of the plate is sufficient to print the same labels on other sides of the plate To understand this think of the columns as occurring in six column sets If there are fewer than six columns the remaining columns will be left blank If there is only one set in the file the set is repeated for the other sides of the plate where you have selected Use this labe
218. device file You need to add a device for each instrument and robot in your lab automation system To add devices to a device file l Make sure that the devices are physically networked to the VWorks computer and turned on Start VWorks and login as an Administrator Do one of the following Ifyou have an existing device file that you want to add to navigate to File gt Device File click Open and select your device file Ifyou are creating a new device file navigate to File gt Device File and click New Click the Device Manager tab Click New Device in the Device List toolbar and enter a name for the device you are adding In the Device Properties window set the Device type The default type is Plate Pad Standard Repeat step 5 and step 6 for each device Select File gt Device File gt Save If you are creating a new device file you are prompted to enter a name for your device file Alternatively you can select File gt Save All This saves the device file and the current protocol file at the same time For information about See What to do next Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for setting up devices on belongs to page 106 108 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device About this topic Procedure Look up table This topic de
219. device statically or use a serial connection This saves you from having to add a second network card to your computer and install DHCP server software When integrating into an existing LAN with DHCP If you are connecting a device to an existing network that is already running a DHCP server it is strongly recommended that you dynamically assign the IP address of the device and leave the statically set IP address of the computer s network card as it is When setting up a new LAN connection If you are setting up a new network you must decide whether to use static or dynamic IP addressing for the device In general if you have more than a few devices on your network it is more convenient to use automatic addressing because you can remove and add devices without having to set up their IP addresses statically each time If you only have a few devices it may be more convenient to set them statically and avoid having to set up the DHCP software To make it easier for you to set up an Ethernet network Velocity11 sells a DHCP Server Kit that includes Q A networking card L An Ethernet cable Q An Ethernet switch L DHCP server software The server supplied in the DHCP Server Kit works with computers running a Windows XP or 2000 operating system Without the kit you need to obtain the necessary parts yourself Chapter 5 VWorks installation 89 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Deci
220. device to the device manager Opening Multiskan Ascent device properties Setting Multiskan task parameters Using Multiskan Diagnostics VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the Multiskan Ascent on page 448 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters on page 452 Using Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics on page 454 452 Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting Multiskan Ascent task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Multiskan Ascent task parameters in the VWorks Multiskan Ascent The Multiskan task moves a plate to the Multiskan where it is read task defined Procedure To set the Multiskan Ascent task parameters 1 Adda Multiskan Ascent task to a protocol process Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Multiskan Ascent to use Multiscan nd Move type Unidirectional Bidirectional Measurement mode 0 Stepping Continuous Filter selection v Shake time s jo Shake on period s jo Shake off period s fo Shake frequency Hz 1 b Save results to the following directory C Documents and Settings mhirst PACIFIC De m Include plate number in file name Notes 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the Multiskan that you want to use from the Multiskan As
221. ding on serial or Ethernet Choosing between serial and networking Ethernet on page 85 Physically connecting the Connecting Ethernet cables on controlling computer to an page 93 instrument Setting a static IP address for an Setting the network card s IP address Ethernet connection to a stand on page 90 alone instrument The workflow that this procedure Workflow for installing VWorks on belongs to page 82 Workflows for Ethernet networking About this topic If you have not yet decided whether to use a serial or Ethernet connection to connect your device to the controlling computer read Choosing between serial and Ethernet on page 85 This topic guides you through the Ethernet connection setup process according to the type of network you want to set up Ethernet connection This is the workflow you use to set up an Ethernet connection workflow Skip step 6 if you are assigning IP addresses statically Step Topic 1 About Ethernet networking on page 86 2 Setting the network card s IP address on page 90 3 Setting the device s IP address Refer to the device documentation 4 Connecting Ethernet cables on page 93 5 Checking the network card s IP address on page 95 Optional You can do this at any time 6 Dynamic IP addresses only Installing and starting DHCP server software on page 96 7 Turning off Ethernet firewall software on page 98 a Chapter 5
222. ditor Procedure To log out 1 Click Log Out S Log Out Closing VWorks About this topic This topic explains how to exit from the VWorks application Procedure To exit from the VWorks application 1 Select File gt Exit 80 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide 81 VWorks User Guide VWorks installation This chapter describes how to install and uninstall VWorks It includes information on the minimum computer requirements and on setting up network connections between the controlling computer and the device 82 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Workflow for installing VWorks About this topic This topic outlines the procedures you need to follow to install VWorks Workflow The general workflow for installing VWorks Step Topic l Computer requirements and networking on page 82 Make sure your computer meets the installation requirements Installing VWorks software on page 84 Choosing between serial and Ethernet on page 85 Workflows for Ethernet networking on page 89 This topic only applies if you have chosen to use the Ethernet connection in step 3 Computer requirements and networking About this topic Before installing VWorks make sure that your computer meets the requirements given here Computer functions You need a computer to run VWorks The computer is used to Q DODDO Control devices on your lab automation system Input b
223. do 308 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Inventory management tasks About manually moving plates Terminology The following tasks are used with the inventory management system These are the tasks that move plates in to and out of a long term storage device L Load Q Unload Q Incubate at plate storage device Keeping the database synchronized It is important to note that the database cannot track plates that you manually add remove or move To keep the database synchronized with the long term storage device load and unload the plate storage device robotically or periodically reinventory the storage device Instead of manually adding plates to the storage device write a protocol to downstack the plates and load them Instead of manually removing plates from the storage device write a protocol to unload the plates and upstack them If you must manually load and unload plates If you must manually load and unload plates you will need to create a protocol to load or unload the exact plates that you are manually adding or removing and then run the simulator With an appropriate protocol the simulated run accurately changes the plates listed in the database without actually moving any plates When describing the movement of plates it is important to use terms correctly The terms load and unload are used from the storage device s perspective Term Definition Unload The act of movi
224. e Q VPrep 384 channel head with a 1536 well microplate Before you start The Serial Dilution task can only be used with a microplate and nota reagent plate or reservoir Before you start make sure the serial dilution plate has the following Q Acolumn or quadrant that contains the starting concentration of a compound to be diluted LJ One or more columns or quadrants each containing the same amount of diluent 254 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Example Procedure An example of a simple serial dilution is the following A 384 well serial dilution plate Plate A enters the pipette process as an empty plate 1 Columns 2 24 are filled with a specified amount of diluent 2 The compound to be diluted is taken from a compound source reservoir and dispensed into column 1 of Plate A 3 A serial dilution is performed on Plate A and following this an excess amount from column 24 is transferred to waste lt i N gt hi _t Process 1 on Fill Plate Afrom Aspirate 10 00 pL Dispense 10 00 pL Serial dilute Plate Aspirate 10 00 pL Dispense 10 00 pL vprep Diluent Reservoir from into Plate Ain A from Plate Ain into Waste Coumpound Source column 1 column 24 Reservoir in in column 1 column 1 To open the Serial Dilution Wizard 1 Drag the Serial Dilution task icon from the Pipette Task list in the Pipette Process Editor to the desired position in the pipette process
225. e enter a name in the New Profile dialog box and click OK 3 From the COM port list box select the port your VPrep is using to connect to the controlling computer 4 Inthe Head Type group box select the head you are using from the list box 5 Click OK to close the dialog box and save the changes 150 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The next step Setting the VPrep device properties on page 150 The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the VPrep on page 148 Opening VPrep Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Profile settings VPrep User Guide Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 VPrep tasks Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Using VPrep Diagnostics VPrep User Guide Setting the VPrep device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the VPrep device properties Procedure To set the VPrep device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the VPrep s generic properties 4 Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name vPrep 3 Human Robot Device type VPrep Precision Pipetting Station 1 Robot E VPrep Precision Pipetting Station properties Profile name WPrep Profile Initialize al devices Expand the VPrep properties gro
226. e inventory editor Closing the inventory editor This topic describes how to open and close the inventory editor Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic Storex Heraeus Cytomat PLC or a Velocity11 PlateHub and you are using inventory management with a database Before you can open the inventory editor the inventory database that the editor communicates with must be set up See Setting up the inventory management database on page 309 for more information To open the inventory editor 1 Select Tools gt Inventory Editor You can also open it by selecting a Load or Unload task in a protocol and clicking Edit location groups or Edit plate groups To close the inventory editor 1 Click the close box in the top right corner Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 311 VWorks User Guide About inventory groups About this topic This topic explains what inventory groups are and how to choose which type of plate group to use Who should read Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX this incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before you start Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 Inventory groups An inventory group is a group of plates that is a subset of the plates listed defined in the plate inventory Types of inventory There are two types of inventory groups group Q Location group Q Plate group Location groups
227. e remaining charge and power draw Provides information about a secondary UPS including the source of power UPS temperature remaining charge and power draw 8 Click OK to close the VWorks Options dialog box Related information For information about Maximum Robot Handling Speed group box in the labware editor Bar code files What to do next The workflow that this procedure belongs to Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 37 VWorks User Guide See Defining plate properties on page 348 About bar code reading and tracking on page 292 Setting general errorhandling options on page 38 Workflow for preparing a run on page 26 About setting error handling options About this topic VWorks is a complex application that requires the interaction of hundreds of parameters configurations and operator setup tasks for a protocol to run successfully Causes of errors Errors have many causes including poor protocol writing incorrect operator setup variation in plates hardware failure and software failure Handling errors It is important to understand that error handling is a normal part of during normal operating a lab automation system and that when errors occur it does operation not necessarily mean that your lab automation system has malfunctioned a Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Setting general error handling options About this topic This topic describes t
228. e Pipette process link icon w b Pipette process 1 2 Inthe Available pipettors list of the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select one or more pipettors to link to and click Add Available pipettors VPrep1 VPrep2 Pipettors that this task will use The selected pipettors move to the lower box and become available for the pipette task to use Related information For information about See Pipette sub process Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Configuring a VPrep shelf Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 Creating protocol basics Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Specific pipette tasks Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 228 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Aspirate pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Aspirate pipette task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep Aspirate pipette task An Aspirate pipette task is used with a VPrep to draw up liquid from a defined plate or reservoir Before you start Before you start setting the Aspirate task parameters you will need to associate a VPrep shelf with the labware type that will be used for the aspirating Procedure To set Aspirate pipette task parameters 1 Add an Aspirate pipette task icon to the pipette process editor window 2 Ifyou have defined a liquid class for the liquid you intend to asp
229. e determined A fixed transfer volume results in a dilution series whose concentration gradient is linear A variable transfer volume results in a dilution series whose concentration gradient is non linear If you choose a constant transfer volume then either a Enter the volume to be transferred in the Transfer volume field Or b Select The volume will be determined by a concentration gradient and enter the dilution factor in the Concentration gradient field For example if the Concentration gradient 2 then the concentration of the first dilution will be the concentration in the starting column n divided by 2 or n 2 The concentration of the second dilution will be the concentration of the second column n 1 divided by 2 or n 1 2 and so forth Note The upper range of the transfer volume is determined by the capacity of the pipette head and the well volume of the plate 256 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 7 Click Next to go to step 2 of the Serial Dilution Wizard and enter information about the initial concentration Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 2 Specify the initial concentrate Specify the column which contains the initial concentration 1000000 000000 1000000 1000000 000000 am we oc oOo oOo oo oc ke Kua 1 selection column 1 What is the volume of liquid in this column 120 Volume 0 120 pL What is the concentration of t
230. e eee 228 Setting Change Instance pipette task parameters 0 000 eee eee 230 Setting Change Tips pipette task parameters 2 0 2 2 0000 eee eee eee 232 Setting Dispense pipette task parameters 000 ce ee 235 Setting Dry Tips pipette task parameters perac taia ee ce ee 238 Setting Fill Plate pipette task parameters 2 0 es 239 Setting Loop pipette task parameters 00 ee ee 248 Setting Mix pipette task parameters 0 00 ce es 249 Setting Pump Reagent pipette task parameters 0 00 eee ee eee 252 Setting Serial Dilution task parameters 0 0000 eee eee ee 253 Setting Wash Tips pipette task parameters 0 0000 eee eee eee 262 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 267 Setting up a pre or post protocol proceSS 0 00 cee eee ee 268 Using JavaScript in VWorkS 1 ees 269 The JavaScript task object and properties 0 00002 276 Understanding the configuration settings in a pipette task 290 Table of Contents VCode User Guide About bar code reading and tracking aaa ees 292 Using bar code input fileS cesa ae raast aa tad ea a ee eee 293 Using bar code data TieSs seene Soares ie ee eee ee ee be SE 296 About the FileReader plug in 2 6 ee eee 298 About the FileReader file format 0 0 ce es 299 Using the FileReader plug in in a protocol 00 cee ee ee 301 Chapter 12 Using the VWork
231. e folder containing the protocol file 3 Select the protocol file and click OK You can also open a protocol by navigating to the pro file in Windows and double clicking it This launches VWorks and opens the protocol Related information For information about See How to create a protocol Creating a protocol basics on page 161 What to do next Setting general options on page 34 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 A Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Setting general options About this topic Overview When to use Procedure This topic describes how to configure the general options in the Options dialog box General options include the following Q Location of the bar code input or data file Maximum robot speed Visibility of task icons General device settings UPS settings DODO Review general options after you open a protocol but before starting a run IMPORTANT Protocols do not store Options dialog box settings as part of the protocol This means that all protocols use the settings that are currently selected in the Options dialog box You may decide to keep all or many of the options the same for every run IMPORTANT If you use bar code data files remember to select the correct file for every run To set general options 1 Click Tools and select Options 2 Make sure that the Options pag
232. e inventory management in the File Settings group box database on page 309 What to do next Adding an alarm on page 53 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 Importing a log file to Excel About this topic This topic describes how to import a log file into Microsoft Excel Log file data can then be reviewed and analyzed in Excel Procedure To import a log file to Excel 1 Open Microsoft Excel 2 Drag the file onto the Excel window The data is imported Ea Microsoft Excel ProcessLog Thursday February 12 2004 6_32_21 PM txt H File Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window Help Adobe PDF Type a question for help z X Dw i ara 10 B z USFS 2He E o A or ta va AG a ril Ll fre Ye Reply with Changes End Review q DBs Al X Fe 2 12 04 6 32 21 28 PM B C E 412 04 6 32 21 28 PM iinfo Scheduler 7326MB 41 89 of disk space remains on volume c 2 12 04 6 32 21 63 PM Info Scheduler Checking that all stackers are properly loaded 2 12 04 6 32 28 95 PM User Administrator Starting protocol 2 12 04 6 32 28 99 PM Event Stacker1 Source 1 Downstack Costar 384 polypro round bottom 2 12 04 6 32 31 70 PM Event Stacker1 Source 1 Downstack complete 2 12 04 6 32 31 75 PM Event Prep Starting pipette process 1 2 12 04 6 32 31 75 PM Event Wash Shelf Wash Shelf Aspirate 40pL from 1 quadra
233. e of the VWorks Options dialog box is selected 3 Ifyou are using a bar code file select its location a Inthe Bar Code Settings group box click the ellipsis button next to the appropriate type of bar code file b In the Open dialog box navigate to the folder that contains the bar code file c Select the file with a bar filename extension for an input file and a dat filename extension for a database file and click Open 4 Inthe Robot Settings group box select the desired maximum speed of the robot movement If the plate specific robot speed set in the Maximum Robot Handling Speed group box of the Labware editor is different from the general robot speed the slower of the two speeds is used DAMAGE HAZARD If you are testing a new protocol or learning to use the system run the robot at a slow or medium speed to reduce the risk of damage in the event of a crash Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Select an option in the Protocol Editor Settings group box if desired It is strongly recommended that you select the Hide icons for non configured device types check box This makes sure you choose the right icons for the devices available to you This is especially important where similar icons are used for different tasks In the Device Settings group box select from the following options Option Check positions for plates before every run Use robot offset of _mm Check for mini
234. e profile name if more than one Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using 475 VWorks User Guide Procedure To set up or change a Remp CSP profile 1 Open Remp CSP Device Diagnostics Remp CSP Diagnostics Information Alarms rv Operations CSP Driver Version Control CSP Device Server Version 1 2 28 DriverLocation C PROGRA 1 Remp Common Equipment Identification Not Connected Cycles Since Last Maintenance Equipment SW Version Not Connected Total Cycles Equipment SW Version Date Not Connected Use SAIA Simulator Device Status CSP Test Cycle Error Error Message Communication Queue I Online 1 ComPot Pause Clear Control Acknowledge Alarms Run Reference Seal Minitubes 2 Use the up down arrow keys to enter the correct Com Port This is the port the device uses to connect to the controlling computer Related information For information about See Creating a device in Remp Remp CSP User Guide software Opening Remp CSP Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager The next step Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the Remp belongs to CSP on page 474 Setting Remp CSP task parameters Setting Remp CSP task parameters on page 477 476 Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using VWorks User Guide
235. e properties on page 121 Related information For information about Setting up devices Setting Delid Relid task parameters See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 121 VWorks User Guide Setting the delid station device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the device properties for the delid station in VWorks To set the delid station s device properties 1 Open the Delid Station Device Properties page 2 Set the Delid Station s generic device properties CEE x Device Properties Hef System 4 Beckman Multimek Pipettor E Delid Station vacuum a Human Robot E Velocity11 Robot E General Device name DelidStation Device type Delid Station Vacuum Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible from robot Human robot Yes Teachpoint for robot Human robot multimek gt DelidStation Human robot A Robot Device is accessible from robot Robot No E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No E Delid Station acuum properties Initialize all devices Output number o Sensor input number 1 Access to trash Yes 3 When the delid station is integrated on a Bi
236. e protocol editor to a pipette process in the pipette process editor W Pipette process 1 A pipette task is an operation that is performed on one or more plates by a VPrep ora Multimek It is represented by an icon in the pipette process editor The following diagram shows a pipette task It Mix 10 00 pL 3 times at Plate 1 quadrant 1 32 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Pipette process defined Related information A pipette process is a sequence of pipette tasks that is performed ona specific plate as defined in the process editor It is a subroutine of a pipette process task The following diagram describes the relationship between a task pipette process task and a pipette process Task m Pipette process 1 Pipette process Pipette task i t t uU Pipette Process 1 on vprep a sosog Pipette Process Tips On Aspirate IDD yE Dispense 10 0 pl Tips Off on vprep from Plate 1 into Piste t qadt 1 quadrant 1 For information about See How to show the Pre Protocol Showing and hiding tabs and toolbars Editor or Post Protocol Editor tabs in VWorks on page 21 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 33 VWorks User Guide Opening a protocol in VWorks About this topic Use the procedure in this topic to open a protocol that has already been created Procedure To open a protocol 1 Click File and select Protocol File gt Open 2 Navigate to th
237. e tips task defined Before you start Before you start you need to have a VPrep shelf associated with the labware type with which you want to wash Procedure To wash pipette tips 1 If you have defined a liquid class for the liquid you intend to use for washing select it from the Liquid class list box at the bottom of the Task Parameters toolbar 2 Complete the following properties Property Description Wash Volume The volume of liquid to be aspirated and dispensed to each plate well Dispense only Select this if you want to dispense the wash liquid to waste instead of dispensing it back into the reservoir of washing liquid Note The Dispense to waste at height of check box must be selected for this option to be available Enter the amount to dispense in the Wash Volume field Empty tips This option is only available if you select Dispense only Select this if you want to empty the tips regardless of the volume Number of wash cycles The number of aspirate dispense operations Aspirate velocity The rate at which to draw up the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here Aspirate acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be ed
238. e to command the computer to contact the device using the current selected profile To confirm the position of the valve as detected by the software click Query current position and then verify the Current position display To confirm the number of valve positions detected by the software click Query number of positions and then verify the Number of positions display Click OK to exit the dialog box 502 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Configuring the Vici Multiport Valve Adding a device to the device manager Opening Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics Setting Vici Multiport Valve task parameters Creating an Vici Multiport Valve profile See Workflow for configuring a Vici Multiport Valve on page 496 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters on page 499 Creating a Vici Multiport Valve profile on page 497 503 VWorks User Guide WellMate setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Matrix Technologies WellMate is a liquid dispenser that can be integrated into a robotic system using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the WellMate instrument set the WellMate task parameters and use WellMate Diagnostics 504 Chapter 30 WellMate
239. e you start Procedure Alternate procedures This topic explains how to open the labware editor You open the labware editor when you want to Q View existing labware entries or classes Edit labware entries or classes Add new labware entries or classes Delete labware entries or classes DODO Rename labware entries or classes You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to open the labware editor To open the labware editor 1 In VWorks click Diagnostics 4 Diagnostics 2 Inthe Diagnostics pop up window expand the system icon if necessary Click Labware to select it Click Device Diagnostics Device diagnostics X You can also open the labware editor from the device manager and from the protocol editor To open the labware editor from the device manager 1 Click the Device Manager tab 2 Inthe Device List toolbar expand System and double click Labware Device List Ee System s gt BiolO s gt Environment T s gt Liquids 342 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide To open the labware editor from the protocol editor l 2 Click the Protocol Editor tab Select a plate icon gt A labware entry In the Task Parameters toolbar click the Edit labware settings button Task Settings Advanced Settings Plate name Unnamed 3 Plate type Costar 96 pp black Edit labware settings Adding a labware entry Ab
240. ease the priority of it To specify a time interval for when plates are made available to the system select the Release a new plate check box and type in an interval time You can use this feature to avoid a plate processing bottleneck that results in plates having different incubation times Consider a simplified example process in which plates are downstacked labels applied liquid dispensed into and then incubated for 10 minutes Applying the label only takes a few seconds while subsequent tasks take longer This creates a processing bottleneck If the dispense task takes 2 minutes plates that are ready for the pipetting step would have to wait In this example the first plate would incubate for approximately 5 minutes the second plate for approximately 7 minutes the third plate for approximately 9 minutes and so on To avoid these different incubation times you could downstack one plate every 2 minutes The plates are then incubated sequentially and not simultaneously If you want to dynamically assign an upstacking stacker click Add dynamically assigned stacker Note This option is only available for upstacking tasks With dynamic assignment you do not have to specifically assign every stacker that will receive plates because assignments are made automatically When stackers are dynamically assigned the text TBD meaning To Be Determined is added to the stacker task icon Note When using dynamically assigned
241. eating a VSpin with Access2 profile 0 0 0 0 cc eee 155 Setting the VSpin with Access2 device properties 0 00 eee ee 156 Workflow for configuring the VStack 0 00 eee eee 157 Setting the VStack device propertieS 2 0 ees 158 Workflow for configuring Waste 2 0 ee 159 Setting the Waste device propertieS 2 0 cc es 160 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 161 About protocol filesi ee amp c v 4 oP boos es ee ed be Se E See ES 162 Workflow for creating a protocol 2 ee ee 163 Creating a new Protocol vs oran ate eee ee Pe ee bees amp eee 4 164 Setting up a plate ICOM sortia AEO e a es 164 About setting the number of simultaneous plates 0 000 c ee eee 167 Adding a task or pipette task eeuen d eee 168 Setting task Paramete ci ees el Ok eee E eee aie we Rea ie 169 Setting pipette task parameters 1 es 173 Using breakpointS 2 eee 176 Disabling TaSkS reska ieee ee Beetles we eae he ee eae eh el BO Se bes i 178 Compiling protocols 2 ees 179 SAaVINE PrOtOCOlS widened we eS Pe AG Pawn Bee welE Bee ea 180 SIMUMATINE ARa fo hoe Bt teed hoe Gt iis ea Ace ce a Ret hc Wk od RAG cat ead eo aca 181 iii Table of Contents VCode User Guide Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 183 About setting Apply Label task parameters 0 00 eee eee eee 184 Setting Apply Label task parameters 0000 cece
242. ecords measurements made by iSeries StoreX and Weigh Pad devices iSeries measuring units The measuring units displayed in the log file are whatever measuring units are configured on the iSeries device Typically the temperature is recorded in degrees Celsius and the humidity is recorded as a relative humidity percentage Weigh Pad measuring units The Weigh Pad records liquid volumes as percentage of the maximum StoreX measuring units The measuring units recorded by a StoreX device are temperature in degrees Celsius humidity in relative humidity percentage and gas concentrations in percent by volume The image root folder sets the folder in which images from a VersaScan are automatically stored Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 49 VWorks User Guide Setting log options About this topic Available options How messages displayed in the Log toolbar are controlled Setting log options procedure This topic explains how to configure the log options page of the VWorks Options dialog box You may not need to configure these options for every run The following types of log options are available in VWorks U The type of log information to show in the Log toolbar of VWorks Q General settings that pertain to log and data file maintenance Max number of each log file to maintain 10 Create new logs for every run Append timestamps to filenames Q The folders in which to store log and data files Q Checking
243. ect a range of listed plates In the Name text box type the name of the location group From the Labware list box select the type of labware to associate Inventory Management Functions Name Location Group Labware Sar Relay Black TC 3712 Select one of the following options Option Comments Replace any inventoried labware Labware types for all selected items with the labware type selected are replaced with the labware type in above the list box This overwrites labware types already assigned Replace inventoried labware Labware types for all selected items with the labware type selected that do not already have a labware above ONLY if alabware type is entry are replaced with the indicated not already assigned labware type Click Reinventory selected locations A bar code reader reads each plate in the storage device and adds the bar code data to the inventory database Related information For information about Inventory groups plate groups and location groups Moving plates in and out of a storage device Changing the labware associated with plates in the inventory database Inventory editor filters Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 335 VWorks User Guide See About inventory groups on page 311 Q Moving plates into a storage device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices
244. ed in the pipette task through a cascade of associations In the Aspirate pipette task example the association between the type of liquid and the pipette task is made by selecting a liquid class for the pipette task All of the settings from the three data categories are stored in their respective databases and entered through their respective interface Data categories Databases Data interfaces device files device manager device manager plate types labware database labware editor Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 291 VWorks User Guide Data categories Databases Data interfaces liquid classes liquid library liquid library editor When a protocol is saved the names of the three data categories that it uses are saved and associated with it so that you don t have to select them every time During a run these data categories are referenced from the protocol they were associated with Data stored includes 5 e P Devicename W 5 D E Data stored includes 7 a e Device type such as Pipettor reagent e Aspirate Parameters D g shel Dispense parameters e Parent device such as VPrep1 e Equation editor 2 e Robot approach height g e Labware classes allowed to be 5 used on this device 4 To open in the Device List toolbar double click Liquids e Plate type y To open click the Device Manager tab Data stored includes e Plate dimensions e Gripper offsets
245. ed information Option Abort run if stacker runs out of plates Quarantine rotated plates Quarantine incorrect plate types For information about What to do next The workflow that this procedure belongs to Setting allowed plate types for the VStack by specifying notch positions and limits for the optical sensor Designating a stack as a quarantine stack Description If the stacker runs out of plates before the run is finished the run is aborted Aborting a run permanently terminates the run To use this option you need a VStack and a stacker designated as a quarantine stack If the VStack detects a plate that is misoriented by 180 the plate is moved to the quarantine stacker and not processed To use this option you need a VStack and a stacker designated as a quarantine stack If the VStack detects an incorrect plate type for example if the orientation sensor s threshold is exceeded the plate is moved to the quarantine stacker and not processed See Setting pre protocol rules on page 43 Workflow for preparing a run on page 26 Defining stacker properties on page 351 Setting up a plate icon on page 164 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 43 VWorks User Guide Setting pre protocol rules About this topic Pre protocol rules include Reset script context Automatically load stacker racks Related information This topic describes the pre protocol rule
246. edure To open the diagnostics window 1 In VWorks click the Device Manager tab 2 Select the desired device from the Device List Expand the general name of the device if necessary Select the particular device with which you want to communicate Click Device Diagnostics located at the bottom of the Device List toolbar The VWorks Diagnostics dialog box opens Related information For information about Setting up devices Adding a device Creating a profile and setting device properties Opening a device file See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 Loading a device file on page 115 106 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for setting up devices About this topic This topic outlines the procedures you need to follow to set up a device file Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a profile and setting the properties for a device on page 108 Related information For information about See Opening device files Loading a device file on page 115 Chapter 6 Setting up devices 107 VWorks User Guide Adding devices About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to Q Create a new device file if one does not already exist Q Add devices L Save the
247. ee The workflow that this procedure Workflow for installing VWorks on belongs to Installing the DHCP server software from Velocity11 page 82 Installing and starting DHCP server software on page 96 Chapter 5 VWorks installation 93 VWorks User Guide Connecting Ethernet cables About this topic Ways to connect Before you begin Connecting directly This topic describes how to connect the Ethernet cable from the controlling computer to your instrument You can use Ethernet to connect a device to the computer Q Directly Q Through a switch If you are setting up a stand alone device you can use either method If you are setting up a local area network that has other devices on it follow only the directions for using a switch Before starting this procedure and if you are setting up a new network make sure that the IP address of the computer s network card has already been statically assigned To connect your device directly to the computer you need a crossover Ethernet cable which can be obtained from a computer supply retail outlet To connect directly to the computer with Ethernet 1 Connect a crossover Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port of the connections panel 2 Connect the other end of the cable to the Ethernet port of the computer 94 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Connecting through a switch Connecting additional devices Related informatio
248. ee 185 About combining bar code modifiers 0 00 ce es 188 Setting Centrifuge task parameters 2 0 0 cc es 190 Setting Delid Relid task parameters a nn nananana cee es 192 Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters 0 00 cee eee 193 Setting Incubate task parameters saaa 0 0 cc es 195 Setting Inoculate task parameterS earo EE AEE AE S E E a E a 198 Setting Load Unload and Incubate at storage device task parameters 198 Setting Mount Dismount task parameters 0 0 0000 ee es 200 Setting Pierce task parameterS reniei ren year a e aa a es 203 Setting Place Plate task parameters aaae 204 Setting Place Labware task parameters a na aaea es 205 Setting Restack task parameterS aana naaa es 207 Restack taskex ample noir kato Shee eee bed a a e deduce die S daw Sous 208 Setting Seal task parameters 00000 ee 212 Setting User Message task parameters 0 00 ce ees 213 Setting Vacuum task parameters 0 0 es 215 Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters 000 eee eee 216 Setting Waitfor task and Signal task parameters 0200020 000s 217 Specifying task order across PrOCESSES 1 es 218 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 221 Configuring a pipette process example 2 00 00 cee ee ee 222 Adding and configuring a pipette process task 000 cee eee eee 226 Setting Aspirate pipette task parameterS 0 00 e
249. eed to remove and add plates during the run Q Which liquids you need to prepare where they should be placed and in what kinds of reservoir See Printing a protocol on page 57 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 57 VWorks User Guide Printing a protocol About this topic Printing a protocol Related information This topic describes how to print a description of a protocol It may help you to refer to a printout of the protocol steps as you analyze the protocol To set up the printer 1 Navigate to File gt Print Setup 2 Select the printer you want to print to and configure the print dialog box as required To print a protocol 1 Navigate to File gt Print Preview 2 View the preview and if it is satisfactory click Print Note If you try to print a protocol before a network printer driver is installed on the VWorks computer you will receive an error If this happens contact your network administrator for help For information about See What to do next only if you have Testing auxiliary bar code readers on auxiliary bar code readers on your page 58 system The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 58 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Testing auxiliary bar code readers About this topic This topic describes how to test auxiliary bar code readers If a device has an bar code reader you should make sure that it
250. egistry file 579 registry key exporting 373 importing 373 reinventorying storage device 334 Release Protocol Stackers command 78 Relid task defined 192 setting parameters 192 Remp CSP device properties setting 476 profile for creating 474 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 474 Remp CSP task defined 477 renaming a labware entry 345 reporting errors 7 reservoir filling see VPrep Restack task example 208 process overview 208 setting parameters 207 retract distance 236 250 263 Robo Cylinder Translator Robot device properties setting 770 profile for creating 770 robots preventing crashes 34 supported types 77 run aborting 69 adding to the run set manager 66 cleaning up after 78 defined 37 deleting from the run set manager 68 monitoring 77 monitoring progress 77 overview 60 scheduling 65 starting 67 starting from a command line 64 stopping 69 what happens after 63 run set defined 65 filtering 67 opening 68 saving 68 stopping 68 run set file 65 run set manager adding a run to 66 deleting a run from 68 Run Set Manager toolbar 18 S Save All command 107 saving a protocol 180 scheduler behavior options 38 screen message options 75 scripts see JavaScript 270 Seal task defined 212 setting parameters 212 sealed stacking thickness property 349 sealed thickness property 349 sensor intensity property 352 serial connection choosing
251. el task parameters on page 184 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters on page 499 See Setting VPrep pipette task parameters on page 221 Setting Centrifuge task parameters on page 190 Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters on page 216 Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters on page 193 No adjustable settings Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 173 VWorks User Guide For this device or And this task Find parameter devices information here Weigh Pad No tasks Wellmate Dispenser Wellmate Setting WellMate task parameters on page 507 Zeiss Plate Vision Zeiss Setting Zeiss Reader Plate Vision reader task parameters on page 516 Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Pre and post protocol task Setting up a pre or post protocol parameters process on page 268 Setting pipette task parameters About this topic This topic tells you where to find information about parameters for each type of pipette task Pipette device task To set pipette task parameters and parameters list 1 Refer to this table to find the information you need to set the pipette task parameters for the device and tasks you are using For this pipette And this pipette Find parameter d
252. elect the plate you are reading from the Plate list box so Click Single Wavelength Read to start the read 492 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using VWorks User Guide Viewing read results To view the results of a read performed in diagnostics 1 Click the Device Manager tab and then select the Ultramark icon in the Devices List Click Device Diagnostics Click the Results tab The results of the read are displayed in a column row format that corresponds to the plate format Use the scroll bars to see the data that is not displayed Read Results Versions ae Export Long report O ANecocire 4 4 To export the data to a comma delimited text file a Optionally record comments regarding the read by entering them in the notes field and then select the Long report check box b Click Export 5 Inthe Export dialog box navigate to the desired folder enter a name for the file and click Save Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using 493 VWorks User Guide Viewing the version To view the software hardware and firmware versions of the information Ultramark Diagnostics 1 Click the Device Manager tab and then select the Ultramark icon in the Devices List Click Device Diagnostics Click the Versions tab Ultramark Settings Eg Read Results Versions Bus a Target 0 rm SCSI Info Lun 0 m Version Info Firmware Version
253. ense volume Syringe volume Tip clean enabled or disabled Aspirating air gap rate DODO Whether or not to wash For information about See Opening Nanodrop Diagnostics Adding devices on page 107 Configuring the Nanodrop Workflow for configuring the Nanodrop on page 458 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Setting Nanodrop task parameters Setting Nanodrop task parameters on page 462 Creating an Nanodrop profile Creating a Nanodrop profile on page 459 465 VWorks User Guide QFill setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges It describes how to configure the QFill set the QFill task parameters and use QFill Diagnostics 466 Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the QFill About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Qfill in VWorks The QFill dispenses liquids into plate wells and offers the option of vacuum filtration Note If you want to use vacuum filtration your QFill must include the vacuum station option developed by Velocity11 Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a QFill profile on page 467 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting QFill device properties on page 468 Related information For information about Settin
254. ent day a Click in the Date column b Click asecond time in the Date column to make the date editable c Click the drop down arrow to open a calendar and select the date Friday August 06 d If you want all other runs in a run set to be modified in relation to the changed day click Yes in the VWorks dialog box Works Ea 2 j The time of a run has been modified Should all other scheduled run times be altered in relation J Filtering runs Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide 5 Ifyou want to schedule the run for a different time Click in the Time column b Click again in the Time column to make the time editable c Click the group of hours minutes or seconds to edit d Inthe following example the minutes group is selected Th ated shy Pr zuu PM D10 DM e Click the up or down arrows to change the value or type the new value in the field 6 Inthe Runs column enter a number of cycles that you want the protocol to run 7 Ifyou are using a plug in that Velocity11 has written or that you have created using the VHooks interface click twice in the Plugin column and navigate to plug in file If you have a long list of runs in a run set you can apply a filter to display a subset of the runs To filter displayed runs 1 Right click a cell in the Run Set Manager toolbar that you would like to keep in the displayed selection 2 Select Filter by row from the menu that ap
255. ep as a device Workflow for configuring the VPrep on page 148 Restacking example Restack task example on page 208 Restack task example About this topic This topic uses an example to explain how the Restack task works Example To understand the concept of a Restack task it is best to view it in the context of a protocol Consider the following simple restacking protocol as an example The overall flow of events in the protocol in which individual steps do not necessarily correspond to individual protocol tasks is as follows 1 The plates are in a stack Stacker 1 ready for the run Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader VPrep 2 The plates are downstacked and moved to a VPrep where a reagent is added to initiate the incubation The restack task begins when the plates are then moved to an empty rack Stacker 2 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 209 VWorks User Guide Stacker 1 Stacker 2 Stacker 3 Reader VPrep When the first plate enters the empty stackey the incubation time parameter that you specify starts timing However the actual incubation started when the initiating reagent was added The time between the actual incubation start and the time at which the incubation time parameter starts depends on the scheduling and operation speed of the robot so it may not be exact from one plate to another The remaining plates are moved to the receiving stacker The last plate
256. er source AC Field Description Battery level Charge in the battery as a percentage of its capacity An alarm sounds if the power source switches to battery The lab automation system shuts down if the battery power drops below a defined threshold Power load Power drawn from the UPS asa percentage of its capacity Internal temperature Temperature of the battery For UPS temperature specifications see the supplied user documents Power source Battery indicates that the BioCel is running off the battery AC indicates that the BioCel is not using the battery 4 Click the close box and then click OK to close the dialog boxes 74 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Locating plates in the system About this topic have the list ordered in two ways This topic explains how to create lists of plates on your system You can Q The Find Plates command lists by plate name Q The Query Devices lists by device name Finding plates During a run you can find out where all of the plates in the system are To find plates 1 Select Tools gt Find Plates 2 Examine the log toolbar Each plate in the system is listed along with the device at which it is located Querying devices During a run you can find out what plates are currently at each device To query devices 1 Select Tools gt Query Devices 2 Examine the log toolbar Each device in the system is listed along with t
257. erGuide_ lt publication_date gt pdf Computer requirements To open the user guide in PDF format you need an Acrobat viewer You can either use the viewer that is built into Adobe Acrobat or you can download the free Adobe Reader application from http www adobe com support downloads main html We provide user guides in PDF format mainly for printing additional copies You can use them for simple searches from the Find button although these searches are much slower than online help searches For more information about using PDF documents see the Adobe Acrobat PDF help system that can be accessed from your Acrobat viewer Chapter 1 Introduction Supported software versions About this topic VWorks version Device drivers VWorks User Guide This topic lists the versions of the VWorks software and device drivers that are documented in this guide This guide documents VWorks3 file version 20 x This guide documents the following device drivers Device driver Version Aliquot Device 2 3 BioTekWasherDevice 3 0 deviceenumerator dll 5 0 Echo550Device 2 5 EnvisionDevice 1 1 FlexispenseDevice 2 1 FlexispenseNewDevice 3 0 MultidropDevice 3 2 MultiskanAscentDevice 2 0 NanodropDevice 1 1 OriginalVCodeDevice 3 2 PipettorShakeShelfDevice 2 3 PlateLocDevice 6 2 PlatePierceDevice 4 1 QFillDevice 3 0 RempCSPDevice 2 1 Related information For information about Device drivers that are plug ins Device drive
258. erator setup tasks for a protocol to run successfully Errors have many causes including poor protocol writing incorrect operator setup variation in plates hardware failure and software failure It is important to understand that error handling is a normal part of operating a lab automation system and that when errors occur it does not necessarily mean that your lab automation system has malfunctioned Sending a bug report About this topic Requirements Sending a bug report This topic describes how to send a bug report to Velocityl1 through VWorks Before you can send a bug report Q The system s computer must be connected to a network with internet access Q The outgoing email server must be set up on the system s computer by a VWorks or network administrator A bug report is an email that you create and send from within VWorks The email is sent directly to Velocity11 To send a bug report 1 Select Help gt Report a Bug The Email Bug Report dialog box opens Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting 519 VWorks User Guide Email Bug Report Eg Enter the text of the bug report here Email address Yelocity11 should send a reply to Attach log files Attachments ep 2 Type a description of the error in the text box In your description provide a summary of the error and in the case of a software bug a description of how we can reproduce it 3 Attach the following files which can
259. erface About this topic This topic introduces the pages toolbars and menus that make up the VWorks user interface UI About the VWorks UI The VWorks UI is made up of tabbed pages toolbars and a menu bar Tabs Each of the tabbed pages is described briefly here Progress Pre Protocol Editor Protocol Editor Pipette Process Editor PastProtocol Editor Device Manager Progress page The Progress page contains a progress bar that you use to monitor the overall progress of the run Avecociryi Protocol Progress Elapsed protocol time 0 20 31 sec Plates left to process 516 Tasks defined in protocol 4140 Tasks remaining 4014 3 04 Pre Protocol Editor page The Pre Protocol Editor page also known as the pre protocol editor is used to create pre protocol processes Pre protocols are processes that are carried out once before the protocol is executed Typically these processes contain Q Pipette tasks For example a pre protocol can be set to prime a pump with fluid before any runs begin L Place labware tasks For example to define the labware allowed with a particular device for the current set of runs Q User Messages For example prompts to empty liquid waste containers and to refill liquid source containers 14 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Toolbars Protocol Editor page The Protocol Editor page also known as the protocol editor is used to create pr
260. error message is triggered as soon as the alarm condition is met A second critical alarm is triggered after this time interval For example if the temperature High Alarm is 40 C and the Alarm Timer is 5 min and a measurement is recorded at 40 C the critical alarm is triggered five minutes after remaining above 40 C Related information For information about Sending email when errors occur Monitoring environmental conditions during a run The log file to which measurements are recorded iSeries environmental control StoreX environmental control Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 55 VWorks User Guide See Setting general errorhandling options on page 38 Monitoring a run on page 71 About log and data files on page 46 BioCel User Guide The operating manual for your StoreX incubator Using start finish protocol scripts About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to use the Start Finish Scripts page of the Protocol Options dialog box to set JavaScripts to run before or after all protocols A start script runs before any pre protocol processes A finish script runs after any post protocol processes To set a script to run before or after protocols 1 2 tab Select Tools gt Protocol Options In the Protocol Options dialog box click the Start Finish Scripts To enter a script to run before the protocol type the script into the Start Script text
261. es the workflow for configuring the Teleshake The Teleshake is a plate shaker that can be integrated into a lab automation system that is controlled by VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the Teleshake device properties on page 481 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Teleshake task parameters Setting Teleshake task parameters on page 482 Using Teleshake Diagnostics Using Teleshake Diagnostics on page 483 Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the Teleshake device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to set the Teleshake Device Properties The Device Properties provides VWorks with information about the Teleshake s current configuration The Device Properties settings are stored in the device file Before you can set the Device Properties you need to add the Teleshake device to the device manager IMPORTANT There are two types of Teleshake devices Standard and Hi speed Make sure that you added the correct device to the device manager To set the Teleshake device properties l Open the Device Properties page x Device Properties E General List System Bg ig Be
262. eters toolbar either Select the empty stackers that you want to use for the task and click Add Click Add dynamically assigned stacker With this option the scheduler automatically assigns stackers during a run and there must be at least two stackers available for this operation 3 Inthe Store up to text box type a number equal to the number of plates you intend to incubate This value is important because it can affect the timing of the incubation For example if the time taken to move all plates to the first restack stacker is greater than the time specified for the incubation the first plate cannot be moved to the next task in time This problem can be resolved by lowering the number of plates in a restack operation and adding more stackers 4 Inthe Incubate plate for text box type the time interval between when a plate enters the first restack stacker and leaves the second restack stacker IMPORTANT When you start a run that includes a Restack task you must type in a number that is equal to the total number of plates you want to restack in the Number of Runs dialog box 208 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Downstacking and upstacking task Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters parameters on page 193 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Configuring a VPr
263. ette task as required For more information about See Creating a pipette process Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Creating protocol basics Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting pipette task parameters Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 235 VWorks User Guide Setting Dispense pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Dispense task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep instrument Dispense pipette A Dispense pipette task is used with a VPrep to dispense liquid into a task defined plate Dispense value You cannot dispense more volume than you aspirated limits If you enter a total dispense volume that is greater than the total aspirate volume you will get an error message when you compile the protocol More specifically the Aspirate Volume Pre Aspirate Volume Post Aspirate Volume must be greater than or equal to the Dispense Volume Blowout Volume Post Dispense Volume Before you start Before you can set the Dispense pipette task parameters you need to associate a VPrep shelf with the labware type from which you will aspirate Procedure To set Dispense pipette task parameters 1 Inthe pipette process window click the Dispense pipette task icon 2 Ifyou have defined a liquid class for the liquid you intend to dispense select it from the Liquid class li
264. ette task Note These values are applied to all Aspirate and Dispense tasks that occur within the Fill Plate pipette task The Volume and Well selection fields are not available because this information was entered in step 2 of the wizard 10 If the mixing option in step 1 of the Fill Plate Wizard was selected click Next to go to step 4 of the FIll Plate Wizard and specify mix properties 244 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Fill Plate Wizard Eg Step 4 Specify common mix parameters Set the common mix parameters E Mix properties Volume UL Pre aspirate volume UL Last cycle blowout volume uL Mixing cycles Distance From well bottom mm Retract distance mm yL Enable tip touch Liquid class Z axis aspirate velocity mm s Z axis aspirate accleration mm s Z axis dispense velocity mm s Z axis dispense acceleration mm s i Cancel a Enter the desired values for the Mix task that will take place during the Fill Plate pipette task Note The Well selection field is not available because this information was entered in step 2 of the wizard The following table describes how a Mix task would be executed when associated with three different types of transfer in which fluid aspirated from a single column of the source is dispensed into five columns of the destination 1 N transfer Volumes Resulting Mix tasks Max volume 50 uL A single Mix task after the Dispense tas
265. evice Adding devices on page 107 Opening lid hotel Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Creating a profile for the lid hotel Creating a lid hotel profile on page 127 The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Using the lid hotel tasks Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 132 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the PlateLoc About this topic The PlateLoc is an instrument that seals plates using heat This topic describes how to set up the PlateLoc in VWorks For more information about the PlateLoc see the PlateLoc User Guide Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a PlateLoc profile on page 133 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the PlateLoc device properties on page 135 Related information For information about Setting up a device Using the PlateLoc task Using the PlateLoc Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Seal task parameters on page 212 PlateLoc User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 133 VWorks User Guide Creating a PlateLoc profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the PlateLoc in VWorks Before you start Before you start to create a profile you must add the PlateL
266. evice task information here All pipettor devices Loop Setting Loop pipette task parameters on page 248 Change Instance Setting Change Instance pipette task parameters on page 230 174 VWorks User Guide Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics For this pipette device Beckman Multimek Pipettor VPrep Precision Pipetting Station And this pipette Find parameter task information here Aspirate Multimek Device Driver User Aspirate Simple Guide Multimek Deliver Tip Tray Multimek Dispense Multimek Empty Tips Multimek Empty Tips Simple Multimek Mix Multimek Move to Plate Frame Multimek Move X Y Axes Multimek Move Z Axis Absolute Multimek Move Z Axis Relative Multimek Remove Tip Tray Multimek Remove Tip Tray Multimek Run Macro Multimek Aspirate Setting Aspirate pipette task parameters on page 228 Change Tips Setting Change Tips pipette task parameters on page 232 Dispense Setting Dispense pipette task parameters on page 235 Fill Plate Setting Fill Plate pipette task parameters on page 239 Mix Setting Mix pipette task parameters on page 249 Related information Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 175 VWorks User Guide For this pipette And this pipette Find parameter device task information here VPrep Precision Pump Reagent Setting Pump Pipetting Station
267. f the percentage of available hard disk space is less than the percentage specified in the text box 5 Inthe Scheduler Error Behavior group box select one of the following options Option When selected in the event of an error Process as many platesas As many tasks as possible given the error possible are completed Related information Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Option When selected in the event of an error Continue processing Tasks involving plates that are currently in without starting any new the system continue Other tasks are not plates scheduled Stop scheduler The scheduler stops scheduling new tasks even if plates are currently available to the robot The current task continues to completion 6 Click OK to close the VWorks Options dialog box For information about Setting errorhandling for protocols What to do next The workflow that this procedure belongs to See Setting protocol options on page 41 Notification of errors by email on page 40 Workflow for preparing a run on page 26 39 40 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Notification of errors by email About this topic Notification of errors by email About notification of errors by pager Related information This topic describes how to add an email address to VWorks so you can be noti
268. f x may need to be greater than one To dispense into all wells make sure that the Entire plate option is selected To only dispense into some of the wells a Select the Selected columns option b Click Clear All c Inthe number matrix click the numbers corresponding to the columns to which you want to dispense In the following example liquid will be dispensed into columns 2 4 6 and 8 of a 384 well plate Related information Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using 445 VWorks User Guide Entire plate Specific columns Select All 1 Clear All 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 9 Click Dispense Performing non dispense operations You can perform basic non dispense operations using the buttons in the Multidrop Commands group box To purge the liquid line 1 Enter a value in the Times to purge text box and click Purge If you want to return all liquid the value of x may need to be greater than one To prime the liquid lines 1 Enter a value in the Prime volume text box and click Prime To shake a plate 1 Enter a value in the Shake time text box and click Shake For information about See Configuring the Multidrop Workflow for configuring the Multidrop on page 438 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Opening Multidrop Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting Multidrop
269. f you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor Property task heightAboveWaste task inFlowPercent task liquidClass task outFlowPercent task preAspirateAirGap task quadrants Data type Float Integer String Integer Float An array of pairs of integers Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 287 Task parameters Dispense to waste at height of text box Inflow pump Liquid class list box Outflow pump Pre aspirate volume Quadrants diagram VWorks User Guide Comments The height in millimeters above the MicroWash chimneys at which the tips will dispense Used in combination with the dispense to waste property Enter a negative number to ensure that the tips are below the tops for the chimneys The relative rate of liquid flow into the MicroWash tray manifold This value should be high enough for the washing liquid to just bubble over the tops of the chimneys The name of the liquid class The relative rate of liquid flow out of the MicroWash tray manifold This value is typically zero because the fluid is drained by gravity The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid A quadrant is an evenly spaced array of locations that is addressable by the tips on a pipette head A 96 well head can dispense into a 96 well plate four quadrants of a 384 well plate and 16 quadrant
270. fied by email when there is a run error To set up error notification 1 Click Tools and select Options Click the Email Setup tab In the Error Notifications group box click Add Click to select the New email address text OV ye Gob Click once more to make the text editable The text is editable when a box appears around it Error Notifications Recipient list for error notifications Mail Server Setup SMTP server name MainServer abc wigit com Server requires authentication User name abe Password Remove 6 Type in your full email address 7 To remove an email recipient click to select the email address from the recipient list and then click Remove 8 Click OK to save and close the dialog box For timely error notification consider subscribing to a service that can page you when error notification emails arrive For information about See Setting up the outgoing mail server Setting up email on page 374 What to do next Setting protocol options on page 41 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 Setting protocol options Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 41 VWorks User Guide About this topic There are five groups of protocol options Only the error handling options are described in this topic Refer to the table below to find where the other protocol options are documented Protocol Option Error Handlin
271. field For information about The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Setting Ultramark task parameters Using Ultramark Diagnostics See Setting up the Ultramark plate reader data file on page 488 Workflow for configuring the Ultramark on page 486 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Using Ultramark Diagnostics on page 491 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using 491 VWorks User Guide Using Ultramark Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to use Ultramark Diagnostics to Q Read a plate Q Examine and export results Q View the current connection settings and software versions Reading a plate with To read a plate using Ultramark Diagnostics diagnostics 1 Open the Ultramark Settings dialog box Ultramark Settings xi Read Results Versions gt Read Parameters p Reader Control r Status Filter Mix Speed Open Door z Mix Time Sec Reading al 0 i TT 0x7 g AQecocirens Click Open Door Place your plate in the Ultramark device Click Close Door Select the filter you want to read with from the Filter list box If you want to mix select the speed from the Mix Speed list box WS oh ee es If you are mixing set the mix time using the up down increment arrows next to the Mix Time Sec field ge S
272. fiers with text in a single field This modifiers section shows how to do this by using an example The example has five fields and for each field the symbology or font used has been defined as follows in the VCode Format field VWorks field Symbology Font valid for pre 2003 VCodes Field 0 Field 1 Swiss Mono 721 Bold Field 1 Field 2 Code 39 Field 2 Field 3 Dutch Roman 801 prop Field 3 Field 4 Dutch Roman 801 prop Field 4 Field 5 Dutch Roman 801 prop In the screenshot below you can see that three of the VWorks fields are used Field 2 Field 3 and Field 4 The bar code log file Format to use 2 Number of fields 3 Field 1 Field 2 DATE INC Field 3 DATE INC Field 4 My name Field 5 Field 6 Increment chars 3 Starting increment 1 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Field 2 prints a Code 39 symbology bar code that is incremented for each printing Field 3 prints the same bar code in the human readable Dutch Roman font The text entered into Field 3 is the same as that entered into Field 2 The information entered in Field 3 combined with the information entered into the Increment chars and Starting increment fields creates the following human readable bar code sequence Date001 Date002 Date003 Date004 Date005 Date006 Date007 Information about the bar codes that are applied during a run is saved in a bar code log file Because this is a tab
273. figuring Echo 550 devices on page 398 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics on page 408 Setting Echo 550 task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Echo 550 task parameters in VWorks It uses an example to explain how to set up a VWorks protocol for an Echo 550 transfer The VWorks protocol requires that an Echo 550 protocol has already been created For information about setting up an Echo 550 protocol see the Echo 550 user documents Echo 550 task Echo 550 tasks can be used to defined Q Transfer a plate to the Echo 550 and initiate an Echo 550 protocol In the Protocol Tasks list this task is labeled Echo 550 Q Query a plate for volume determination and save the information In the Protocol Tasks list this task icon is labeled Echo 550 Audit Transfer task Before you start Procedure Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 405 VWorks User Guide Pairs of Echo 550 tasks are used to move plates to an Echo 550 compound reformatter and initiate an Echo 550 protocol The Echo 550 protocol uses an acoustic wave to transfer a droplet of liquid from one plate to another To perform a droplet transfer with an Echo 550 you need to set up two processes in a single protocol One process is for t
274. following options for the uninterruptible power supply Option Use UPS on COM Use additional UPS on COM Halt scheduler when battery level drops below Power down system when battery level falls below critical power level Additionally power down this remote system UPS diags UPS2 diags When selected Identifies the communications port to which the UPS serial cable is connected If more than one UPS is connected it identifies the port for the primary UPS You should not need to change this number Identifies the communications port to which a secondary UPS serial cable is connected You should not need to change this number The scheduler stops scheduling tasks when the battery power falls below the percentage specified in the text box If your BioCel has two UPSs the value in this text box should be half of the value you would use with a single UPS For example if you want the scheduler to stop when the battery power drops below 80 of the total available power type 40 into this text box When the battery power falls below the level specified in this text box the BioCel and computer are powered down Allows a remote computer such as that used by a plate reader to be shut down in the event of a power outage Enter the network name or the IP address of the computer that you want shut down Provides information about the primary UPS including the source of power UPS temperatur
275. forming an accuracy calibration on page 366 The liquid library editor About the liquid library editor on page 362 Performing an accuracy calibration About this topic Do you need to calibrate your pipettor This topic describes how to improve the accuracy of VPrep pipetted volumes by Q Calibrating the pipettor Q Plotting the actual volume dispensed as a function of the set volume set to dispense Q Calculating the polynomial coefficients of the plot U Entering the coefficients into the liquid library equation editor Pipetting accuracy is the ability to dispense an absolute volume of liquid In practice the volume that is actually dispensed by a pipettor may be different from the dispense volume that you select This difference is the absolute error In some protocols as long as you dispense an excess of liquid the actual volume pipetted is not important In other protocols pipetting accuracy can be acritical factor You must remember though that every step of an experiment has error and there is no point taking the time to improve the accuracy of pipetting to four significant figures if another step in your protocol has error at the third significant figure If you are sure that the overall error of the experiment is limited by pipetting accuracy and error at this number of significant figures makes a practical difference to your interpretation of the data consider performing an accuracy calibration Me
276. future The run set manager allows you to set a new start time for one run and automatically reset the start times of the other runs by the same time increment IMPORTANT The runs that are scheduled in the past will not start automatically To open a run set 1 Select File gt Runset File gt Open 2 Inthe Open browser box navigate to and select the run set file that you want to open 3 Click Open Change the scheduled date and time following step 1 and step 5 in Adding a run on page 66 The procedure for stopping a run set is the same as the procedure for stopping any run For more information see Pausing and stopping a run on page 69 Chapter 4 Performing a run 69 VWorks User Guide Pausing and stopping a run About this topic About stopping a run set Ways to stop a run Before continuing with a stopped run Stopping a run using VWorks This topic describes the different methods of pausing and stopping a run and how the effect is different depending on the method you choose Pausing or stopping a run set is the same as pausing or stopping a run You can stop a run by Q Clicking Pause in VWorks and then aborting the run Q Pushing an emergency stop button Runs stopped this way cannot be continued Before continuing with a run that was stopped make sure that the system is in a valid state for the point of the protocol at which the run stopped In other words make sure that
277. g 107 Device List toolbar 18 Device Manager page 14 device manager relationship with other configura tions 290 devices defined 702 initialization errors 527 profile for creating about 708 properties setting generic 112 properties setting about 708 querying 74 DHCP server defined 96 initialization file 87 installing 96 stopping and starting 97 DHCP Server Kit 96 diagnostics finding procedures for using 119 finding the version number 6 opening 705 disabling tasks 178 DiscoveredBioNet Devices dialog box 98 dispense acceleration 236 250 263 dispense limits 235 Dispense pipette task adding 225 defined 235 JavaScript properties 280 setting parameters 235 dispense velocity 235 250 262 dispense volume 235 dispensing to waste 262 263 disposable tip length property 355 distance from well bottom 236 Downstack task defined 193 setting parameters 193 Dry Tips pipette task defined 238 setting parameters 238 E Echo 550 destination stage device properties setting 403 device properties setting 400 diagnostics using 408 profile for creating 399 source stage device properties setting 402 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 398 Echo 550 audit task setting parameters 407 Echo 550 task defined 404 setting parameters 405 Edit menu 79 email notification of errors by 40 374 setting up 374 when errors occur 38 emergency stop button 69 70 enabling
278. g Device File Description Notes Pre protocol rules Protocols rules See This topic Loading a device file on page 115 Compiling protocols on page 179 Setting pre protocol rules on page 43 Setting protocol rules on page 44 Setting protocol To set protocol error handling options error handling 1 Click Tools and select Protocol Options options 2 Inthe Error Handling group box select any or all of the following options Option Description Attempt to put plates away if deadlock occurs Use VCode to correct for plates that are downstacked 180 degrees Allow processing of incorrect plate types If a deadlock occurs any lids are replaced and the plates are moved to the positions they would be in at the end of a successful protocol run To use this option you need a VStack a VCode and a password If you want to use this option contact Velocity1 1 Service Center If the VStack detects a plate that is mis oriented by 180 the VCode will be used to reorient the plate DAMAGE HAZARD Care less use of this option can cause a robot crash To use this option you need a VStack and a password If you want to use this option contact Velocity11 Service Center If the VStack detects an incorrect plate type the plate is still processed DAMAGE HAZARD Care less use of this option can cause a robot crash 42 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Relat
279. g a labware entry before defining it What to do next See Opening the labware editor on page 341 Adding a labware entry on page 342 Defining plate properties on page 348 348 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Defining plate properties About this topic This topic describes the parameters used to define a plate or other piece of labware in the Plate Properties sub page of the labware editor Defining plate To define plate properties properties 1 Click the Plate Properties sub page tab of the labware editor 2 Enter the values for the available parameters according to the type of plate or labware you are defining The parameters on the Plate Properties sub page are described in the following screenshot and table Note Only the parameters associated with the Base Class you selected in the General Properties group box will be available Plate Dimensions and Gripper Offsets Plate Handling 3 00000 Robot gripper offset mm Lower plate at Code 30 00000 Thickness mm O Can mount 28 40000 Stacking thickness mm O Can be mounted Can be sealed O Maximum Robot Handling Speed Sealed thickness mm O Slow Medium Fast Sealed stacking thickness mm Can have lid Lidded thickness mm Lidded stacking thickness mm Lid gripper offset mm Lid resting height mm Lid departure height mm Miscella
280. g the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting the Echo 550 device properties on page 400 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting the Echo 550 source stage device properties on page 402 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting the Echo 550 destination stage device properties on See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics on page 408 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 399 VWorks User Guide Creating an Echo 550 profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Echo 550 in VWorks Before you start Before you can create a profile for the Echo 550 you need to add the Labcyte Echo 550 Echo 550 source stage and Echo 550 destination stage to the device manager Procedure To create an Echo 550 profile 1 Open Echo 550 Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab Echo550 Diagnostics Eg Diagnostics Profiles Profile Control ___ pParameters localhost Host Address aati Rename Save settings In the Profile Control group box click Create In the New Profile dialog box enter a name for the profile and click OK Note The name of the Host Address should be the IP address of the Echo 550 computer 5 The name appears in the Profile Control
281. g the labware editor Opening the labware editor on page 341 Defining general properties Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 347 VWorks User Guide About this topic After adding a labware entry you need to define the general properties of the labware The general properties describe the type of labware that is being entered into the database and are visible on all of the sub pages of the labware editor This topic describes how to enter these general properties that define the labware Before you start You must have a Technician or Administrator user account to perform this procedure You must have added a labware entry that you want to define Procedure To define the general properties of a piece of labware 1 Open the labware editor 2 Inthe Description text box type in a description of the labware if desired 3 For your reference in the Manufacturer part number text box enter the part number for the labware 4 Inthe Number of wells list box select the number of wells in the plate 5 Inthe Base Class group box select one of the options The option you select determines which labware editor properties are available For example when a base class of Microplate is selected the Length of filter tip pin tool mm property is unavailable Miscellaneous Length of filter 0 00000 tip pin tool mm Related information For information about Opening the labware editor Creatin
282. g up devices Setting QFill task parameters Using QFill Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting QFill task parameters on page 469 Using QFill Diagnostics on page 470 Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using 467 VWorks User Guide Creating a QFill profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile that identifies the QFill on the lab automation network Before you start Before you can identify the QFill you need to add the device to the device manager Procedure To create a QFill profile 1 Open QFill Diagnostics QFill Diagnostics xi m Yolume Setup OK 1 OFill Number Enter QFill Volume in pL here Cancel 2 Update Volume 1 4 Comm Port r Filling Test Create New GFill Success Start A 3 il Delete GFill ie Filtration Port Installed Manifold 2 If this is the only QFill on the system the QFill Number should display 1 3 Ifyou are adding an additional QFill click Create New QFill The QFill Number increments to 2 4 Using the up down arrows select the Comm Port that the QFill is using to communicate with the computer running VWorks Related information For information about See Opening QFill Diagnostics Opening diagnostics software on page 105 The next step Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the QFil
283. ge 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Incubating plates Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Using bar code input files Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Creating a location group About this topic This topic describes how to create a location group which is a list of plates that can be moved to or out of particular slots in a plate storage device Who should read Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX this incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before you start Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 314 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Procedure To create a location group l 2 3 4 Add a Load task to a protocol and select it In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the Locations tab Click Edit location groups to open the inventory editor Click Create new and enter a name for the group Inventory Editor Please enter a new name Location group x Lee Click OK Select a group of available slots Available Slots Ee a PlateHub 3 PlateHub 5 PlateHub 6 PlateHub 7 EEE ela ih You can use CTRL click or SHIFT click to select more than one slot Drag the group into the Location Members list Available Slots cas 1 PlateHub 1 Kk 1 PlateHub 2 Bae
284. ge 491 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the Ultramark device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to set the Ultramark device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Ultramark s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file Before you can set the device properties you need to add the Ultramark device to the device manager To set the Ultramark s device properties l Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the generic device properties List x Device Properties Hef System E General W Teleshake High speed 1536 Device name Ultramark Teleshake Standard Device type Ultramark B s Ultramark Approach height mm 9 a Uiltramark Allowed prohibited labware E A Velocity11 Robot E Teachpoints my Robot Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes Teachpoint for robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No New device Device has west side BCR No Delete device Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No Ultramark properties 3 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 487 488 Chapter 28 Ultramark sett VWorks User Guide Related information ing up and using For inform
285. ger Opening Nanodrop device Adding devices on page 107 properties page Setting generic device properties Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting Nanodrop task parameters Setting Nanodrop task parameters on page 462 Using Nanodrop Diagnostics Using Nanodrop Diagnostics on page 463 462 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting Nanodrop task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Nanodrop task parameters in VWorks software NanoDrop task The NanoDrop task moves a plate to a NanoDrop liquid dispenser and defined runs a pre defined program using a calibration file for more accurate dispensing Procedure To set NanoDrop task parameters 1 Add the NanoDrop task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar select the following from the list boxes a The program to run b The calibration file to use c The Nanodrop to use if your VWorks has more than one The name of the Nanodrop is defined in the device manager Task Settings Advanced Settings Select program to run TestQRMFile qrm r Select calibration file to use TestCalibration cal bs Select Nanodrop to use Nanodrop1 Related information For information about See Configuring the Nanodrop Workflow for configuring the Nanodrop on page 458 Adding a device to the device Adding devices o
286. gether For example if the protocol starts with tips already on the VPrep the first Change Tips pipette task would remove the tips and the second Change Tips pipette task would install new tips Change Tips pipette tasks are always used as part of a whole process created for the sole purpose of changing tips an example of which is described in this topic Before you start you need to configure a shelf on the VPrep to use tip boxes and have ready a tip box containing tips with the tip box lid removed and placed in a robot accessible position Also if you are removing tips first you will need an empty tip box on the tip box shelf of the VPrep that you intend to use for the operation Changing tips with a VPrep requires you to create the following processes 1 Inthe protocol editor create a process for the tip box such as in the following example emene Box called VStack 2 Example Process If your tip box has a lid you will need to check the Plates have lids check box in the plate icon and add Delid Relid tasks to remove the lid before the pipette process 2 Inthe pipette process editor create a pipette process to change tips such as in the following simple example j E H b Pipette Process 1 Tips On Tips Off on VPREP1 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 233 VWorks User Guide Creating the process Before you can add a Change Tips pipette task you must create a for the tip box process for
287. groups Name Number of plates Location group 8 Drag the group into the Unload from list Unload From Name Number of plates Location group 8 Location Click Start In the Number of Cycles dialog box enter a number that equals the number of plates you want to remove from the storage device Click OK Confirm that the plates are no longer in the inventory a Click the Load task b Click Edit location groups to open the inventory editor c Click the Inventory Management tab Emptying a storage device manually Related information Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 323 VWorks User Guide To empty a storage device manually cassettes of plates are physically removed from the storage device and a run is simulated to remove the matching list of plates from the inventory To remove plates manually 1 Physically remove the cassettes of plates from the storage device 2 Follow step 1 to step 5 in the procedure above for emptying a storage device robotically 3 Make sure that the Enable plate tracking in simulation mode check box is selected Click Simulation is off to turn on the simulator Click Start In the Number of Cycles dialog box enter a number that equals the number of plates you want to remove from the storage device Click OK 8 Confirm that the plates are no longer in the inventory a Click the Load task b Click Edit location groups to open the inventory editor c Click the Inve
288. h a fixed volume of diluent If you are using an 8 or 16 channel head this would require a large number of transfer motions to fill the dilution wells with diluent With the Fill Plate pipette task you are able to Q Aspirate a large volume from one source such as a reservoir and dispense small volumes into multiple columns or quadrants of wells Q Aspirate a small volume from multiple columns or quadrants of wells and dispense a large volume into one destination such as waste Q Wash or change tips between transfers Before you start make sure you have the following ready Q Source plate Q Destination plate Q Microwash reservoir if using Q Tip box if using An example of a Fill Plate pipette task used with a Serial Dilution task is shown g n Nua t H gt gt gt gt gt gt 4 H Process 1 on Fill Plate Afrom Aspirate 10 00 yL Dispense 10 00 pL Serial dilute Plate Aspirate 10 00 yL Dispense 10 00 pL vprep Diluent Reservoir from into Plate Ain A from Plate Ain into Waste Coumpound Source column 1 column 24 Reservoir in in column 1 column 1 A 96 well serial dilution plate Plate A enters the pipette process as an empty plate 1 Columns 2 12 are filled with a specified amount of diluent by the Fill Plate pipette task 2 The compound source is taken from a reservoir and dispensed into column 1 of Plate A 3 A Serial Dilution task is performed on Plate A 240 Chapter 10 Set
289. h side Set O Incoming plates have bar codes on west side Bar Codes NOT in file v O Incoming plates have bar codes on north side Bar Codes NOT i 1 Te O Incoming plates have bar codes on east side Bar Codes NOT in file af Q Specify each field of a bar code that is printed on a plate Field 1 FILE 294 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Viewing a bar code file in VWorks How they are created Bar code input files are typically generated by a LIMS system although you can create them manually File structure Bar code input files contain lists of bar code fields or parts of fields that are grouped together in series In the following example there are two series Q Setl L Set2 P BarcodeInputFile bar Notepad Sal EG File Edit Format View Help lt name gt setl Each series could be used to label a different side of the same plate or label plates during different runs You can view the bar code file that is currently associated with VWorks as follows To view the associated bar code input file 1 Select Tools gt Show Bar Code File This opens a view of the bar code data file Updating a bar code input file Related information Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide C Wworks Workspace B arCodeD ata Files B arCodeFile1 bar Click a tab to show a different series of data To close the window cl
290. hapter 25 QFill setting up and using VWorks User Guide 473 VWorks User Guide Remp CSP setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Remp CSP is a plate sealer than can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Remp CSP and Remp CSP task parameters 474 Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Remp CSP About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Remp CSP in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a Remp CSP profile on page 474 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 mB w N Setting the Remp CSP device properties on page 476 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Remp CSP task parameters Setting Remp CSP task parameters on page 477 Creating a Remp CSP profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Remp CSP in VWorks Before you start Before you can create a profile you must first 1 Create a device in the Remp CSP software Refer to the Remp CSP user manual for a procedure Unlike other devices this process creates a VWorks profile with the same name Add the Remp CSP to the Device Manager Select th
291. he handling of general error options Procedure To set general error handling options 1 Click Tools and select Options 2 Click the Error Handling tab of the VWorks Options dialog box 3 Inthe Error Reporting group box select the devices for which you want to report errors Typically all of the devices are selected for a run If you want to perform a test run without plates clear the options for devices used in the protocol that would otherwise report errors 4 Select from the following options in the Error Handling group box Option When checked Send Email when errors occur The people listed in the Email Setup tab of the VWorks Options dialog box will receive an email for every error notification Halt on barcode misreads The robot will halt the run if it encounters a bar code misread Halt on barcode database The robot will halt the run if the bar lookup errors code found in the database does not match the plate bar code Launch program if error A program that you specify is occuls launched You must specify the program by clicking the ellipsis button and browsing to the program s executable With the appropriate script this function can be used to send a page or an email If you want to pass the text of the error message to the program select the Add error text as command line argument check box Halt if available disk space falls The robot completes the currently below scheduled step and then stops i
292. he labware editor on page 341 344 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Deleting a labware entry About this topic Before you start Procedure Related information This topic describes how to delete a labware entry If there is a labware entry that you no longer need you can delete it Make sure that the entry you are deleting is not referenced in protocols IMPORTANT If you delete a labware entry that is already referenced in protocols the link between the protocol and the labware data will be broken and the protocol will not run You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to perform this procedure To delete a labware entry 1 Open the labware editor 2 Inthe labware selection box on the left of the window select the labware entry to be deleted Click Delete labware entry In the V11Labware dialog box click Yes to delete the entry For information about See Opening the labware editor Opening the labware editor on page 341 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 345 VWorks User Guide Renaming a labware entry About this topic This topic describes how to change the name of a labware definition Before you start Make sure that the entry you are renaming is not already referenced in protocols IMPORTANT If you rename a labware entry that is already referenced in protocols the link between the protocol and the labware data w
293. he liquid in this column 100 Concentration 0 100 8 Select the column or quadrant of the plate that contains the starting concentration Note Only one column or quadrant may be selected If you selected the I know the volume parameters of the plate in step 1 then enter the values in the fields for the Volume and Concentration 9 Click Next to go to step 3 of the Serial Dilution Wizard and enter information about the dilution wells Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 257 VWorks User Guide Serial Dilution Wizard Plate Plate A Step 3 Specify the range of columns that will be used Select the columns that will be diluted 23 selections columns 2 24 What is the volume of diluent that each well in these columns begin with 100 Diluent volume 0 120 pL 10 Specify the columns or quadrants of wells that will be used in the dilution Note The dilution will take place from left to right so only columns located to the right of the starting column and quadrants in 1 2 3 4 order are available Not all columns or quadrants must be selected If you selected I know the volume parameters of the plate in step 1 of the wizard then enter the volume in each well in the Diluent volume field 11 Click Next to go to step 4 of the Serial Dilution Wizard and enter or view information about the transfers if applicable 258 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide
294. he plate that is currently at that device 4 1 27 04 2 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 27 04 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM 1 59 39 09 PM Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Info Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Scheduler Querying devices Biotek Washer is available to process plates Delid is available to process plates Hotel 1 is available to process plates Hotel 10 is available to process plates Hotel 11 is available to process plates Hotel 12 is available to process plates Hotel 13 is available to process plates Hotel 14 is available to process plates Hotel 15 is available to process plates Hotel 16 is available to process plates Hotel 17 is available to process plates Hotel 18 is available to process plates Chapter 4 Performing a run 75 VWorks User Guide Working with the Log toolbar About this topic Log toolbar Log toolbar options This topic describes Q The six tabs on the Log toolbar Q How to search for text in the Log toolbar Q How to add time stamped notes and delimiters to the Log toolbar Q Clear the Log too
295. he port for the device with which you want to communicate This is the Bio I O port used to communicate with the optional AliQuot filtration unit If you have more than one AliQuot using filtration you will need to select the number that corresponds to the filtration unit with which you want to communicate Procedure Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide To choose the attributes for the profile l In the Options group box select the communications port on the computer that the AliQuot is connected to from the COM port list box If required in the Timeout field enter a different time that you want the computer to wait for a response from the AliQuot indicating that the fill operation is complete The default value is 60 seconds If you want vacuum filtration a On the Control page select Enable filtration The Filtration tab appears Control Filtration Aliquot Setting _ r Part Filtration delay LEN 0 6000 ms a Filtration port Port 1 X Filtration time 0 60 second P Start Filtration when fill starts Post filtration delay 0 6000 ms g O After fill completes In the Start Filtration group box select When fill starts to start the filtration at the same time that the dispense begins or After fill completes to start the filtration when the dispense is finished If you want a delay between the ti
296. he required number of tip changes and the number of possible tip changes is displayed at the top of the dialog box a Select the column or quadrant where the first tips off will occur b Select the columns or quadrants where the pipette head will load tips on Note The execution of tip changing is similar to that of tip washing 13 Click Finish The Pipette Task Parameters toolbar displays the properties of the first step in the Fill Plate pipette task Arrows at the bottom of the toolbar are enabled Use these to scroll through each step of the Fill Plate pipette task Executing the Fill Plate pipette task Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Pipette Task Parameters Task Settings advanced Settings Select from available source plates Diluent Reservoir he Select from available destination plates Plate A hd Select From available wash plates Shelf At Select From available tip boxes Tip Shelf Ne E Aspirate step 1 of 113 Plate name Diluent Reservoir Volume uL 100 Pre aspirate volume UL 0 Post aspirate volume uL 0 well selection 1 selection column 1 Distance from well bottom rr 1 Retract distance mm uL 0 Liquid class lt None gt Z axis aspirate velocity mmj 90 Z axis aspirate accleration n 75 Record in transfer log Yes VWorks treats the Fill Plate pipette task as a series of Aspirate Dispense and Change or
297. he source plate and the other is for the destination plate An example protocol is shown below in which first process is for the source plate 384 polypro F called Source gt 4 amp Plates e 384 polypro called Downstack from Echo550 tranfser Source Plates stackeri process 1 384 polypro called Destination Plates 384 polypro called Downstack from EchoS50 tranfser Destination Plates stacker2 process 1 Before you start you must have created a protocol in the software that runs the Echo 550 For information about setting up an Echo 550 protocol see the Echo 550 user documents To perform an Echo 550 transfer 1 Set up the VWorks protocol with processes similar to those shown in the previous section 2 Configure the Echo 550 task for the source plate Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Type of Transfer Standard Chery pick Transfer Parameters Use process label Process 1 EchoS50 device echo550 Echo550 protocol Echo550 labware Echo550 cherry pick file Source or destination O Perform a fast survey a Select the Source option b Select Standard as the Type of Transfer 406 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide If the protocol will be performing more than one transfer select the name of the transfer in the Use process label list box Process 1 is the name of the default transfer If
298. he task also allows you to retain task parameters that may be more complex such as for an Apply Label task that would be erased if you deleted the task To disable a task Right click the task that you want to disable Select Disable task from the menu that appears A red circle and strike line appears on the icon to indicate that it is a disabled task This means that the task will be ignored when the protocol is run Delic Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 179 VWorks User Guide Enabling tasks You can enable tasks individually or you can enable all tasks at once To enable a task 1 Right click the task icon which is disabled 2 Select Enable task from the menu that appears To enable all tasks in a protocol 1 Do one of the following Select Tools gt Enable All Tasks Right click any task icon and select Enable all tasks Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next Compiling protocols on page 179 Compiling protocols About this topic This topic describes how to compile a protocol Compiling a protocol To compile a protocol 1 Click Compile Compile 0 Errors are reported in the Log toolbar Note Whenever you start a protocol VWorks automatically compiles it and checks for errors Related information For information about See The workflow that this
299. his topic describes how to do that Before you start Before you can check the IP address of a computer the computer s network card must have been manually assigned an address Procedure To check the IP address of a computer s network card 1 On the computer whose IP address you want to check in Windows navigate to Start gt Programs or All Programs gt Accessories gt Command Prompt A Command Prompt window opens 2 Type ipconfig and press ENTER One IP address for every network card in your computer is shown Related information For information about See Ethernet networks About Ethernet networking on page 86 The workflow that this procedure Workflows for Ethernet networking on belongs to page 89 96 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Installing and starting DHCP server software About this topic What is a DHCP server Installation procedure Follow the procedure in this topic if you are using the DHCP server software provided by Velocity11 to set up your Ethernet local area network with dynamic IP addressing Make sure that you have already connected your device to the computer You can choose to use DHCP server software from another source if you prefer A DHCP server is a software program that dynamically assigns IP addresses to devices in a local area network when they are turned on Once installed the server runs as a service that starts automatically when you
300. iSpense M see Flexispense M automatically release stacker racks after protocol finishes protocol rule 45 auxiliary bar code readers see bar code readers B bar code data file 296 errors 523 field modifiers 788 format files 184 input file 293 inventory manager 306 labelling requirements 184 log file 189 misread errors 38 522 printer 292 tracking 306 updating input file 295 viewing input file 294 code errors mismatch 523 no read 522 code input file 298 creating plate group 329 bar code log file 48 bar code properties setting for devices 112 bar code readers 292 testing auxiliary 58 barcodelog txt 48 Beckman Multimek see Multimek BioRad Ultramark see Ultramark Bio Tek device properties setting 390 diagnostics using 393 supported instrument 77 workflow for configuring 390 Bio Tek ELx405 Washer see Bio Tek Bio Tek Washer task defined 392 setting parameters 392 blowout volume 236 250 263 breakpoints 176 c calibration accuracy 366 can be mounted property 350 Can be sealed property 349 bar bar 528 Index VWorks User Guide Can have lid property 349 can mount property 350 cassette defined 306 Cavro pump device properties setting 108 profile for creating 708 setting parameters 170 supported instrument 12 Centrifuge task defined 790 setting parameters 190 Change Instance pipette task defined 230 setting parameters 231 Change Tips pipette task def
301. ication Notepad because with Notepad you can open the file during a run as the file is being written Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 47 VWorks User Guide Protocol log file The protocol log file records all available event and error information The information recorded in the protocol log file cannot be modified During a run you can type notes that are added to this log file Pipettor transfer log The pipettor transfer log file is a tab delimited text file that records VPrep file pipetting information on a lab automation system that has a VPrep Note This log is not the same as the log generated by the VPrep Part of a pipettor transfer log file opened in Notepad is shown in the following diagram 33 12 53 56 60 PM vPrep 1 96 channels Qlsource 1 Master agod4 No bar cod 1 code ode No bar code 57 22 03 12 54 04 71 PM Intermediatea 1 IntaAlOl Intaool No bar No bar code t N J 3 12 54 12 78 PM vPrep 1 96 channels QlSource 1 MasterAooo4 No bar code No bar code N 1 57 22703 12 54 20 60 PM IntermediateB 1 IntB101 IntBOO1 No bar code No bar code Hi 1 N o N 3 12 54 27 40 PM vPrep 1 96 channels Qlsource 1 Master 40004 No bar code No bar code 1 5 22 03 12 54 40 76 PM Qlsource 1 Master Agoo4 No bar code No bar code No bar c 6 7 OK 33 12 54 27 40 PM vPrep 1 96 channels Qlsource 1 Master agoo4 No bar code No bar code 1 57 22 03 12 54 49 03 PM Intermediatec 1 Intc1l01 IntcoOO1 No bar code No bar
302. ice Unassigned plates do not appear in linker groups so cannot be used You may have many plates stored in the database To simplify your view of the database you can filter the records that are displayed To filter the plate records 1 Right click on a list in any of the tabbed pages of the inventory editor and select Show all 2 Right click on a particular cell and select from the available filtering options View Description Use last filter Returns the display of items to that displayed when the last filter was applied Filter by row The items that have the same value as the selected item in the row are displayed 332 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Related information View Description Filter by column The items that have the same value as the selected item in the column are displayed The items that have the same value as the selected item in the row are displayed Location Members device cassette slot platehub2 1 1 platehub2 1 2 platehub2 1 3 platehub2 1 ii PlateHub 1 1 PlateHub 1 2 PlateHub 1 3 PlateHub 1 4 PlateHub 1 gt PlateHub 1 6 PlateHub 1 Z PlateHub 1 8 PlateHub 2 can PlateHub Select all Unselect all Invert selection Show all Use last filter Filter by row device PlateHub Filter by column gt ee slot 2 The result is that only those plates in cassette number 2 are listed X ocation Members device
303. ick the close box If you change a bar code input file while a protocol is running you must reload the file for the change to be registered To reload a bar code input file 1 Select Tools gt Reload Bar Code File The bar code input file is reloaded For information about See Input text files Setting general options on page 34 Bar code reading and printing general information About bar code reading and tracking on page 292 Bar code data files Using bar code data files on page 296 295 296 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Using bar code data files About this topic Who should read this Bar code data files This topic describes how to create and use bar code data files in collaboration with bar code input files Technicians and administrators who write protocols with Apply Label VCode tasks File format and location Bar code data files are tab delimited text files with the name filename dat They are stored in a location specified in the general VWorks options How they work A bar code data file acts as a lookup table that specifies what bar code fields to print on other sides of a plate The typical sequence of events is as follows 1 A plate with a south side bar code is downstacked into the system 2 The robot picks up the plate reads the bar code and verifies it against a bar code input file
304. id library editor and cannot be edited here The rate of increase in velocity before the Dispense Velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel The distance that the tips should move upwards or downwards per unit volume of liquid being dispensed or aspirated This value allows the tips to move upwards or downwards during dispensing or aspirating to maintain a certain height below or above the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you use The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid and before mixing begins The volume of air to blow out when the tips are in the liquid once the mixing is complete This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume If the VPrep head has fewer tips than the plate has wells select a quadrant configuration from the Quadrant s diagram to indicate in which well quadrant of the plate you want to mix To select a quadrant click a representative well Two possible examples are shown below Quadrant s 2000 10000 2000 1ee0o0 Quadrant s 9000 ecoeo
305. iew menu The commands on the View menu are used to toggle display of the status bar and the various toolbars Tools menu The commands on the Tools menu have a variety of uses in VWorks and are documented as needed in this guide Help menu The commands on the Help menu are used to Q Show the versions of VWorks and the various devices supported Q Email a bug report to Velocity11 20 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Starting VWorks Showing and hiding toolbars and tabs Log toolbar Protocol Task toolbar and the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Pipette Tasks toolbar and Pipette Task Parameters toolbar VPrep Pipette Tasks toolbar and Pipette Task Parameters toolbar Multimek Pre Post Protocol toolbar and Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Device List toolbar Run Set Manager toolbar See Starting VWorks on page 27 Showing and hiding tabs and toolbars in VWorks on page 21 Working with the Log toolbar on page 75 Creating a protocol basics on page 161 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters on page 221 Device Driver User Guide Creating a protocol advanced topics on page 267 U Setting up devices on page 101 Q Setting liquid handling definitions on page 361 U Setting labware definitions on page 337 Working with the run set manager on page 66
306. ight does not rise to cause an overflow Outflow pump Typically set to 100 4 Run the process For more information about Creating a liquid class Associating a VPrep shelf with labware Configuring a pipette process See Creating a liquid class on page 364 Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 265 266 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 267 VWorks User Guide Creating a protocol advanced topics This chapter is for people with Technician or Administrator privileges It provides the background information necessary to set up certain tasks Before reading this chapter you should be familiar with the concepts presented in the following chapters Q Creating a protocol basics on page 161 Q Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices on page 183 Q Setting VPrep pipette task parameters on page 221 Note The chapter is not a tutorial on writing protocols it provides the basic reference information you need to write protocols 268 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Setting up a pre or post protocol process About this topic When to use Procedure This topic describes how to set up a pre or post protocol process Pre protocols are p
307. igned groups locations list To set the Load task parameters Add the Load task to a protocol process In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar drag the groups or locations you want to load into from the Available groups locations list to the Assigned groups locations list To set the incubate at storage device task parameters 1 Add the Incubate at plate storage device task to a protocol process Note The Incubate at plate storage device task cannot be the last task in a process In the Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the devices that you don t want to use for the incubation from the Available devices list and click Exclude The devices that you exclude appear in the Devices that will be excluded from this task list Enter the length of time to incubate in the Length of incubation sec field 200 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices For information about Configuring a Liconic StoreX Configuring a PlateHub Setting up plates in the inventory editor Moving plates to and from storage devices Using the inventory editor See Device Driver User Guide Device Driver User Guide Q About inventory groups on page 311 Creating a location group on page 313 Creating a plate group on page 316 Moving plates into a storage device on page 318 Moving stored pl
308. ile in XML format In XML the elements indicate the protocol s properties and text within the markup tags gives the properties values Most users create and edit protocols in the protocol editor Advanced users have the option of creating and editing protocols directly in XML The XML files can also be useful for troubleshooting because you can for example see which device file is associated with the protocol XML example A protocol file viewed in an XML editor that colorcodes text is shown below lt xml version 1 0 encoding 4SCII gt lt Velocity11 file Protocol_Data mdSsum 751 d03b4f669f58547085c6da8dd1 706 version 1 0 gt Device_File File_Name C Documents and Settings mevans Desktop marks dev gt Description Description V gt Process Multiplier 1 Processes_To_Spawn 1 Tip_Box_Process 0 gt lt Bar_Code_File_Into gt south Bar_Code_File gt west Bar_Code_File north Bar_Code_Fil seast Bar_Code_File lt Bar_Code_File_Into gt Plate Has_Lid 0 Labwrare Costar 96 well plate Name Plate 1 Sealed 0 gt Bar_Code_Into gt south Bar_Code_File No bar code Has_Bar_Code 1 gt west Bar_Code_File No bar code Has_Bar_Code 0 gt north Bar_Code_File No bar code Has_Bar_Code 0 gt seast Bar_Code_File No bar code Has_Bar_Code 0 gt Bar_Code_Into gt lt Plate gt lt Tasks gt lt Task0 Description Downstack from stacker2 Device Enable_Timed_Release 0 Icon
309. ill be broken and the protocol will not run You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to perform this procedure Procedure To rename a labware entry 1 Open the labware editor 2 Inthe labware selection box on the left of the window select the labware entry to be renamed Click Rename labware entry In the V11Labware dialog box click OK to confirm that you want to rename this entry 5 Inthe Rename Labware Entry dialog box enter the new name for the plate and click OK Related information For information about See Opening the labware editor Opening the labware editor on page 341 346 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Copying a labware entry About this topic Before you start Procedure Related information To save time when creating a new entry that is similar to an existing one you can copy an existing labware entry This topic describes how to copy a labware entry You must have an Administrator or Technician user account to perform this procedure To copy a labware entry 1 Open the labware editor 2 Inthe labware selection box on the left of the window select a labware entry Click Save changes as In the Save Labware Entry As dialog box type a name for the new entry that is different from the selected one and click OK The copied entry appears in the labware selection box For information about See Openin
310. including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a par ticular purpose Agilent shall not be liable for errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing use or perfor mance of this document or of any information contained herein Should Agilent and the user have a separate written agreement with warranty terms covering the material in this document that conflict with these terms the warranty terms in the sep arate agreement shall control Technology Licenses The hardware and or software described in this document are furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of such license Restricted Rights Legend If software is for use in the performance of a U S Government prime contract or sub contract Software is delivered and licensed as Commercial computer soft ware as defined in DFAR 252 227 7014 June 1995 or as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 June 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause Use duplication or disclosure of Software is subject to Agilent Technologies standard commercial license terms and non DOD Departments and Agencies of the U S Gov ernment will receive no greater than Restricted Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 19 c 1 2 June 1987 U S Government users will receive no g
311. ined 232 requirements for 232 using 232 changing passwords 28 pipette tips 232 check orientation property 353 chimney see MicroWash tray class labware editor 338 clearing Log toolbar 77 closing VWorks 79 compilation errors 520 compilation warnings 520 compiling a protocol 179 computer disk space option 38 requirements 82 computer connection options 85 configuration settings 290 configuring Velocity11 devices 118 Control toolbar 14 controlling computer see computer copying a labware entry 346 creating process for a tipbox 233 crossover cable 93 Cytomat 378 manually loading plates 320 manually unloading plates 323 moving between 324 robotically unloading plates 327 with inventory manager 306 D database backup 309 connection 309 copying 372 inventory management 306 Labware 264 labware 237 251 281 284 288 372 liquid library 372 reinventorying 334 reinventorying connection checking 524 setting up 309 SQL 306 synchronizing 308 deadlock 167 default user account password for 28 defining general properties for labware 347 labware classes 357 plate properties 348 deleting user accounts 377 Delid Station device properties setting 121 workflow for configuring 720 Delid task defined 192 setting parameters 192 delimiters adding to Log toolbar 77 device drivers versions supported by this guide 5 device file 22 23 519 adding devices to 107 loading 115 savin
312. ing the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties on page 515 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Zeiss task parameters Setting Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameters on page 516 Chapter 31 Zeiss setting up and using 515 VWorks User Guide Setting the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the Zeiss Plate Vision reader s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the Zeiss Plate Vision reader generic device properties Works C Program Files Common Files System Mapi 1033 NT Aug30 dey File Edit Yiew Tools Help i kal Hl A E a 72 Y oou Compile o Start JJ Pause simuetion is on Progress Pre Protocol Editor Protocol Editor Pipette Process Editor Post Protocol Editor Device Manager x Device Properties Eg System E General s gt Delid Station vacuum Device name ZeissReader E t Human Robot Device type Zeiss Plates Vision Reader E Lid Hotel Approach height mm Es Lid Hotel Storage Bay Allowed prohibited labware ay Velocity11 Robot E Teachpoints B a Ze
313. ings Plugin lt no plugin gt z Simultaneous 1 plates O Plates have lids O Plates enter the system sealed O Use single instance of plate Bar code control Special error handling Incoming plates have bar codes on south Bar Codes NOT in file he O Incoming plates have bar codes on west si Bar Codes NOT in file r O Incoming plates have bar codes on north s Bar Codes NOT in file Z O Incoming plates have bar codes on east si Bar Codes NOT in file nf 4 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar a b Type a name for the plate in the Plate name text box In the Plate type list box select the type of plate you want to use If you want to add or modify a plate definition click Edit labware settings to open the labware editor If you are using a plug in select it from the Plug in list box If the plug in is not available for selection it is because the file_name dll file is not in the plug ins folder in the same folder as the VWorks executable In the Simultaneous plates text box type the maximum number of plates of this type that the system is allowed to operate on at any given time If the plates entering the system have lids select the Plates have lids check box Note This option is only available if the plate you selected is capable of using a lid as defined in the labware editor If the sample plates in the protocol have seals when they are loaded onto
314. inishes Related information Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 45 VWorks User Guide Default setting The default setting for the Handle plates in instance order is for it not to be selected When to select the rule Use this rule if you need the plates to be handled in the order in which they enter the system Explanation Consider a situation in which you are using the BioCel to seal plates using two PlateLocs and the first one runs out of seal stopping on plate 5 If this option is not selected the second sealer would continue sealing and upstacking plates but plate 5 would be omitted and thus out of order If this option was selected the second sealer would stop until you reloaded a new roll of seal and started the first sealer again and plate 5 was upstacked to its position in order Default setting The default setting for the Automatically release stacker racks after protocol finishes setting is for it not to be checked When to select the rule You would want to use this rule if you have one or more VStacks and you want all them to release their racks at the end of the protocol For information about See What to do next Setting log options on page 49 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 46 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide About log and data files About this topic Types of log and data files About opening log fi
315. ion The Relid task replaces the lid Neither the Delid nor Relid tasks have configurable parameters The Delid Relid tasks are used to remove and replace a plate lid A typical use for this task is shown below gt gt 4 384 PE Optiplate Downstack from Delid Black w Packard eryert Lid 6007270 called unnamed 1 ZT W r Pipette process 1 Relid Upstack to test In the example a plate is downstacked and the lid is removed The plate is pipetted at the VPrep and the lid is replaced If your system has a trash chute and you want to remove a plate s lid and put the lid in the trash use the Delid task and do not add a subsequent Relid task Setting Delid Relid task parameters There are no task parameters for these processes Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 193 VWorks User Guide For information about See Configuring the Delid Station asa Workflow for configuring the delid device station on page 120 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Configuring a platepad as a device Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Setting Downstack and Upstack task parameters About this topic Stacker task defined Procedure This topic describes how to set the Downstack and Upstack task parameters The Downstack and Upstack tasks move plates into or out of Velocity11 VStacks or PerkinElmer PlateStaks
316. irate select it from the Liquid class list box at the bottom of the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar 3 Complete the following fields Field Description Aspirate volume The volume of liquid to be drawn up into each pipette tip Aspirate velocity The rate at which to draw up liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here Aspirate acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the maximum aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here Distance from well bottom The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel 4 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 229 VWorks User Guide Field Description Tip retract distance The distance that the tips should move downwards per unit volume of liquid being aspirated This value allows the tips to move downwards during aspiration to maintain a certain height below the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you use You might want this value to be the same as the Tip Retract Distance for the Dispense pipette task Pre aspira
317. is selected Height above the lid resting height at which to grip the lid Shown as b below Height above the bottom of the plate at which the bottom of a plate lid rests Shown as a below 350 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Property Lid departure height Lower plate at VCode Can mount Can be mounted Maximum robot handling speed Length of filter tip pin tool Related information Description Height above the bottom of the plate to which the lid is lifted 7 Select if the plate has a thick skirt and must be lowered when on the stage of the VCode This allows the VCode to place the label above the thick skirt O Select if the plate can be placed on top of another plate This property is for filter plates that are placed on top of waste plates during filtration steps of a protocol Select if another plate can be placed on top of this plate This property is for waste plates that collect filtrate from filter plates during the filtration steps of a protocol Many different plates may be able to fit under any one type of filter plate IMPORTANT The wells of the waste plate must have a large enough diameter that the filter plate does not stick on the waste plate The robot must be able to pick up the filter plate without the waste plate
318. ision Profile list and click Open profile To manually load and unload plates l Open Envision Diagnostics Click the Control tab if it is not displayed In the Current Envision Profile group box select the profile you want to use Click Open profile Click Load plate or Unload plate The plate is loaded into the Envision or unloaded from the Envision Note Envision protocols are created on the Envision s own computer After creation the name of the protocol appears in the Envision Functions list box of the diagnostics software 418 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information To run an Envision protocol 1 2 3 Click the Control tab want to use Click Open profile Open Envision Diagnostics In the Current Envision Profile group box select the profile you From the Envision Functions list box select the protocol that you want to run Click Run protocol If there is a plate on the plate stage the plate is loaded The protocol runs For information about Configuring the Envision Adding a device to the device manager Opening Envision Diagnostics Setting Envision task parameters Creating an Envision profile See Workflow for configuring the Envision on page 412 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting Envision task parameters on page 416 Creating an Envision p
319. iss Plate Vision Reader Device is accessible From robot Human robot a ZeissReader Device is accessible from robot Robot Teachpoint for robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR Device has north side BCR Delete device Device has east side BCR a B Zeiss Plate ision Reader properties Output number Device diagnostics Sensor input number For Help press F1 I Num A Expand the Zeiss Plate Vision Reader properties group Choose the Zeiss Plate Vision reader properties a Double click in the field next to Output and enter the number of the output port on the Bio I O control which opens the door on the enclosure to allow a robot access b Double click in the field next to Sensor input number and enter the number of the input port on the Bio I O control which monitors the open close state of the door 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 516 Chapter 31 Zeiss setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening Zeiss reader device properties Adding a device to the device manager Setting Zeiss reader task parameters See Workflow for configuring a Zeiss Plate Vision reader on page 514 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Zeiss Plate Vision reader task parameters on p
320. ited here Dispense velocity The rate at which to dispense the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here 3 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Property Description Dispense acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the dispense velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here Distance from well bottom The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the MicroWash tray chimneys Retract Distance The distance that the tips should move upwards or downwards per unit volume of liquid being dispensed or aspirated This value allows the tips to move upwards or downwards during dispensing or aspirating to maintain a certain height below or above the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error Pre aspirate volume The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid and before mixing begins Last cycle blowout volume The volume of air to blow out when the tips are in the liquid once the mixing is complete This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume If the VPrep head has fewer tips than the plate has wells select a quadrant configuration f
321. ith VWorkS 00002 ee ee ee 11 Overview of the VWorks user interface 2 0 00 ees 13 Showing and hiding tabs and toolbars in VWorkS 000 cee ee ees 21 Relationships of configuration VWorks componentS 00000 eee ee eee 22 Chapter 3 Preparing for arun 25 Workflow for preparing AUN reao se Ena aa aE ees 26 Starting VWorkS r ea ea 0 ees 27 Logging in to VWorks and changing your password 0 0000 eee eee eee 28 About tasks processes and protocolS 00 cee ee ee ee 29 Opening a protocol in VWorkS 2 0 ees 33 Setting general OptionS 2 ees 34 About setting error handling options assa aaa e es 37 Setting general error handling options a saaa aaaea es 38 Notification of errors by email 0 00 ee ee 40 Setting protocol pio aiee v0 cece eee eae Se ee Sc ee ce oe ce ee 41 Setting pre protocol r le Se sraa Ea Ea oa EEO ees 43 Setting protocol ruleS a e aE a a E E a aE E S E ees 44 About log and data Tes Lui saree hd Mev era e OE Era EE D be ees Re eee ee A 46 Setting IOS OPtiONS es EDERE ee Aen een ea a a oe 49 Importing a log file to Excel 2 2 anap ee es 51 Adding an alarm 20 ee 53 Using start finish protocol ScriptS 2 er En DEE ER Da eee 55 Understanding the protocol 0 E A a A AEE ees 56 PRINTINS PKOLOCOls e a occ Slob Blow Shek wo edie eo ee a E elo Re ede we ew 57 Testing auxiliary bar code readers 0
322. itions 2 10 4 Select the Profile Options a From the COM port list select the port that the Vici Multiport Valve uses to connect with the computer running VWorks software b Inthe Number of positions field enter the number of positions you are using on the multiport valve 5 Click Update this profile and then click OK to close the dialog box 498 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See The next step Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring a Vici belongs to Multiport Valve on page 496 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Setting Vici Multiport Valve task Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters parameters on page 499 Using Vici Multiport Valve Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics Diagnostics on page 500 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the Vici Multiport Valve device properties The device properties provide VWorks with additional information about the Vici Multiport Valve s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the Vici Multiport Valve s device properties l 2 Open the Device Properties page
323. iverse interconnected networks I Show icon in notification area when connected OK Cancel 4 Select Use the Following IP address and enter the IP address and the subnet mask If you are using the DHCP server software provided by Velocity11 set the IP address to 192 168 0 1 and the subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 This manually configures the IP address of the card Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties 20x General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically IP address Subnet mask Default gateway Use the following IP address 192 168 0 1 255 255 255 0 Preferred DNS server Alternate DNS server Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 5 Click OK 6 Close the Network Connections window About setting You also need to set the IP addresses for the devices on the network devices This may require connecting to the devices with a serial cable and using IP addresses HyperTerminal to change the IP addresses in the devices firmware Details about how to do this should be provided by the manufacturer of the device Related information For information about S
324. ize all devices PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer propertit PlateLoc Profile Expand the PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer properties group If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about Opening PlateLoc s Diagnostics Adding a device Saving the device file The workflow this topic belongs to Creating a PlateLoc profile Using the PlateLoc task Using PlateLoc Diagnostics See Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the PlateLoc on page 132 Creating a PlateLoc profile on page 133 Setting Seal task parameters on page 212 PlateLoc User Guide 136 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the platepad About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring a platepad in VWorks A platepad is a solid surface designed to hold a single microplate There are three types of Velocity11 platepads which are described in the table below Platepad type Function description Standard Pad that holds a microplate Vacuum Pad that holds a microplate and at the same time applies a vacuum to the bottom of the plate to keep the plate flat for operations perf
325. k The Mix task will mix each of T fer 10 uL H the five columns Max volume 10 uL Five Mix tasks will be interleaved Transfer 10 uL with the five Aspirate and Dispense tasks Max volume 10 uL Five Mix tasks will be interleaved with the 25 Aspirate and Dispense tasks After each destination column has received 50 uL that column will be mixed Transfer 50 uL 11 If the tip washing option in step 1 of the Fill Plate Wizard was selected click Next to go to step 5 of the Fill Plate Wizard and specify wash properties Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Fill Plate Wizard Ea Step 5 Specify wash parameters Select the wells to wash in For plate Shelf 1 selection column 1 Set the common wash parameters E Wash Tips properties Dispense to waste Dispense only Volume uL Pre aspirate volume UL Last cycle blowout volume uL Wash cycles Distance from well bottom rm Retract distance mm pL Inflow pump 0 100 Outflow pump 0 100 Dispense to waste at height of mm Enable tip touch Tip touch rise height mm Tip touch horizontal offset mm Liquid class lt None gt Z axis aspirate velocity mm s 90 Z axis aspirate accleration mm s a Select one column or quadrant from the wash plate in which to wash and enter the desired wash parameters The following table describes how a Wash task would be executed when associated with three different
326. k setting up and using 489 VWorks User Guide Reader output file C UltramarkData MyD ataFile dat 7 Click OK Related information For information about See The workflow this procedure Workflow for configuring the belongs to Ultramark on page 486 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Setting Ultramark task parameters Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Using Ultramark Diagnostics Using Ultramark Diagnostics on page 491 Setting Ultramark task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Ultramark task parameters in VWorks Ultramark task The Ultramark task moves a plate to the Ultramark device where a defined reading is initiated Procedure To set the Ultramark task parameters 1 Click the Ultramark task icon in the Protocol Tasks list and drag it to the desired place in the protocol process window Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings Filter Mix speed Mix time sec ial 2 Ifyou have multiple filters in your Ultramark select the one you want to use from the Filter list box 490 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information 3 Select the speed used to mix the plate if desired from the Mix list box If you have chosen a mix speed choose the mix time in seconds for the plate using the up down increment arrows next to the Mix time sec
327. k Settings advanced Settings Length of incubation sec 10 O Start timer when previous plate finishes incubating Available devices Devices that will be excluded from this task Platepad3 The name of the platepad moves to the lower box In the following example a plate is downstacked moved to an incubator and then upstacked gt fl ft Coming 384 Black Downstack from Incubate for 10 Upstack TC 3712 called vstack sec vstack test plate For information about See Configuring a platepad as a device Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using a StoreX device for Device Driver User Guide incubating Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Pipette tasks Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 197 198 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting Inoculate task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Inoculate task parameters Inoculate task The Inoculate task performs a transfer of material from a source plate to defined a destination plate using a pin tool Procedure The Inoculate task was developed for the transfer of DNA from a source plate to a destination plate If you need to perform this task for this or another application please contact the Velocity11 Service Center for a pro
328. k parameters 000 eee ee ee 392 Using Bio Tek DiagnostiCS uuaa aaae ee 393 Chapter 18 Echo 550 setting up and using 397 Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices 000 cee eee ees 398 Creating an Echo 550 profile irop e a es 399 Setting the Echo 550 device properties 0 000 cee ee 400 Setting the Echo 550 source stage device properties 000000 402 Setting the Echo 550 destination stage device properties 403 Setting Echo 550 task parameters 0 0 00 cc ees 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics 2 0 0 cc ee eee 408 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using 411 Workflow for configuring the Envision 2 saaa aaa 412 Creating an Envision profile a na aaa aaa ee eee 413 Setting the Envision device properties 20 0 0 eee 415 Setting Envision task parameters 000 ce eee 416 Using Envision DiagnosticS r Peep aa ees 417 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using 419 Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense 0 0 0 aaa ee ee 420 Setting the FlexiSpense device properties 0 00 eee es 421 Setting Flexispense task parameterS 20 0 0 ees 422 Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics 0 000 eee ees 424 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using 427 Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M 0000 eee 428 Table of Contents VCode User Guide Creating a FlexiSpense M profile
329. ks User Guide Workflow for configuring the VPrep About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the VPrep in VWorks The VPrep is an automated pipetting station that can be used as a stand alone instrument or configured to function within a lab automation system using VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a VPrep profile on page 149 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the VPrep device properties on page 150 Related information For information about See Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 VPrep tasks Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Using VPrep Diagnostics VPrep User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 149 VWorks User Guide Creating a VPrep profile About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to create a profile for the VPrep Before you can create a profile you need to add the VPrep to the device manager To create a VPrep profile 1 Inthe VPrep Diagnostics dialog box click the Pipettor Setup tab Pipettor Setup Pipettor Profile Prep Profile had Delete profile COM port COM1 Head Type 8 Channel Dependent Se Switch head Check type on initialize Head type tolerance AD counts jo 2 Click Add new profil
330. l Using breakpoints on page 176 Optional Disabling tasks on page 178 Compiling protocols on page 179 SS OPN S Simulating a run on page 181 164 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Creating a new protocol About this topic If you have a protocol file open and you want to create a new protocol follow this procedure If you do not have a protocol file in VWorks you can skip this procedure Procedure To create a new protocol 1 Click File and select Protocol File gt New Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next About setting the number of simultaneous plates on page 167 Setting up a plate icon About this topic This topic describes setting up a plate icon This is the first step in creating a protocol process Procedure To set up a plate icon 1 Click the Protocol Editor tab This page is referred to as the protocol editor 2 Click Add Click button to add a new plate A plate icon appears in the protocol editor window 3 If the Task Parameters toolbar is not showing select View gt Toolbars gt Protocol Task Parameters Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Paramete a Task Settings advanced Settings Plate name Unnamed 3 Plate type Costar 96 pp black h Edit labware sett
331. l from the list box Related information For information about See The FileReader plug in About the FileReader plug in on page 298 How to set up the FileReader plug Using the FileReader plug in in a in protocol on page 301 Using the FileReader plug in in a protocol About this topic The FileReader plug in is installed and registered during the standard VWorks installation You should see the FileReader dll file in your VWorks Workspace bin plugins folder This topic describes how to modify the task parameters in the protocol so that the Apply Label task uses the FileReader plug in Who should read Technicians and administrators who write protocols with Apply Label this VCode tasks and who want the FileReader plug in to read and process the label text Setting up the Create a protocol and then modify the plate icon and Apply Label task protocol parameters as described here To set up the protocol to use the File Reader plug in 1 Select a plug in to use a Click the plate icon in the Protocol Editor b Select FileReader dll from the Plugin list box of the Protocol Task Parameters group box If the FileReaderdll is not available for selection it is because the FileReader dll file is missing from the plug ins folder 302 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Plate name Unnamed 1 Plate type C
332. l on belongs to page 466 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Setting QFill task parameters Setting QFill task parameters on page 469 Using QFill Diagnostics Using QFill Diagnostics on page 470 468 Chapter 25 QFill setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting QFill device properties About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the QFill s device properties The device properties provide VWorks with additional information about the QFill s current configuration The device properties settings are stored in the device file To set QFill device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the generic device properties Device List Hw Genetix Aliquot E Genetix OFill a Device Properties al B General Device name OFillt 2 Device type Genetix QFill H Innovadyne Nanodrop Approach height mm 9 s Nandrop1 Allowed prohibited labware 4 43 Labcyte Echoss0 Teachpoints Multidrop Device is accessible from robot Robot 1 Yes Multidrop1 Teachpoint for robot Roboti E amp Remp CSP Device is accessible from robot Robot2 No amp REMPI E Bar code Readers E A Velocity11 Robot v Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No New Device Device has north side BCR No z Device has east side BCR No Delete Device E Genetix QFill properties Exp
333. l editor select a task or a group of tasks in a protocol process 2 Do one of the following Drag and drop the tasks to a new location in the protocol Use the Cut or Copy and Paste commands on the Edit menu to move the tasks Related information For information about The workflow that this procedure belongs to What to do next Setting task parameters About this topic Device task and parameters list Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 169 VWorks User Guide See Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 U Setting task parameters on page 169 Q Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 There are many types of task that can be used in a protocol The tasks you can choose to use depend on the instruments you have in your system You need to set parameters for each task in your protocol Each task has its own set of parameters This topic tells you where to find parameter information for each type of task To set task parameters 1 Refer to this table to find the information you need to set the task parameters for the devices and tasks you are using For this device or And this task Find parameter devices information here All devices Place Plate Setting Place Plate Signal task parameters on page 204 Setting Waitfor task and Signal task parameters on page 217 User Message Setting User Message Waitfor task parame
334. l list box is the same as that used for the source plates Make sure that the name in the Echo 550 device list box is the same as that used for the source plates Audit task Procedure Related information Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 407 VWorks User Guide The audit task is used in a single process to determine the volume of each well in a plate To use the audit task 1 Select the Source option 2 Select Cherry pick as the Type of Transfer 3 Make sure that the name in the Use process label list box is the same as that used for the source plates 4 Make sure that the name in the Echo 550 device list box is the same as that used for the source plates 5 Click the ellipsis button and choose the folder to which you want to save the csv data file To set the Echo 550 Audit task parameters 1 Drag the Echo 550 Audit task to the desired location in the protocol process 2 Inthe Task Parameters toolbar select the Echo 550 you want to use from the Echo 550 device list 3 Select the labware you are using from the Echo 550 Labware list Note The labware definition you are selecting is an Echo 550 definition and not a Velocityl1 labware database definition For information about See Configuring the Echo 550 Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices on page 398 Adding a device to the device Adding devices on page 107 manager Using Echo 550 Diagnostics Using Echo 550 Di
335. labware type for each plate using the labware selection function in the Inventory Management tab Related information For information about See Opening the inventory editor Opening the inventory editor on page 310 Using the labware selection list Reinventorying the plate inventory on page 333 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 331 VWorks User Guide Inventory editor views and filters About this topic Who should read this Before you start Inventory editor views Filtering displayed plates This topic describes how to make the inventory editor easier to work with by showing only the items in the inventory editor that are relevant at the particular time Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 There are three ways to view the plates in the inventory editor To set the view 1 Open the inventory editor 2 Click to select the Inventory Management tab 3 From the Select view type list select one of the following options View Description View by plate Displays every plate in the inventory This is the most frequently used view View by location Displays both plates and slots View unassigned plates Displays plates that were orphaned during previous runs This means plates that are on the system but not in a plate storage dev
336. lass String task preAspirateAirGap Float task quadrants An array of pairs of integers task retract Float Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 283 Task parameters Dispense acceleration Dispense velocity Liquid class list box Pre aspirate volume Quadrants diagram Retract distance VWorks User Guide Comments The rate of increase in velocity before the Dispense Velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The rate at which to dispense the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The name of the liquid class The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid A quadrant is an evenly spaced array of locations that is addressable by the tips ona pipette head A 96 well head can dispense into a 96 well plate four quadrants of a 384 well plate and 16 quadrants of a 1536 well plate A 384 well head can dispense into a 384 well plate or the four quadrants of a 1536 well plate The distance that the tips should move upwards or downwards per unit volume of liquid being dispensed or aspirated This value allows the tips to move upwards or downwards during dispensing or aspirating to maintain a certain height below or above the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and e
337. lat Bottom w Lid 3628 96 Costar U Shaped w Lid 96 Matrix Tube Rack wiabgene septurr Corning 384 Black TC 3712 Corning 384 Round Bottom Black 3676 Falcon 96 Microtest w Lid 353072 Falcon 96 Microtest w Lid 353077 Greiner 1536 Hi Base White 782075 Greiner 1536 HiBase White w Greiner L Greiner 384 Black TC 761091 Greiner 384 Low Vol Black PS 784076 Greiner 384 Low Vol Black PS w Greinet Greiner 384 Low Vol White PS 784075 Greiner 384 Low Vol White PS w Greine Greiner Lid 656191 LIL 384 Half Height White Low volume Nunc 1536 Short White 253607 11 384 Autofilling Microwash 11 384 Autofilling Reservoir V11 384 Reservoir Manual Fill 21 5 de 11 965T Q1 Tip Box 11 965T Q2 Tip Box 11 965T Q3 Tip Box V11 965T Q4 Tip Box Please select a labware class from the list below in order to view and edit its properties Iter Platepad Uses Standard Platepad Uses Vacuum Platepad New labware class Save changes as Rename labware class Delete labware class Labware standards IMPORTANT All labware including deepwell and PCR plates used with Velocity11 products must conform to the SBS microplate standards Please visit www sbsonline org for current SBS standards or contact your labware s manufacturer Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 341 VWorks User Guide Opening the labware editor About this topic Befor
338. lated information For information about See Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting output and input I 0 BioCel User Guide 160 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting the Waste device properties About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the device properties for Waste To set the Waste device properties 1 2 Set Waste s generic properties Open the Device Properties page System 8 General a Delid Station Vacuum Dorie st on Waste 4 t Said Plate Stach Teachgant om B H robot N vst ie te isc ebot Yes ins E waste properties EELEE Delete device Intialize all devices T If you are using a Waste device with a BioCel expand the Waste properties group a Ifyou do not have an environmental chamber separating the waste from the robotic system enter zeros in the Output number and Sensor input number fields b Ifyou do have an environmental chamber separating the waste from the robotic system double click in the Output number and enter the number the Bio I O uses to open the chamber door Double click in the field next to the Sensor input number and select the number the Bio I O uses to detect the opening of the chamber door Save For information about Opening Waste s device properties page The workflow this procedure belongs to Setting u
339. lbar Event and error messages are displayed in the Log toolbar of VWorks Viewing the Log toolbar 1 Ifthe toolbar is not showing from the View menu select Toolbars gt Log The toolbar opens at the bottom of the screen With all message options turned on a large number of messages are displayed during a run For simplicity you can hide types of messages that are not important to you The messages displayed during a run are controlled by Q Selecting screen setting options before a run Q Clicking tabs at the bottom of the display during a run The following options are available for displaying screen messages VWorks log Tab Displays All All event and error messages This is the same as the data that is recorded in the protocol log file Process Event messages including fluid transfer messages Pipettor Fluid Transfers Event messages reported by one or more VPrep pipettors This is the same data that is recorded in the pipettor transfer log file but presented in a sentence format rather than a tab delimited format The event messages that are displayed depend on whether the Record in transfer log option is selected in the aspirate and dispense pipette task parameters Measurements Temperature humidity and gas concentration measurements 76 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Searching the Log toolbar Adding a note VWorks log Tab Displays Errors Errors that
340. lbar enter a number in the RPM text field to indicate the speed of the shaking 3 Inthe Duration text field enter the duration in milliseconds to shake Related information For information about Configuring the Teleshake Adding a device to the device manager Using Teleshake Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring the Teleshake on page 480 Adding devices on page 107 Using Teleshake Diagnostics on page 483 Using Teleshake Diagnostics This topic describes how to use Teleshake Diagnostics to manually operate the shaker at a desired speed and in a desired direction If you have more than one Teleshake device select it using the up down increment arrows in the Select Teleshake to work with field About this topic Procedure To use Teleshake Diagnostics 1 Open Teleshake Diagnostics Teleshake Diagnostics Select Teleshake to work with 1 E ps RPM 4000 4000 8500 RPM Stir Direction NWSE Note Diagnonal motions generate the most stirring force 2 3 Enter the speed you want to shake at in the RPM field The allowable range is shown in the parentheses 484 Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information 4 Select the direction you want to shake from the Stir Direction list box 5 Click Start when you want to begin shaking For information about Configuring the Teleshake Adding a device to the device manager Ope
341. le device properties Bio Tek Washer No profile required Setting the Bio Tek device properties on page 390 Cavro Pump Network Device Driver User Guide For this device Delid Station Vacuum Flexispense Flexispense M FLIPR Tetra Genetix Aliquot Genetix QFill Human Robot Innovadyne Nanodrop Labcyte Echo550 Labcyte Echo550 Destination Stage Labcyte Echo550 Source Stage Lid Hotel Lid Hotel Storage Bay Multidrop Multimek Peak Robotics KiNEDx Robot Chapter 6 Setting up devices Look here to set up a profile No profile required No profile required Creating a FlexiSpense M profile on page 429 Device Driver User Guide Creating an AliQuot profile on page 379 Creating a QFill profile on page 467 No profile required Creating a Nanodrop profile on page 459 Creating an Echo 550 profile on page 399 No profile required No profile required 109 VWorks User Guide And look here to set device properties Setting the delid station device properties on page 121 Setting the FlexiSpense device properties on page 421 Setting the FlexiSpense M device properties on page 430 Setting AliQuot device properties on page 382 Setting QFill device properties on page 468 Setting the human robot device properties on page 123 Setting the Nanodrop device properties on page 461
342. le you need to add the device to the device manager Procedure To create a Nanodrop profile 1 Open Nanodrop Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab Actions Profiles NanodropProfile1 Click Add In the Profile Details dialog box enter a name for the profile and select the port from the Serial port list box This is the port you are using to connect the Nanodrop to the computer running VWorks Profile Details Eg Name NanodropProfile1 e Serial port 460 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information Click OK The profile name appears in the Name column In the Actions tab select the profile from the Profile list box Click OK to close the Nanodrop Diagnostics dialog box For information about Profiles The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening Nanodrop Diagnostics Adding a device to the device manager Setting Nanodrop task parameters Using Nanodrop Diagnostics See About profiles on page 103 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the Nanodrop on page 458 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Nanodrop task parameters on page 462 Using Nanodrop Diagnostics on page 463 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using 461 VWorks User Guide Setting the Nanodrop device properties
343. le click in the field next to Profile name Related information Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using 401 VWorks User Guide 5 Choose a profile from the list box 6 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about Opening Echo 550 s device properties page Setting generic properties The next step The workflow this procedure belongs to Setting up devices Setting Echo 550 task parameters Using Echo 550 Diagnostics See Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting the Echo 550 source stage device properties on page 402 Workflow for configuring Echo 550 devices on page 398 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Echo 550 task parameters on page 404 Using Echo 550 Diagnostics on page 408 402 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the Echo 550 source stage device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the device properties for the source stage When setting up the Echo 550 in VWorks you need to configure the source and destination locations on the device The source stage is the location from which liquids are aspirated Procedure To set the Echo 550 source stage device properties 1 Open the Echo 550 Device Properties page 2 Set the Echo 550 source stage s generic properties
344. le page until you release the mouse Executing dispense Use the Dispense page to set the prime dispense and purge volumes commands and to initiate the dispense To execute dispense commands 1 Open the WellMate Diagnostics dialog box and click the Dispense tab Wellmate Diagnostics ersion 1 2 2 Eg Profile Command Dispense 500 Prime volume aa Aba doere 0 2499 pL E Duot depense 250 Dispense volume 0 2499 pL Dispense to whole plate 1000 Purge volume Dispense to columns 0 2499 pL 24 Offset 100 to 100 ticks 1 tick 0375 mm Return home after dispense Column mask 0 TCT 2 Enter in the appropriate values using the table below as a guide Property Description Prime Volume to prime the lines with before dispensing Dispense Volume to dispense into the wells 512 Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information Property Offset Move to a column Description The distance in ticks where 1 tick 0 0375 millimeters from the center of the well you want to dispense Enter the column number you want to move to in the Column number field and then click Move to Column Select the wells of the plate to which you want to dispense a To dispense to the whole plate click Dispense to whole plate b To dispense to a specific column or columns click Dispense to columns and then click the button s corresponding to the column number
345. le to resume the run delete the first few rows after the header row Then run the protocol again 7 Click OK For information about The FileReader plug in Creating protocols and the protocol editor See About the FileReader plug in on page 298 Creating a protocol basics on page 161 305 VWorks User Guide Using the VWorks inventory This chapter describes how to use the inventory to track plates that move in and out of long term plate storage devices 306 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide VWorks inventory overview About this topic Who should read this Before you start Bar code tracking versus inventory management Required database How plates are stored This topic provides the background information you need to understand how to use the inventory manager to track groups of plates moving into and out of a plate storage device Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic Storex Heraeus Cytomat PLC ora Velocity11 PlateHub and you are using or want to set up inventory management with a database Before starting to create protocols that use a StoreX also read Q The StoreX information in the Device Driver User Guide Q Resolving plate inventory problems on page 524 Before starting to create protocols that use a PlateHub also read Q The PlateHub information in the BioCel User Guide Q Resolving plate inventory problems
346. lecting Device File gt Save For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Opening WellMate device properties page Setting WellMate generic device properties Setting WellMate task parameters Using WellMate Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring the WellMate on page 504 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Setting WellMate task parameters on page 507 Using WellMate Diagnostics on page 509 Setting WellMate task parameters About this topic WellMate task defined Procedure This topic describes how to set the WellMate task parameters in the VWorks software The WellMate task moves a plate to a Matrix Technologies WellMate and dispenses liquid into the plate To set the WellMate task parameters 1 Add the WellMate task to a protocol process 2 If your system has more than one WellMate in the Available Wellmates list box select the one you want to use 508 Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings Available Wellmates Wellmate be 0 0 Dispense to entire plate Dispense to selected columns 0 0 Prime volume 0 2499 uL Dispense volume 0 2499 uL Purge volume 0 2499 pL
347. les This topic describes the different types of log and data files that are created within VWorks Log files record event and error information in text files that can be useful for troubleshooting Data files record data collected by devices such as plate readers The location of the three log files a data file environment text file anda folder are set in the Log Options page of the VWorks Options dialog box File Settings Max number of each log file to maintain 10 A Create new logs for every un Append timestamps to filenames Protocol log El protocol log txt Pipettor transfer log ea piplog txt Bar code log l barcodelog txt Reader output file l Reader dat Measurement output EJ environment txt Image file root folder VersaScan only Database connection string Test amp Save O Enable plate tracking in simulation mode These are listed in the following table and described in more detail later in this topic File Default file or folder name Protocol log file log txt Pipettor transfer log file piplog txt Bar code log file barcodelog txt Reader output file Reader dat Measurement output file Environment txt Image file root folder A folder that you select Note You can change the default filenames to suit your own needs but they are referred to using their default names throughout this guide You can open a log file in any text editor but we recommend that you use the Windows appl
348. lexiSpense click Reset Flexispense2 This command is typically used for troubleshooting purposes or when communication has been interrupted 426 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Definitions of plate dimensions Configuring a FlexiSpense Adding a device to the device manager Opening FlexiSpence Diagnostics Opening device properties page Setting generic properties Setting FlexiSpense task parameters See FlexiSpense User Guide Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense on page 420 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Setting FlexiSpense task parameters on page 422 427 VWorks User Guide FlexiSpense M 1 setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The FlexiSpense M is a liquid dispenser for 96 and 384 well microplates that can be integrated into a lab automation system run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the FlexiSpense M to set the FlexiSpense M task parameters and use FlexiSpense M Diagnostics 428 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M in
349. liQuot device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the AliQuot s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the AliQuot s device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the AliQuot s generic properties x Device Properties a System E General Genetix Aliquot Device name Aliquot Aliquot Device type Genetix Aliquot B A Velocity11 Robot Approach height mm 9 A Robot Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible From robot Robot Yes Teachpoint For robot Robot E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No tedo Device has north side BCR No ___ Deltedevcs Device has east side BCR No Initialize all devices E Genetix Aliquot properties Profile name Device diagnostics aliQuotProfile Related information name Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using 383 VWorks User Guide If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile Choose a profile from the list box Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about Adding a device Opening the Device Properties page The workflow this topic belongs to Creating an AliQuot profile Setting the generic properties Setting AliQuot task parameters Using AliQuot Diagnostic
350. lifting up with it Defines the maximum speed at which this type of plate should be moved The general robot speed is set in VWorks If the plate specific robot speed set here is different from the general robot speed the slower of the two speeds is used Use calipers to measure the length in millimeters of the filter tip or pin tool in filter and pin tool plates For information about See Opening the labware editor Opening the labware editor on page 341 Creating a labware entry before Adding a labware entry on page 342 defining it Defining general properties Defining general properties on page 347 What to do next Defining stacker properties on page 351 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 351 VWorks User Guide Defining stacker properties About this topic This topic describes the parameters used to define a plate or other piece of labware except reservoirs in the Stacker sub page of the labware editor Some stacker properties are used to make adjustments that avoid having to change teachpoints which might otherwise cause problems Who should read Because stacker properties only apply to the VStack only those this administrators or technicians who define labware for use with the VStack should read this topic Defining properties To define stacker properties 1 Click the Stacker sub page tab of the labware editor 2 Enter the values for the available parameters according to
351. liquid dispenser Automated pipettor Plate reader Automated microplate washer Cell based assay system Low volume liquid dispenser 12 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Third party robots Human robot Instruments Genetix QFill2 Dispenser Innovadyne Nanodrop H P Labortechnik VARIOMAG Teleshake Labcyte Echo 550 Liconic STX StoreX and STR series Matrix Wellmate Molecular Devices instruments using SoftMax Pro software PerkinElmer Envision PerkinElmer PlateStak Remp CSP Tecan Systems Cavro Pumps Thermo Electron Multiskan Ascent Thermo Labsystems Multidrop Vici Multiport Valves Zeiss plate vision Robot KiNEDx Robot Description and comments Automated liquid dispenser Automated liquid pipettor Plate shaker Compound reformatter Plate incubators Liquid dispenser Microplate readers Plate reader Labware stacker Tube sealer Syringe pump Plate reader Automated microplate filler Valve system Plate reader The following third party robot can be used with VWorks Description and comments Plate handling robot If you do not have a robot you can operate as the robot When the protocol runs dialog boxes appear and direct you to move plates The human robot is most useful for protocol development and for carrying out simple protocols with one or two instruments Chapter 2 VWorks overview 13 VWorks User Guide Overview of the VWorks user int
352. load task 308 310 defined 198 308 setting parameters 198 UPS monitoring status of 72 Upstack task defined 193 setting parameters 193 use vacuum clamp property 352 user account adding 371 deleting 371 privileges 370 user database 22 user interface overview 73 User Message task 63 defined 213 setting parameters 213 v vacuum filtration see QFill Vacuum Station configuring workflow 144 device properties setting 145 Vacuum task defined 215 setting parameters 215 VCode 77 about 292 configuring workflow 746 device properties setting 147 stand alone 88 velocity property 364 365 Velocity11 devices about configuring 178 Velocity11 privilege 370 Vici Multiport Valve device properties setting 498 diagnostics using 500 profile for creating 497 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 496 Vici Multiport Valve task defined 499 setting parameters 499 View menu 19 volume blowout 236 250 263 dispense 235 mixing 249 post dispense 236 pre aspirate 263 wash 262 VPrep 11 changing tips 234 configuring workflow 148 defining labware properties 354 device properties setting 750 profile for creating 149 reservoir 252 selecting 222 VPrep Shelf configuring 223 configuring workflow 147 device properties setting 142 VSpin 77 configuring workflow 157 creating a profile 752 device properties setting 753 see also VSpin with Access2 task VSpin with
353. locity Dispense volume Enable shaking Shake RPM Post dispense delay Shake time Comments The rate at which to dispense the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The volume of liquid to be moved out of each pipette tip Turns on shelf shaking during dispense Shaking speed in RPM Wait time in milliseconds before shaking starts Duration in milliseconds of shaking These properties are the same as the properties described for the Mix task Data type String task aspirateAcceleration Float task aspirate Velocity task blowoff task cycles Float Float Integer Task parameters Plate name Aspirate acceleration Aspirate velocity Last cycle blowout volume Number of mixing cycles Comments The name of the plate The rate of increase in velocity before the maximum aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The rate at which to draw up liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor The volume of air to blow out when the tips are in the liquid This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume The number of aspirate dispense operations Property Data type task dispenseAcceleration Float task dispenseVelocity Float task liquidC
354. loop A Loop pipette task icon and End of loop pipette task icon are added to the process 0 0 lt_ Pipette Process 1 Loop 4times End of loop Fepirate 10 00 pL Dispense 10 00 pL on VPrep1 from unnamed 1 into unnamed 1 in in 1 quadrant s 1 quadrant s Drag the End of loop pipette task icon to the other side of the last task you want to be in the loop O lt _HW 0 Pipette Process 1 Loop 4times Aspirate 10 00 pL Dispense 10 00 pL End of loop on VPrep1 from unnamed 1 into unnamed 1 in in 1 quadrant s 1 quadrant s Select the Loop task pipette icon and in the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar enter the number of times you want the tasks inside the loop to run Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 249 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Configuring a pipette process Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Configuring a VPrep shelf Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 Using the Loop task with the Setting Change Instance pipette task Change Instance pipette task parameters on page 230 Setting Mix pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Mix task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep Mix pipette task The Mix pipette task is used with a VPrep to mix reagents by aspirating defined and then dispen
355. ltimek instrument so it can aspirate and dispense The plates are then removed from the Multimek To set up the devices l 2 In the Device Manager ensure the Multimek locations you want to use are accessible by the human robot In this case it will be Frames that is Locations 1 and 2 x Device Properties E General Eg Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name Multimek35 Wes Device type Beckman Multimek Pipettor H Human Robot E Location HumanRobot cation is accessible from robot HumanRobat Yes 5 07 waste OP Manualstack achpoint For robot HumanRobot Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware Location Frame 1 has south side BCR No Location Frame 1 has west side BCR No Location Frame 1 has north side BCR No Location Frame 1 has east side BCR No Labware lt not assigned gt New device Location Frame 2 ocation is accessible from robot HumanRobot Delete device eachpoint for robot HumanRobot Trice a GeviceS Approach height mm Allowed prohibited labware Location Frame 2 has south side BCR No xl Device diagnostics Add a Waste device to act as a stack to receive the finished plates Make the stack accessible by the human robot x Device Properties E General Eg System s Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name ManualStack Multimek3s Device type Waste a Human Robot Approach heigh
356. me the start filtration signal is sent to the AliQuot and the beginning of the vacuum pull enter a value for Filtration delay In the Filtration time field enter a duration for the vacuum pull If you want a delay between the end of the filtration and when the end of the operation is reported enter a value for Post Filtration delay Click the AliQuot tab and choose whether you want auto purge on or off If you select Auto purge on enter the time to purge in the AliQuot purge time field and the time between purges in the AliQuot purge interval field Click OK The diagnostics dialog box closes saving the profile settings 381 382 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Profiles Adding a device Opening AliQuot Diagnostics The next step The workflow this topic belongs to Setting AliQuot task parameters Using AliQuot Diagnostics Performing a fill test See About profiles on page 103 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the AliQuot on page 378 Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Using AliQuot Diagnostics on page 385 Performing a fill test on page 386 Setting AliQuot device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the A
357. multiple Ethernet cables of the devices IP address function The computer s network card and each device on the network must be assigned a different number called an IP address IP addresses allow computers and devices to be uniquely identified on a network so that information can be specifically routed to them Ways to assign an IP address There are two ways to assign an IP address Q Statically by assigning it manually so that it never changes Q Dynamically by automatically assigning a new address every time the computer or device is turned on Dynamic assignment uses DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol software Network card and IP addresses Chapter 5 VWorks installation 87 VWorks User Guide It is important to consider separately the IP address of the computer s network card and the IP addresses of the devices on the network The computer s IP address The network card of the computer that is controlling the devices on a lab automation network always has a static IP address This is even the case when the devices are dynamically assigned addresses because of the way that DHCP servers work DHCP servers are usually configured to start when Windows starts When the server starts it reads an initialization file that points it to the network card through which the computer will serve addresses A screenshot of the initialization file is shown below P dhepsrv ini Notepad OF x File Edit Format View
358. mum air pressure Enable BiolO on COM port Check trash receptacle on BiolO input Light configuration Enable measurements and alarms When selected The robot will move to all positions defined in the device manager to check that the positions are empty Set the offset field so that the robot will check the position this many mm above each position teachpoint The system air pressure is continuously monitored If the pressure falls below the value specified in the text box an error is generated The units of pressure specified in the text box are pounds per square inch BioCel only The Bio I O functions are enabled The COM port text box identifies the communications port to which the Bio I O serial cable is connected You should not need to change this number Biocel only The waste fill sensor is activated if your system has one The input text box specifies the number of the Bio I O input port to which the sensor is connected The selected high or low radio button determines whether a high or low signal from the sensor corresponds to a full waste bin You should not need to change these settings BioCel only Selects the type of lights on your BioCel Allows VWorks to read data from iSeries and StoreX environmental control systems and set alarms at defined thresholds 35 36 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide 7 BioCel only In the UPS Settings group box select from the
359. n An Ethernet switch connects the single cable coming from the computer to one or more cables that lead to one or more devices A switch is included in the Velocity11 DHCP Server Kit Note Do not use a crossover cable with a switch The switch performs the crossover function If you are setting up a new network connect the Ethernet switch to the computer and then connect the devices to the Ethernet switch using the procedures in this section If you are adding devices to an existing LAN you do not need to perform the first procedure because the switch should already be connected To connect the switch to the computer 1 Connect the power cord to the switch 2 Plug one end of the Ethernet cable into any Ethernet port of the switch 3 Plug the other end into the available Ethernet port of the computer To connect a device to the switch 1 Plug one end of a second Ethernet cable into any available port of the Ethernet switch 2 Plug the other end into the Ethernet port of the device You can connect as many devices to the network as there are Ethernet ports available For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflows for Ethernet networking on belongs to page 89 Chapter 5 VWorks installation 95 VWorks User Guide Checking the network card s IP address Introduction When setting up an Ethernet network you might want to verify the IP address of the network card in the computer T
360. n essential part of determining the names of properties when creating JavaScripts for x in task print task x task x Velocity 1 offers a custom script writing service for VWorks and other applications Please contact us for more information For information about See The properties for each available The JavaScript task object and task in VWorks3 version 20 properties on page 276 276 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide The JavaScript task object and properties About this topic Task properties The VWorks JavaScript interpreter includes a task object that is defined by Velocity11 This topic lists the properties for the Velocity11 JavaScript task object One of the properties is for the Apply Label task The other properties are all for pipette tasks Properties available to all tasks The following properties can be used for any task Property Data type Description task name String Name of the task for example Aspirate task description String Description of the task that is given under the icon in the protocol editor For example a downstack task that has the script print task description will send the following text to the protocol log Downstack from stacker2 Apply Label task The JavaScript Apply Label task properties are listed below along with the data type of the property and the names of the corresponding Apply Label
361. n page 107 manager Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using Nanodrop Diagnostics Using Nanodrop Diagnostics on page 463 Chapter 24 Nanodrop setting up and using 463 VWorks User Guide Using Nanodrop Diagnostics About this topic Managing profiles Running an individual operation This topic describes how to Q Manage Nanodrop profiles which are used to communicate with the computer Q Perform an individual operation such as a dispense or wash using the parameters set in a Quick Run Method and referencing a calibration file for increased accuracy To modify a Nanodrop profile 1 Open Nanodrop Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab 3 Select the profile you want to modify and click Change 4 Enter your changes in the Profile Details dialog box 5 Click OK To delete a profile 1 Open Nanodrop Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab 3 Select the profile you want to delete and click Delete You can use Nanodrop Diagnostics to perform the following actions Action Meaning Prime Priming clears air bubbles from the syringe path tubing Prime the Nanodrop if it has been left idle for more than two hours Dispense Delivers liquid into the plate wells Wash Cleans the insides and outsides of the tips The operation is performed with the tips immersed in the wash station Rinse Cleans the insides of the tips The operation is performed above the wash st
362. n page 169 184 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide About setting Apply Label task parameters About this topic Apply Label task defined Bar code labelling decisions Bar code format Related information This topic provides some information about the Apply Label task to help you make choices about bar code labelling The Apply Label task uses a VCode to print a bar code label and apply it to a plate Before you add an Apply Label task to a protocol consider your record keeping and automation needs For example Q Do you need each bar code label to be unique within a run but not from run to run U Do you need each bar code label to be unique across all runs Q Will you be using a Laboratory Information Management System LIMS for barcoding information and record keeping Q What human readable fields do you want to include on the label UL Do you want to use a bar code input file Q Do you want to use a bar code data file When setting Apply Label task parameters you need to select a bar code format which specifies the type number properties and location of fields that are printed on bar code labels Some formats are provided with the VCode but you can define others according to your needs Each format is identified by a number which you enter when setting up a Bar Code task For information about See Setting bar code task parameters Setting A
363. nd using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Envision About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Envision in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating an Envision profile on page 413 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the Envision device properties on page 415 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Envision task parameters Setting Envision task parameters on page 416 Using Envision Diagnostics Using Envision Diagnostics on page 417 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using 413 VWorks User Guide Creating an Envision profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Envision in VWorks Before you start Before you can create an Envision profile you need to add the Envision device to the device manager Procedures To create an Envision profile 1 Open Envision Diagnostics 2 Click the Profile tab Current Envision Profile New profile Save profile Rename profile Server Selection Server name Authentication Information Username Domain Password 3 Click New profile Please enter name of new profile New Profile Cancel 4 Inthe New Envision Profile dialog box type the name for the profile and click OK
364. neous Length of filter tip pin tool mm Property Description Robot gripper offset Height of the gripper above any teachpoint when the robot is picking or placing a plate of this type The value is typically 0 3 mm Thickness The distance in millimeters from the bottom surface of the plate to the top surface of the plate Measure using calipers Property Stacking thickness Can be sealed Sealed thickness Sealed stacking thickness Can have lid Lidded thickness Lidded stacking thickness Lid gripper offset Lid resting height Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 349 VWorks User Guide Description The thickness in millimeters of two stacked plates minus the thickness of one plate see above row Measure using calipers Example Thickness of two stacked plates x 23 14 mm Thickness of one plate 14 14 mm Stacking thickness 23 14 mm 14 14 mm 9 00 mm Plate Thickness i X Stacking Thickness i Select if the plate can be sealed Thickness of the plate with a seal in place Available only if Can be sealed is selected Stacking thickness of the plate with the a seal in place Available only if Can be sealed is selected Select if the plate can have a lid Thickness of the plate with a lid in place Available only if Can have lid is selected Stacking thickness of the plate with the a lid in place Available only if Can have lid
365. ng a plate from a storage device into the system Load The act of moving a plate from the system into a storage device System Plates that are being processed by the current protocol are considered to be in the system For example Q Aplate on a platepad is in the system A plate in a plate hotel is in the system A plate being incubated in an incubator is in the system A plate half way up a VStack rack is not in the system unless it will be moved during the current protocol Q Q Q Q A plate being stored in a PlateHub is not in the system unless it will be moved during the current protocol Database backup Related information Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 309 VWorks User Guide The inventory management database can be backed up onto another computer using a software utility If you want to do this contact the Velocity11 Service Center for more information For information about See Inventory groups plate groupsand About inventory groups on page 311 location groups Setting up the database Setting up the inventory management database on page 309 Moving plates in and out of a Q Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Incubating plates Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Using bar code input files Creating
366. ning Teleshake Diagnostics Setting Teleshake task parameters See Workflow for configuring the Teleshake on page 480 Adding devices on page 107 Opening diagnostics software on page 105 Setting Teleshake task parameters on page 482 485 VWorks User Guide Ultramark setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Ultramark microplate imager reader allows you to examine any plate format from a single well to 1 536 wells and it can be integrated into a lab automation system that uses VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Ultramark set the Ultramark task parameters and use Ultramark Diagnostics 486 Chapter 28 Ultramark setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Ultramark About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Ultramark in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the Ultramark device properties on page 487 4 Setting up the Ultramark plate reader data file on page 488 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Ultramark task parameters Setting Ultramark task parameters on page 489 Using Ultramark Diagnostics Using Ultramark Diagnostics on pa
367. nitiated Procedure To set the FlexiSpense task parameters 1 Add a FlexiSpense task to a protocol process Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Dispense only Peon number to run 1 b Prime only Prime volume 0 Available devices Devices to use Flexispence Use earlier List programs 2 Choose an operation Note The prime function is for pre protocol processes and the dispense function for Protocol processes a Ifyou select Dispense only select the program you want to run from the Program number to run list box Programs can be composed and then stored using the FlexiSpense device itself These programs can also be changed and created using VWorks To edit or create a program click List programs and then click the Processes tab to open the Flexispense diagnostics dialog box b If you select Prime only enter the volume in microliters with which you want to prime In the Task Settings page of the Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using 423 VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the desired FlexiSpense from the Available devices list and click Add The device name appears in the Devices to use list 3 Ifyou have added more than one FlexiSpense you can change the order in which a particular FlexiSpense is used a Select a FlexiSpense in the Devices to use list b Click Use earlier to increase the priority of the Flexi
368. nt s 2 12 04 6 32 31 78 PM Event Shelf2 Source 1 Transfer 2 12 04 6 32 31 61 PM Event Robot Source 1 Fetching plate from Stacker1 and placing at Shelf 2 2 12 04 6 32 36 63 PM Info Prep Aspirate 40 00uL from row 1 column 1 Shelf 5 2 12 04 6 32 36 61 PM Event Wash Shelf Wash Shelf Completed Aspirate 40uL from 1 quadrant s 2 12 04 6 32 36 63 PM Event Shelf 2 Source 1 Dispense 10pL into 4 quadrant s 2 12 04 6 32 43 36 PM Info Prep Dispense 10 00pL to row 1 column 1 Shelf 2 2 12 04 6 32 45 63 PM Info Prep Dispense 10 00pL to row 1 column 2 Shelf 2 2 12 04 6 32 46 36 PM Info Prep Dispense 10 00pL to row 2 column 1 Shelf 2 2 12 04 6 32 50 68 PM Info Prep Dispense 10 00pL to row 2 column 2 Shelf 2 2 12 04 6 32 52 68 PM Event Shelf 2 Source 1 Completed Dispense 10pL into 4 quadrant s 2 12 04 6 32 52 69 PM Event Stacker1 Source 1 Upstack Process time was 23 sec 2 12 04 6 32 52 69 PM Event VPrep Completed pipette process 1 2 12 04 6 32 52 92 PM Event Robot Source 1 Fetching plate from Shelf 2 and placing at Stacker1 2 12 04 6 32 59 30 PM Event Stacker1 Source 1 Upstack complete 2 12 04 6 32 59 33 PM Event Scheduler Protocol completed M 4 gt gt i ProcessLog Thursday February 1 Ia olf 52 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Protocol log file The information given in a protocol log file is explained in the following information table Refer to the s
369. ntory Management tab Note You can also remove the plates and delete the relevant rows from the inventory editor For information about See Creating a location group Creating a location group on page 313 Creating a plate group Creating a plate group on page 316 Moving plates in and out ofa Q Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Incubating plates Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Using bar code input files Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 324 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Moving plates between storage devices About this topic Who should read this Before you start Moving a plate This topic provides an example to illustrate how you can move a group of plates out of one plate storage device and put them into another The general procedure could also be used to move a group of plates within a single storage device Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 Make sure that both plate storage devices are properly configured in the device manager In this example procedure a group of four plates is moved from one plate storage device PlateHub to another PlateHub2
370. oCel enter the Delid Station Vacuum properties a b Expand the Delid Station Vacuum properties group Double click in the field next to Output number and enter the number the Bio I O uses for the delid station Double click in the field next to Sensor input number and enter the number the Bio I O uses for detecting a vacuum Double click in the field next to Access to trash and select Yes or No Selecting Yes for this option indicates that the lids will be discarded and not replaced 4 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 122 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Opening Delid Station s device Adding devices on page 107 properties page Setting Delid Station s generic Setting the generic properties fora properties device on page 112 Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Delid Relid task Setting Delid Relid task parameters parameters on page 192 Workflow for configuring this Workflow for configuring the delid device station on page 120 Workflow for configuring the human robot About this topic This topic describes how to use the human robot as a device in VWorks In VWorks software you have the option of adding a human robot to the device file Typically you use the human robot when you are running a single instrument with
371. oc instrument to the device manager Procedure To create a PlateLoc profile 1 Inthe PlateLoc Diagnostics dialog box click the Profile tab PlateLoc Control 6 2 1 Eg Control Profiles Current PlateLoc Profile es Add ear Delete profile Copy profile Rename profile Communication Settings 1 COM port Startup Values Startup seal time sec Startup seal temp C Warm Up Cool Down Timeouts Max warm up wait sec 6i Max cool down wait sec 2 Click Add profile enter a name for the PlateLoc instrument in the Add Profile dialog box and click OK 3 Inthe Communications group box enter the COM Port you are using to connect the PlateLoc with the controlling computer 4 Enter the Startup Values settings a Inthe Startup seal time field enter the amount of time in seconds you want the default seal time to be b Inthe Startup seal temp field enter the default temperature in degrees centigrade you want the sealer be at when it seals a plate 5 Enter the Warm up Cool Down Timeouts 134 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information a Enter the maximal amount of time in seconds you want to wait for the sealer to reach temperature in the Max warm up wait field b Enter the maximal amount of time in seconds you want to wait for the sealer to cool in between sealings in the Max cool down wait field 6 Click O
372. ocess r Wy i 1 on VPrep1 lIf I H Pipette Process 1 Aspirate 20 0 pL Dispense 20 0 pL on VPrep1 from reservoirl into Plate A quadrant 1 using quadrant 1 using 1xTE 1XTE The protocol is now complete For information about See VPrep task parameters Understanding the configuration settings in a pipette task on page 290 Creating a pipette process Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Creating protocol basics Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Specific pipette tasks Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 226 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Adding and configuring a pipette process task About this topic Adding a Pipette Process task Setting Pipette Process parameters This topic describes how to configure a Pipette Process task for a Velocity11 VPrep The first step in creating a pipette process is to add a Pipette Process task to the protocol editor Drag the Pipette process icon into the protocol process 384 Falcon TC f CAT Plate Black gt 4 f W 353962 called a unnamed 1 384 Falcon TC Downstack from Pipette process 1 Plate Black 353962 VStack4 called unnamed 1 Remove When you add the Pipette Process task a new pipette process is started in the pipette process editor The pipette process is identified by its Pipette Process link icon Pipette Process aT 1 on VPrept j y
373. ocol An example is vworks3 myprotocol pro user myusername gt password mypassword runs 2 6 Press ENTER to start the run The following screenshot shows a generic example of the completed command prompt Command Prompt Microsoft Windows 2666 Version 5 00 2195 lt C Copyright 1985 2666 Microsoft Corp C Documents and Settings VU11Customer gt cd c vworks workspace bin C vworks workspace gt vworks3 myprotocol pro user mysername password mypassword runs 2 m Related information For information about See Setting up runs overview Overview of performing a run on page 60 Chapter 4 Performing a run 65 VWorks User Guide About starting runs automatically About this topic If you want to schedule a series of runs perhaps using a different protocol for each run you need to create a run set This topic provides some basic information about run sets Run set defined A run set is a collection of runs that are scheduled in advance to run without operator intervention The run set is defined in the Run Set Manager toolbar which is displayed on the Progress page of VWorks Protocol Date Time Runs Plugin Protocol Notes Status Ee Friday Aou 06 T2013 PM T1 T AT Schedded C WwWorks Workspacelp Friday August 06 2 00 19PM 1 Scheduled oa or Q Q pty c a Typical use Run sets are typically used with systems that are meant to be run for long stretches of time unattende
374. of the entire storage device or part of it The device s bar code reader checks all selected slots for the presence of a bar code and reads those that it finds The results are checked against the inventory database IMPORTANT For reinventorying to be successful each plate must have a unique bar code If a plate is found in a slot that according to the inventory database should not have a plate a line is added to the inventory editor for that slot and the plate s bar code is recorded If that bar code is already associated with another slot in the database the previous association is deleted In doing this the system assumes that the plate has been manually moved If the inventory has a line for a plate in a particular slot but the inventory finds no plate in that slot the line is removed from the inventory However the data in the system that is associated with the plate is not deleted If in the future if the plate is returned to the system when the next inventory is performed the data can be reassociated with it 334 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide Procedure To reinventory the plate storage device l 2 3 8 Open the inventory editor Click the Inventory Management tab From the Select view type list box select View by location This lists the plates in the inventory database by location Select the plates that you want to inventory You can use SHIFT click to sel
375. ofile on page 439 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the Multidrop device properties on page 440 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Multidrop task parameters Setting MultiDrop task parameters on page 441 Using Multidrop Diagnostics Using Multidrop Diagnostics on page 443 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using 439 VWorks User Guide Creating a Multidrop profile About this topic This topic describes how to set up a profile for a Multidrop in VWorks software Before you start Before you can create a profile you will need to add the Multidrop to the device manager Procedure To create a Multidrop profile 1 Open Multidrop Diagnostics Multidrop Diagnostics xi r Profile Settings m Multidrop Commands Select multidrop profile to work with Times to purge 1 10 Prime volume 5 1000pL 100 Shake time 1 605 5 New r Dispense Program Select number of wells on plate 96 Note that all volumes will be rounded to the next lowest Sul value O 384 Prime Yolume 0 1000pL 100 Dispense volume 5 1000pyL 50 D Is p e n S e Shake time 0 60 s 0 Purge 1 times when complete C Entire plate Specific columns In the Profile Settings group box click New Enter a name in the New Multidrop
376. ol 1 Click Tools and select Protocol Options 2 Inthe Protocol Options tab of the dialog box click the device file ellipsis button Device File K C Documents and Settings mevans Desktop marks dev 3 Navigate to the folder that contains the file to load 4 Click Open Note The file path displayed in the Protocol Options dialog box is updated if you save a protocol to a different folder 116 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide 117 VWorks User Guide Configuring Velocity11 devices This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges It explains what Velocity11 devices are and how to set them up 118 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide About configuring Velocity11 devices About this topic This topic provides the following U A description of who needs to perform the tasks described here Q A definition of device in the context of VWorks Q An overview of how devices are configured Q The location of information associated with using all devices Who should read All devices require an initial setup in VWorks The information found in this this chapter is written for Administrators or Technicians who have the responsibility of setting up or configuring new instruments About configuring Configuring a device requires the following tasks devices Q Adding the device to VWorks This tells VWorks that the instrument is a device Q Creating a device profile
377. ol editor window until a vertical dashed line appears In the Task Settings page of the Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select items from appropriate boxes The device you want to use with this task The location of the labware on the device you are using Labware type you are using in this protocol For information about Defining labware Creating a protocol See About defining labware with the labware editor on page 338 Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 207 VWorks User Guide Setting Restack task parameters About this topic Restack task defined Procedure This topic describes how to use the Restack task parameters The Restack task collects plates in a stack moves them to another stack in a definable time and in a way that maintains the proper order of the plates and passes the plates to another task The Restack task can be used as part of a larger process that carries out simultaneous timed incubations of more than one plate where the goals are the following Q Time between the start of the incubation and the reading of the plate to be approximately the same for each plate Q Evaporation from the plates is to be minimized Note Two or more VStacks are required to use the Restack task To set Restack task parameters 1 Add the Restack task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Param
378. ollowing example protocol and error message The error refers to task 2 which is the Pipette Process task in the following diagram and not the Downstack task The first icon is the plate icon sagri called Test stackert Error in Test task 2 Pipette process 1 is required to process Test but does not A protocol is a collection of processes that run at the same time as defined in the process editor The following diagram shows one protocol with two processes 384 ABGene deepwell called N 39 W 4 Plate 1 lt 384 AB Gene Downstack from Bar code plate Pipette process 1 Upstack to deepwell called stackeri stacker Plate 1 384 ABGene ae ae deepwell called gt gt 4 gt 4 Plate 2 3 et 384 ABGene Downstack from Seal for 1 8 Upstack to deepwell called stacker3 seconds at 170 C stacker4 Plate 2 Remove A pre protocol is a collection of processes that are executed once before the protocol The processes are created in the pre protocol editor which is accessed by clicking the Pre Protocol Editor tab in the main VWorks window Priming reservoir pumps is an example of a pre protocol task When you click Start if there is a pre protocol it is executed first followed by the protocol Post protocol defined Pipette process task defined Run defined Pipette process link icon Pipette task defined Chapter 3 Preparing for a run 31 VWorks User Guide A post
379. olume to be removed From each highlighted well of the source plate at any one time 1 240 pL Specify the columns to be dispensed to for plate Plate A 23 selections columns 2 24 Destination Specify the transfer volume 100 Volume to be added to each highlighted well of the destination plate 0 001 120 pL a Enter a value in the Specify the Maximum volume field This is the maximum amount that will be aspirated at any one time from the source in a 1 N transfer or dispense at any one time to the destination N 1 The upper limit of this value is determined by the following Capacity of the pipette head Capacity of the tips if Tips will be changed was selected in step 1 of the Fill Plate Wizard Well volume of the source plate in a 1 N transfer or the destination plate in a N 1 transfer b Enter a value in the Specify the transfer volume field This is the volume to be added to each column or quadrant of the destination in a 1 N transfer or removed from each column or quadrant of the source in a N 1 transfer The upper limit is determined by the well volume of the destination in a 1 N transfer or the source in a N 1 transfer The following table describes the fill plate pipette tasks associated with three different types of transfer in which fluid aspirated from a single column of the source is dispensed into five columns of the destination 1 N transfer Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette ta
380. ompiling a protocol Compiling protocols on page 179 Running a protocol in simulation Simulating a run on page 181 mode Running scripts before or after Using start finish protocol scripts on protocols page 55 Using JavaScript in VWorks About this topic About JavaScript in VWorks About JavaScript This topic introduces how JavaScripts can be used in VWorks In VWorks JavaScript programs scripts can be used to Q Configure tasks in ways that task parameters do not allow Q Change the parameters of a protocol task immediately before it is scheduled This extends the capability of VWorks because the parameters can be changed dynamically during a run based on Q Information passed from an external source such as a database Q The number of times the protocol has cycled Q Feedback on changing conditions during the run Scripts can be run as part of pre protocols protocols and post protocols JavaScript is a general purpose programming language that requires an interpreter to run its programs You are probably most familiar with JavaScript where it is used to create dynamic effects in Web pages The form of JavaScript is made up of a core language plus Web browserspecific language It is processed by the JavaScript interpreter that is built into modern browsers The core JavaScript language can be used to write scripts that have nothing to do with web pages These scripts can be used for any
381. on 1 X Program name 6 chars max R96 Dispense volume uL 10 Prime volume before dispensing uL fo Pump speed 1000 3000 1000 Serpentine dispense mode C Select deselect all Save Program Run Program Enable keypad 2 Select the program you want to modify from the Program number list box The settings for that program will load into the dialog box 3 Select the desired plate type from the Use plate definition list box 4 Optionally edit the Program name 434 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using VWorks User Guide Viewing plate definitions Priming the device 5 Edit the volume to dispense in microliters in the Dispense volume field 6 Edit the prime volume before dispensing 7 Select a pump speed from the Pump speed list box 8 Click Save Program 9 To do atest run place a plate on the Flexispense and click Run Program 10 Click OK to save changes and close the dialog box To view plate definitions 1 Open the Flexispense M Diagnostics Plate Definitions read only Plate number 1 Plate name 96 Number of rows 8 Number of columns 12 Row spacing mm fis Column spacing mm Well 41 X position mm 0 Well 41 Y position mm 9 Manifold type 8 channel 2 Select a plate number from the Plate number list box located in the Plate Definitions read only group box The values for the selected plate loads 3 Click OK to close the dialog b
382. on refer to its stop button accompanying documentation to learn how to use it Chapter 4 Performing a run 71 VWorks User Guide Monitoring a run About this topic Monitoring overall progress What to monitor After starting a run the operation of the system should be monitored This topic describes the general ways to monitor a run and points to other topics that describe how to monitor more specific aspects of a run You can monitor the overall progress of the run on the Progress page Protocol Progress Elapsed protocol time 0 20 31 sec Plates left to process 516 Tasks defined in protocol 4140 Tasks remaining 4014 3 04 Exactly what you do to monitor a run depends on your lab automation system and the protocol that you are using For example you might need to Q DODO Compare the motions of the robot to the protocol tasks being completed You can identify the task that is currently being performed from the position of the green ball in the process panes Because VWorks can schedule more than one task at a time there may be more than one green ball displayed I Dispense 50 0 pL to 03SandFuture quadrant 1 using 384 Disposable Tip Add and remove labware For more information about adding and removing labware during a run see Pausing and stopping a run on page 69 Empty the waste bin Empty liquid waste containers Fill liquid reservoirs Replace supplies
383. on page 324 Reinventorying the plate inventory on page 333 Inventory editor views and filters on page 331 336 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide 337 VWorks User Guide Setting labware definitions This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges 338 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide About defining labware with the labware editor About this topic Labware editor defined Types of information stored About physical properties About labware classes This topic introduces the labware editor which is used to define labware plates lids tip boxes and so on that can be used by devices The labware editor is the VWorks interface through which users enter information about labware You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to use the labware editor Two main types of information are stored in the labware database Q Information about the physical plate properties L Information about labware classes Plates lids tip boxes and other labware have properties such as width length and number of wells Without the labware editor you would have to enter values for the many properties associated with a plate each time you set up a protocol But with the labware editor all you have to do is select the type of labware to use Labware classes are sets of labware entries grouped so they are
384. on page 524 Bar code tracking Plates are often tracked using south side bar codes With south side bar code tracking every time the robot picks up a plate the bar code is read and compared with the plate that is expected to be at that position This accurately tracks plates through a protocol but it is limited because the plate locations are stored in memory and are lost when you exit VWorks Inventory management The inventory management system allows long term tracking of plates as bar code data is permanently stored in a database This is useful for lab automation systems with devices that store plates for a long time such as a Velocity11 PlateHub Heraeus Cytomat PLC and Liconic StoreX To use inventory management you must have a SQL database set up either on the computer that runs VWorks or a computer that is on the same local area network The long term storage devices supported by VWorks store plates in cassettes and slots A cassette is a vertical rack of plates that has many slots with each holding one plate Information that is stored Inventory manager Plate groups and Location groups Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 307 VWorks User Guide The inventory maintains a list of plates in every long term plate storage device The information contained about each plate in the inventory includes the Q Cassette and slot location of the plate Name of the group or location to which it belongs Q U L
385. onfiguring a VPrep shelf Each VPrep shelf must be added as a device and then configured to be used to hold tips plates and reservoirs There are eight types of VPrep shelves that can be added and configured in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting VPrep shelf device properties on page 142 When to use Use this procedure when configuring a VPrep initially as well as when a new type of shelf device is used in a protocol for the first time 142 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about A description of VPrep shelves Setting up a device Saving the device file Pipette tasks See VPrep User Guide Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Setting VPrep shelf device properties About this topic Because different shelf types are used for different purposes they may have different properties that need configuring This topic describes how to set the properties for all the shelf types Before you start Before you can set the device properties you need to have the VPrep device properties configured and to add the VPrep shelf to the device manager Procedure To set the VPrep shelf device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set
386. ontents of the label fields printed on a series of plates during a run However without plug ins and scripting for each label in a given run the Apply Label task cannot apply Q Two different pieces of data from the same file L Two different increments for two fields Q Numeric increments for one field and alphanumeric increments for another different field In the following screenshot Field2 and Field3 use the same label input file for the data in the fields However this function is limited because there is no way to specify two different locations in the same file for the same label Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings South West North East Printing Option Use this label Be Format to use 1 Number of Fields 2 Field 1 NAWIINC Field 2 FILE Field 3 FILE Field 4 from South x side Field Field 6 use South x side Increment Chars 1 From user plugin Starting Increment 1001 Numeric 0 9 Alphanumeric 0 2 O Verify bar codes and reapply up to 0 times Bar Code File Entry 4 Bar Codes NOT in file Related information Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 299 VWorks User Guide The FileReader plug in allows VWorks to input the data in the label fields from a text file Functionally the text file is similar to a label data file except that it includes data for all fields in a label instead of just one field This allows two field
387. ool westoool eastood2 southood2 westood2 eastooo3 southooo3s west0003 eastooo4 southooo4 westooo4 eastooos southooos westooos east southooo6 westooo6 eastooo 7 southooo westooo 7 eastooos southooos westooos eastooo9 southooos westooo9s eastoolo southoolo westoolo eastooll southoo11 westooll eastool2 southool2 westool2 eastool3 southoo13 westool3 eastoold southool4 westool4 eastools southoo1ls westoOols northoo16 eastool e southool6e westool6 northooL eastool southool 7 westooLl7 northoo1s eastools southools westools Related information For more information about See Bar code data files Setting general options on page 34 Bar code input files Using bar code input files on page 293 Applying bar codes Setting Apply Label task parameters on page 185 298 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide About the FileReader plug in About this topic Who should read this Defining label field content Velocity11 has created a plug in for VWorks called FileReader dll This topic describes the plug in The FileReader plug in lets VWorks read from a tab delimited or a CSV comma separated values file to specify the content of label fields printed with a VCode Technicians and administrators who write protocols with Apply Label VCode tasks and who want the FileReader plug in to read and process the label text The Apply Label task provides several ways to define the c
388. or creating a protocol on page 163 Specifying task order across processes on page 218 Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Other tasks Setting task parameters on page 169 Specifying task order across processes About this topic Example This topic uses an example to demonstrate how you can use the Waitfor task and Signal task to determine the order in which tasks are executed This is useful when you are running more than one process in a protocol and you want a particular task in one process to be performed before a particular task in another process In this example the Administrator or Technician creating the protocol wants to make sure that a bar code is applied to plate 1 before plate 2 The operator creates the protocol shown in the following diagram Waitfor task 384 Falcon TC Downstack from Incubate fer 10 Plate Black 353962 VStack4 sec called unnamed 1 Signal task Signal Label me second Fpply label 41 Upstack to VStack3 f gt fi aston P Jt 1 Packard Lid Downstack from Label me second Foply label Upstack to called unnamed 2 VStack2 VStack1 The order in which plate 1 and plate 2 are processed is selected by the scheduler program Without the Waitfor and Signal tasks this would also be the case for the bar coding operation However in this protocol the Waitfor task called Label Me Second is in
389. or hardware problem that you cannot resolve after reading the chapter on maintenance and troubleshooting read the information in this topic for how to report problems If you find a problem in the Velocity 1 software let us know by Q Sending a bug report from within VWorks Q Sending an email to service velocity11 com or euroservice velocity11 com Q Calling the Velocity11 Service Center at 1 800 979 4811 or 1 650 846 6611 When resolving software bugs or other problems we may ask you to send device and protocols files and the Velocity11 registry file from the Windows registry If you find a problem with this user guide or have suggestions for improvement please take a minute or two to give us your feedback using the feedback button in the online help Your comments will be reviewed promptly and used to write the next version of the guide MX You can also send an email directly to documentation velocity11 com For information about See Sending registry files Moving or sending a registry file on page 372 Reporting a bug Sending a bug report on page 518 7 8 Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide VWorks User Guide VWorks overview This chapter introduces VWorks and its user interface This chapter also includes a list of devices that are supported by VWorks 10 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Basic description About this topic What is VWorks About protocols The
390. orks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a Vici Multiport Valve profile on page 497 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the Vici Multiport Valve device properties on page 498 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Vici Multiport Valve task Setting the Vici Multiport Valve task parameters parameters on page 499 Using Vici Multiport Valve Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics Diagnostics on page 500 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using 497 VWorks User Guide Creating a Vici Multiport Valve profile About this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Vici Multiport Valve device in VWorks Before you start Before you can create a profile you need to add the device to the device manager Procedure To create a Vici Multiport Valve profile 1 Open Vici Valve Diagnostics 2 Click the Profile tab ici alye Diagnostics ersion 4 0 0 Profile Command Profile Management Profile Options Profile name Vici X Create a new profile Create a copy of this profile Delete this profile Update this profile Initialize this profile 3 Click Create a new profile enter a name for the device in the Create Profile dialog box and click OK COM1 COM pot 10 Number of pos
391. orks just knows what it does with every plate during a protocol and so is able to track where each plate goes Plate groups make use of this tracking system Note You cannot use a plate group with a Load task you have to specify a location group You can though associate a plate group with the location group so that the plates that are loaded are immediately given a plate group Example A plate group in a plate storage device contains the following plates Q Plate 26 Q Plate 31 Q Plate 41 Q Plate 107 These plates are scattered around storage device not in adjacent slots of the same cassette When the Unload task uses this plate group it moves these plates out of the storage device into the system When to use Plate groups are typically used in compound management systems where plates are housed in the storage device almost permanently For each protocol a different plate group is unloaded run and then loaded back to a storage device A single plate can be a member of more than one plate or location group Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 313 VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Creating a location group Creating a location group on page 313 Creating a plate group Creating a plate group on page 316 Moving plates in and out of a Q Moving plates into a storage storage device device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on pa
392. ormed on the plate Filter Pad whose face is indented so that it can accommodate a filter plate type Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the platepad device properties on page 137 Related information For information about See Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 Using the platepad tasks Q Setting Mount Dismount task parameters on page 200 U Setting Place Plate task parameters on page 204 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 137 VWorks User Guide Setting the platepad device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to set the platepad device properties Before you can set the device properties you must add the platepad to the device manager To set the device properties for a standard vacuum or filter platepad 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the platepad s generic properties x Device Properties E General Di st E e System Eig Beckman Multimek Pipettor Device name PlatePad 5 multimek Device type Plate Pad Yacuum E Human Robot Approach height mm 9 A Human robot Allowed prohibited labware El F PlateLoc Thermal Plate Sealer E Teachpoints a PlateLoc1 Device is accessible from robot Human robot No B s Plate Pad Vacuum Device is accessible from robot Rob
393. ostar 96 pp black ag Edit labware settings Plugin friicheader dil x Simultaneous 1 plates 0 Fates have lids O Plates enter the system sealed 2 Populate the Apply label task fields a Click the Apply label icon in the Protocol Editor b Populate the Apply label task fields with the From user plugin button Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings South West North East Printing Option Use this label Re Format to use 1 From File Number of Fields 2 Increment Field 1 NAWTINC ti Field 2 FILE Dae z Field 3 FILE Use existing barcode Field 4 from South side Field 5 From text database Field 6 use South 7 sida Increment Chars 1 From user plugin Starting Increment 1001 Numeric 0 9 Alphanumeric 0 2 O O Verify bar codes and reapply up to 0 times Bar Code File Entry Bar Codes NOT in file d c Ifyou would like to use prefixes or suffixes enter them before or after PLUGIN in the relevant Field text box An example field with a prefix is shown in the following screenshot Field 2 Prefix PLUGI Running the protocol Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 303 VWorks User Guide To run a protocol with a FileReader plugin file l 2 3 Open the protocol that you created to use the FileReader plugin Click Start from VWorks to start the protocol Select the plug in text file from the dialog box that opens Open a
394. ot Yes Teachpoint for robot Robot E Velocity11 Robot E Bar code Readers Ay Robot Device has south side BCR No Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No Delete device E Plate Pad Vacuum properties Initialize all devices Output number 2 Sensor input number 3 Device diagnostics Expand the Plate Pad Type properties group If you are configuring a Vacuum platepad on a BioCel enter its properties Note Vacuum platepads can only be used with BioCels a Inthe Output number field enter the number that the Bio I O uses to turn on the vacuum b In the Sensor input number field enter the number that the Bio I O uses to detect the presence of a vacuum 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 138 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Opening platepad s device properties page Adding a device Saving the device file The workflow this topic belongs to Using the platepad tasks See Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the platepad on page 136 U Setting Place Plate task parameters on page 204 Q Setting Mount Dismount task parameters on page 200 Workflow for configuring the PlatePierce About this topic This topic desc
395. otocols The purpose of VWorks is to run protocols which are sequences of tasks that determine how the plates are manipulated by the various devices in your lab automation system Pipette Process Editor page The Pipette Process Editor page also known as the pipette process editor is used to create pipette tasks that perform liquid handling procedures Post Protocol Editor page The Post Protocol Editor page also known as the post protocol editor is used to create post protocol processes Post protocols are processes that are carried out once after the protocol is executed Typically these processes contain pipette tasks For example a post protocol can be set to flush lines with a buffer or cleaning agent at the completion of a protocol Device Manager page The Device Manager page also known as the device manager is used to set up and configure the system All instruments and robots that are controlled by VWorks must be set up as devices In addition labware and liquid classes used by some instruments are configured here Each of the toolbars is briefly described here Main toolbar This is the Main toolbar eH w s Bele The Main toolbar contains buttons for common commands such as creating new protocol files copying cutting pasting and printing You can get information about each button by resting your mouse over it Control toolbar This is the Control toolbar Log Out Compile P Stat f Pause
396. ounts IMPORTANT If you do not assign a password to a user a blank password is automatically assigned This means that anybody can log in You must be logged in with an Administrator user account to add a user account To add a user account 1 Select Tools gt Manage Users 2 Inthe User Editor dialog box click Add 3 Inthe User name text box type a name for the user 4 From the Access level list box select the privilege that you want to assign to the user 5 Assign a password a Click Change password b Enter a password in the New text box c Re type the password in the Confirm New text box d Click OK 6 Click OK You must be logged in with an Administrator user account to delete a user account To delete a user account 1 Select Tools gt Manage Users 2 Inthe User name text box select the user you want to delete 3 Click Delete If you attempt to delete the account that is currently in use you receive an error message 4 Inthe Confirm Delete dialog box click Yes The password is deleted 371 372 Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide Moving or sending a registry file About this topic When to do this About moving data Important This topic provides instructions on how to export a Windows registry file for import to another computer or for emailing to Velocity11 Q To propagate a labware or liquid library database to other devices using a different
397. out a robot or when you are developing an assay with a few plates Human robot The human robot is any person who is tasked with moving a piece of defined labware within a lab automation system It is added to VWorks like any other device When employed for use within a protocol the protocol run pauses when encountering a human robot task VWorks displays a message and continues after you indicate the task is completed Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the human robot device properties on page 123 Related information For information about See Setting up devices Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Using the human robot ina Using the human robot in a protocol process on page 124 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 123 VWorks User Guide Setting the human robot device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure Related information To use the human robot as a device you need to make the instruments you want to use accessible to the robot in VWorks This topic describes how to make an instrument accessible to manually move the plates to and from the human robot Before you start to configure the human robot you need to add the human robot device to the device manager The Device name and Device type are the only device properties that require setting for the human robot and these are completed when you add it to the device manager
398. out this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to add a labware entry The first step in defining labware such as a plate is to create a labware entry for it You must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account to perform this procedure To add a labware entry l 2 Open the labware editor Under the labware selection box on the left of the window click New labware entry New labware entry In the New Labware Entry dialog box enter a name for the plate and click OK The entry appears in the labware selection box Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 343 VWorks User Guide 384 ABGene deepwell 384 ABGene short well plate 384 Matrix clear polystyrene 384 REMP micro tube rack 384 REMP square well 96 ABGene deepwell block 96 ABGene tube rack TRIPOS 96 Matrix clear polystyrene 96 Matrix tube rack 96 Micronics tube rack ALSB Costar 384 black flatbottom Costar 384 polypro round bottom Costar 96 well plate Falcon 384 clear bottom Falcon 384 clear polystyrene Matrix 96 well Block Polypro MJ Research 384 well plate Polyfiltronics 384 Filter plate Test plate Tip Box Lid 11 Autofilling Reservoir 384 11 Autofilling Reservoir 96 11 Manual Reservoir 384 11 MicroWash 384 V11 MicroWash 96 11 Tip Box 384d30 V11 Tip Box 384d40 11 Tip Box 96d200 Related information For information about See Opening the labware editor Opening t
399. ox To prime the FlexiSpense M 1 Open the Flexispense M Diagnostics Priming vata 2 Enter the volume in microliters for each prime 3 Click Prime Related information For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening FlexiSpense M Diagnostics Adding a device to the device manager Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using 435 VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M on page 428 Opening diagnostics software Adding devices on page 107 Setting Flexispense M task parameters on page 431 436 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using VWorks User Guide 437 VWorks User Guide Multidrop setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The Thermo Labsystems Multidrop is a 96 or 384 well dispenser capable of dispensing up to eight different liquids into one plate It can be integrated into a lab automation system that is run using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the Multidrop set the Multidrop task parameters and use Multidrop Diagnostics 438 Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Multidrop About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the Multidrop Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Creating a Multidrop pr
400. p a device Setting output and input I 0 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt See page 159 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring Waste on BioCel User Guide 161 VWorks User Guide Creating a protocol basics This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges It describes the basic process of creating a protocol To fully understand how to create a protocol you also need to read the information in the following chapters Q Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices on page 183 U Setting VPrep pipette task parameters on page 221 Q Creating a protocol advanced topics on page 267 Before reading this chapter you should Q Have installed VWorks VWorks installation on page 81 and set up your devices Setting up devices on page 101 Q Be familiar with the concepts presented in the chapter Performing a run on page 59 This chapter is not a tutorial on writing protocols it provides the basic reference information you need to write protocols 162 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide About protocol files About this topic This topic provides an overview of the protocol file format File format Protocols are created in the drag and drop protocol editor When they are saved the information is written to a f
401. page tab of the labware editor The properties on the VPrep Well Definition sub page are described in the following screenshot and table Properties on this sub page are only used for the VPrep and the Multimek Note Use calipers to carefully measure the labware you are defining in the labware editor Well Positions 2 25000 teachpoint to well mm 2 25000 teachpoint to well ram 4 50000 x well to well ram 4 50000 well to well mm Tip Parameters Disposable tip length mm Property Well tip volume Well depth Well diameter Well Geometry Well Bottom Shape X teachpoint to well Y teachpoint to well X well to well Y well to well Disposable tip length Related information Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 355 VWorks User Guide Description Maximum volume of fluid for one tip or well in microliters Distance from the top of the plate to the bottom of the well in millimeters Diameter of the well in millimeters Shape of the wells Options are Round or Square Shape of the well bottoms Options are Rounded Flat or VShaped Distance from the teachpoint to the center of the Al well along the x direction number axis in millimeters This setting should be 0 mm for standard 96 well plates and 2 25 mm for standard 384 well plates Distance from the teachpoint to the center of the Al well along the y direction letter axis in millimeter
402. pauseQ Pauses the protocol and opens a dialog box that asks you whether you want to continue or abort the run Use this function if you need to pause the protocol to for example replenish the fluid in a static reservoir You could use the printO function to add a note to the log toolbar describing the action to take when the VWorks has paused task isSimulatorRunning Returns true if this is a simulated run Has no arguments task repeatQ Schedules the task to be repeated None of the task object methods accept any parameters These are generic methods that are the same regardless of the task that is executing them The properties of these methods are specific to the current task 274 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide About variables Quadrant representation The default behavior of VWorks JavaScript is that the values of all variables are cleared set to undefined before the next protocol is run You have the option to change this so that the value of a variable assigned in a script is held in memory until VWorks is closed This means that if you assign the value to a variable in one protocol the same value will be used in the next protocol with the same variable This is the reset script context feature To clear the reset variables default option 1 Select Tools gt Protocol Options The Protocol Options dialog box opens 2 Inthe Pre Protocol Rules group box clear the Rese
403. pears Date Time Runs Plugin Protocol Notes Status Friday September 10 2005 1 00 13 PM 1 Scheduled Friday August 27 2005 12 00 19PM__ 1 Scheduled Es Select all lif Scheduled Friday August 27 2 Nested PM 1 Scheduled Friday August 27 2 PM 1 Scheduled Show all an Protocol C VWorks Workspacelprotocols Test3 pro Filter by columm gt Date Friday August 27 2005 Time 12 19 53 PM Runs 1 Linker empty Protocol Notes empty Status Scheduled 3 Select the value that you would like to filter on Runs that do not include this value are hidden After filtering a run set you can display all runs again To display all runs 1 Right click a data containing row in the Run Set Manager toolbar 2 Select Show all from the menu that appears All runs are now displayed 68 Chapter 4 Performing a run VWorks User Guide Deleting a run Saving run sets Opening a run set Stopping a run set To delete a run 1 Select a row in the Run Set Manager toolbar 2 Click Delete run To save a run set you must be logged on with an Administrator or Technician user account To save a run set 1 Select File gt Runset File gt Save To save the file in a different location select Save As If you open a previously created run set it is likely that some or all of the runs are scheduled to start in the past In this case make sure that you set new start dates and times so that they are in the
404. pette task parameters 1 Set up a protocol and pipette processes following the example shown above 2 Inthe Pipette Task Parameters toolbar from the list box select the first daughter plate for the plate icon to change instance on Task Settings Advanced Settings Select the plate to change instance on f Jaughter Plate 1 Spawn Control O Spawn plate only when needed Tn general you should do this only when running a script that uses the skip command 3 If you are using a script in the protocol that involves task skipping check the Spawn control check box to force VWorks to only bring in the next plate when the Change Instance task is reached The script may otherwise override this flow For more information about See Creating a pipette process Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Creating protocol basics Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting Loop task parameters Setting Loop pipette task parameters on page 248 232 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Setting Change Tips pipette task parameters About this topic Change Tips pipette task defined Before you start Overall process This topic describes how to set the Change Tips task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep The Change Tips pipette task uses the robot to apply or remove VPrep pipette tips Pairs of Change Tips pipette tasks are usually used to
405. petting operation See Related information at the end of this topic for more information about creating a pipet process The goal of the pipetting operation in this example is to pipette 20 uL of 1X TE buffer from a reservoir on a particular VPrep into a Costar 96 well plate The first step is to create a new protocol by setting up a plate icon for the plate you want to pipette into Name the plate icon Plate A and select the Costar 96 well plate as the plate type The next step is to add a Downstack task that downstacks a plate from an appropriate stacker Next you add a Pipette Process task Because there can be a number of Pipette Process tasks in a protocol this particular pipetting operation is identified by the name selected from the list box in the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar In this simple case there is only one name to select which is Process1 Task Parameters Use pipet process In this example there are two VPrep pipettors already configured in VWorks so you need to associate the one you want to use with the pipette process You do this in the Pipette Process Editor page In the following example the task will use VPrep1 VPrep2 remains available but is not used for this process Task Settings Advanced Settings Available pipettors VPrep2 Pipettors that this task will use VPrep1 Configuring the VPrep shelf Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameter
406. plate properties on page 348 Defining stacker properties on page 351 Defining VPrep well properties on page 354 Inserting an image on page 356 360 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide 361 VWorks User Guide Setting liquid handling definitions This chapter is for people Q With Administrator or Technician privileges Q Who write protocols that use VPrep and Multimek pipettors This chapter describes how to view and set up liquid classes that determine how liquids are pipetted 362 Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions VWorks User Guide About the liquid library editor About this topic Definition Liquid classes Liquid library database Using a liquid class Equation editor Screenshot This topic introduces the liquid library editor which is used to define liquid classes pipetting properties for liquids The liquid library editor is a dialog box through which users with Technician or Administrator privileges can enter values for properties that affect pipetting speed accuracy and precision The values entered into the liquid library editor can be saved as a collection known as a liquid class Using liquid classes saves time when writing protocols because you do not have to enter values for the liquid properties every time you create a protocol The data that represents a liquid class is saved to the liquid library database which is m
407. pply Label task parameters on page 185 Combining bar code modifiers About combining bar code modifiers on page 188 Configuring a VCode as a device Workflow for configuring the VCode on page 146 Bar code formats and symbologies VCode User Guide FileReader plug in About the FileReader plug in on page 298 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Setting Apply Label task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the parameters for the Apply Label task Before you start Before working with Apply Label tasks read the VCode User Guide to learn about bar codes and label formats Procedure To set Apply Label task parameters 1 Add the Apply Label task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar click a tab corresponding to aside of the plate The options are South West North and East Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings South west North East Printing option Use this label be Format to use 1 From file Number of fields 2 hneremen Date Feld Ea Field 3 isting bal Field 4 from South Field 5 text date Field 6 South Increment chars 3 M user ph Starting increment 1 Numeric 0 9 Alphanumeric 0 2 O O Verify bar codes and reapply up to i tim Bar code file entry Bar Codes NOT in file 3 Select one of the options in the Printing Option list box
408. privilege to perform a function associated with a particular menu command the text of the command is gray Q If you do not have the privilege to perform the functions accessed from a particular tabbed page the tab is not visible to you Q Insome cases if you do not have the privilege to perform an operation when you attempt the operation you get an error message telling you that your privileges are insufficient User roles and User roles enforce the following privileges privileges User role Has privileges to Guest Run existing protocols Operator Q Perform Guest functions see above Q Operate devices in real time using diagnostics software Technician Q Perform Operator functions see above Q Create and save protocols Q Edit the labware database and liquid library database Administrator 0 Perform Technician functions see above Q Manage devices through the device manager Q Create and delete user accounts Q Runa protocol that contains compiler errors Velocity11 Perform any function Used by Velocity11 personnel only Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide Adding and deleting a user account About this topic About blank passwords Adding a user account Deleting a user account We recommend that VWorks administrators create an account for every user The privileges set for the account should be appropriate for the user s job role This topic explains how to add and delete user acc
409. properties setting 450 diagnostics using 454 profile for creating 449 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 448 Multiskan Ascent task defined 452 setting parameters 452 VWorks User Guide Nanodrop device properties setting 467 diagnostics using 463 profile for creating 459 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 458 NanoDrop task defined 462 setting parameters 462 network integrating into existing 88 setting up new 88 network card 86 checking IP address 95 configuring 90 networking connecting to a LAN 94 multiple VCodes 94 safety 87 see also Ethernet networking kit see DHCP Server Kit notch locations property 353 Number of Cycles dialog box 62 O online help 3 opening the labware editor 344 protocols in VWorks 33 opening the labware editor 347 Operator privilege 370 options log and data file 49 protocol error 47 setting error 38 setting general 34 Orientation sensor offset property 352 orientation sensor threshold max property 352 orientation sensor threshold min property 352 P pager notification of errors by 40 374 password changing 28 first login 28 PDF guide 3 4 PerkinElmer Envision see Envision PerkinElmer PlateStak see PlateStak Pierce task defined 203 setting parameters 203 pipette log file 47 Pipette plates in instance order protocol rule 44 pipette process configuration settings 290 creating for changing pipet
410. protocol is a collection of processes which are executed once after the protocol The processes are created in the Post Protocol editor accessed by clicking the Post Protocol Editor tab in the main VWorks window A post protocol is typically used to clean the system after a protocol run When you click Start a pre protocol may run first followed by the protocol and then any post protocol processes A Pipette Process task is the parent of a sequence of pipette tasks that perform liquid handling procedures using a VPrep or Multimek A pipette process is sufficiently complex that it has to be defined by a group of separate sub tasks each with its own parameters An icon for a pipette process task is shown below W Pipette process 1 A run is a single protocol which includes any pre protocol and post protocol processes that is performed one or more times in a series When you start a run you are prompted to enter the number of cycles that you want to run The value that you enter represents the number of times the protocol executes before the run ends For example a value of four means that the protocol runs four times in the series The pipette process link icon is always the first icon in a pipette process The icon performs a similar function to a plate icon in that it does not represent a task itself but is the first icon in a pipette process The pipette process link icon s function is to link a pipette process task in th
411. pter describes how to configure the Genetix AliQuot set the AliQuot task parameters and use AliQuot Diagnostics 378 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the AliQuot About this topic This topic gives the workflow for configuring the AliQuot in VWorks Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating an AliQuot profile on page 379 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting AliQuot device properties on page 382 Related information For information about Setting up devices Setting AliQuot task parameters Using AliQuot Diagnostics Performing a fill test See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Using AliQuot Diagnostics on page 385 Performing a fill test on page 386 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using 379 VWorks User Guide Creating an AliQuot profile About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to create a profile for the AliQuot Before you can create a profile you must add the AliQuot to the device manager To create an AliQuot profile l Open AliQuot Diagnostics 2 Make sure that the AliQuot mode check box is selected Note If this check box is not selected the title bar will read QFill2 This is because the same underlying code is used to operate
412. puter d Ifyou are configuring a Reagent Tip box or Tip chute shelf type double click on the field next to Labware and select the labware from the list that is being used with the shelf For information about Opening VPrep shelf s device properties page The workflow this topic belongs to A description of VPrep shelves Setting up a device VPrep Diagnostics Saving the device file Pipette tasks See Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 VPrep User Guide Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 VPrep User Guide Adding devices on page 107 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 144 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring a vacuum station About this topic This topic presents a workflow for configuring a vacuum station in VWorks The vacuum station is a device that can hold filter plates and applies a vacuum for filtration Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the vacuum station device properties on page 145 Related information For information about See Setting up a device Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Saving the device file Adding devices on page 107 Vacuum station tasks Setting Vacuum task parameters on page 215 Ch
413. r ST6StackerDevice StackerDevice TeleshakeDevice TeleshakeHighSpeedDevice UltramarkDevice V11Labware dll V11Liquids dll V11Security dll VCode3KDevice ViciValveDevice VLidDevice VPrepDevice VSpinAccess2Device VSpinDevice WellMateDevice ZeissReaderDevice See Device Driver User Guide Version 4 1 8 4 2 3 2 3 3 1 12 0 5 0 3 0 10 1 4 0 1 3 17 2 4 2 1 2 2 1 5 Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide Finding your software versions About this topic This topic shows you some ways to find out your versions of VWorks and VWorks Diagnostics From the software You can open the software to find the version of VWorks or device diagnostics To find the VWorks version number 1 Start VWorks 2 Navigate to Help gt About VWorks To find the diagnostics version number 1 Start VWorks 2 Open diagnostics for the device 3 Read the version number on the title bar From the files You can look at the version information in the executable files To find the VWorks or diagnostics version number 1 Navigate to C VWorks Workspace bin 2 Right click VWorks exe or lt filename gt ocx a diagnostics file and select Properties 3 Click the Version tab Chapter 1 Introduction VWorks User Guide Reporting VWorks problems About this topic Reporting software problems Sending files Reporting user guide problems Related information If you find a bug in the software or have a technical
414. r 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Pipette Task Parameters toolbar This is the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar Pipette Task Parameters ay x Task Settings Advanced Settings Mixing volume UL Number of mixing cycles Aspirate velocity L s Aspirate acceleration uL s Dispense velocity L s Dispense acceleration jIL s 90 75 90 75 y Distance from well bottom rm Retract distance mm yL P Pre aspirate volume LL 0 Lastcycle blowout volume LL E Quadrant s gt j i 000004 00000 000004 000004 000004 000004 000004 000004 The Pre Post Protocol Tasks toolbar can only be viewed from the Pipette Process Editor page The fields in this toolbar are specific to the task selected Pre Post Protocol Tasks toolbar This is the Pre Post Protocol Tasks toolbar Pre Post Protocol Tasks x M Deliver Tip Tray Multimek i Empty Tips Simple Multimek it Mix gt Place Labware it Remove Tip Tray Multimek Run Macro Multimek Osia LD User Message QD weit The Pre Post Protocol Tasks toolbar can be viewed from the Pre Protocol Editor and the Post Protocol Editor pages 17 18 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar This is the Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings Which device would you like to use
415. r Guide Setting the VCode device properties About this topic Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the VCode device properties To set the VCode device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the VCode generic properties je BCR o E VCode 3k Bar Code Print and Apply Station properties N Ne No Ni Ni N ethernet 3 Expand the VCode Bar Code Print and Apply properties group a Ifyou have a VCode 3K Bar Code Print and Apply Station double click in the field next to the Profile name and select the profile b Ifyou have a VCode pre 2003 Bar Code Print and Apply Station double click in the field next to COM port and select the port your VCode is using to connect to the controlling computer 4 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save For information about See Opening VCode device properties page The workflow this topic belongs to on page 146 Setting up a device page 106 Saving the device file VCode tasks parameters Creating and managing profiles VCode User Using VCode Diagnostics VCode User Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the VCode Workflow for setting up devices on Adding devices on page 107 About setting Apply Label task on page 184 Guide Guide 148 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWor
416. r in which you want to save the file In the File name text box type a name of your choice for the file If you are moving the file to a computer with a different Windows operating system select the appropriate recipient operating system from the Save as type list box if one is available 10 Click Save 11 Select Registry gt Exit or File gt Exit to close the registry editor To import a registry key 1 Copy the registry file to any location on the recipient computer 2 On the recipient computer double click the registry file The information in the file will be written automatically to the registry Occasionally you may be asked to send a registry file to Velocity11 To email a registry file 1 Export the Windows registry key containing the data to a file 2 Zip the file or change its extension to re_ This is necessary because many Exchange servers do not allow reg files to be emailed 3 Email the file 374 Chapter 15 Administrator procedures VWorks User Guide Setting up email About this topic When to use Requirements for email setup Setting up email This topic describes how to set up your VWorks email so that you can send a bug report to Velocity11 or be notified of run errors by a page or email Email setup in VWorks enables you to do the following tasks Q Automatically be notified by email or pager when errors occur during a protocol run Q Send a bug report to Velocity11
417. r1 In the protocol process that is downstacking the lower plate for example an elution plate add the Mount task at the position you want to mount the plate errr E Filtrate reservoir Downstack from Mount Filtert called Butiont Stack Select the Mount task In the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the labware you want to mount from the list box x Task Settings advanced Settings Mount which filter plate or lid Filter1 201 202 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide To set the Dismount task parameters 1 Add the Dismount task to the protocol process to which you ve added the Mount task There are no task parameters for the Dismount task In the following example the mounted filter plate sandwiched with the lower plate was centrifuged and then the filter plate was dismounted and discarded to waste The lower or elution plate was then upstacked gt J YY Y J m Filtrate reservoir Downstack from Mount Filter1 Spin on Centrifuge Dismount Upstack to called Butiont Stack for 20 seconds to Stacker3 1200 RPM at 100 accel 100 braking gt 11 _ 9 7 Fitter plate called Downstack from Fitter1 Transfer plate to Fitterplate1 Stack2 waste Related information For information about See Using the Labware Editor Setting labware definitions on page 337 Adding tasks to protocols Adding
418. rage bay device properties 00 000 e ee 129 Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics 2 0 0 ce ee 130 Table of Contents VCode User Guide Workflow for configuring the PlateLoc 0000 ee ee 132 Creating a PlateLoc profile 0 tanao t e Eaa o T a es 133 Setting the PlateLoc device properties 0 es 135 Workflow for configuring the platepad 2 ce es 136 Setting the platepad device properties 2 0 es 137 Workflow for configuring the PlatePierce 0002 eee ee 138 Creating a PlatePierce profile 2 DE D a es 139 Setting the PlatePierce device properties 2 00 ees 140 Workflow for configuring a VPrep Shelf 0 000 cee eee 141 Setting VPrep shelf device properties 2 0 ce ees 142 Workflow for configuring a vacuum station 00 es 144 Setting the vacuum station device properties 2 000 eee eee 145 Workflow for configuring the VCode 0 0 2 eee ees 146 Setting the VCode device propertieS 1 es 147 Workflow for configuring the VPrep 2 ee es 148 Creating a VPrep profile e dareena e e a e E es 149 Setting the VPrep device propertieS 1 teneor te era es 150 Workflow for configuring the VSpin 00000 ee 151 Creating a VSpin DIOE s aaea ba e tane a anaa o es 152 Setting VSpin device properties reu e waea E E a ees 153 Workflow for configuring the VSpin with AcceSs2 0 00000 cee eee 154 Cr
419. rane style robot delivers a plate to the Access2 which then places it inside the VSpin Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a VSpin with Access2 profile on page 155 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the VSpin with Access2 device properties on page 156 Related information For information about Setting up a device Managing profiles and settings VSpin with Access2 tasks Using VSpin with Access2 Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Access2 User Guide Setting VSpin with Access2 task parameters on page 216 Access2 User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 155 VWorks User Guide Creating a VSpin with Access2 profile About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to create a profile for the VSpin with Access2 using VWorks For information about profile settings and managing profiles see the VSpin User Guide Before you can create a profile you must add the VSpin with Access2 to the device manager To create a VSpin with Access2 profile 1 Inthe VSpinAccess2 Diagnostics dialog box click the Profiles tab Profiles Select Profile 2 Inthe Select Profile group box click Create a new profile enter a name for the profile in the New Profile dialog box and click OK Profiles Select Profile
420. reaches that particular step in that cycle When you simulate or run a protocol that contains breakpoints you are presented with some dialog boxes that are special for breakpoints The Debugger dialog box has four buttons Q Clear all breakpoints This allows the protocol to continue The protocol will no longer stop at that step for the rest of the run U Single step This advances the protocol one task at a time Q Continue This advances the protocol until the next breakpoint Q Abort This ends the protocol E Debugger xi Execution stopped at lt plate name gt 1 bar code No bar code Downstack from Stacker1 Clear all breakpoints Single step Continue Abort Setting a breakpoint Removing breakpoints Related information Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 177 VWorks User Guide This procedure describes how to add a breakpoint to your protocol You can add as many breakpoints as you want to a protocol To set a breakpoint 1 Right click the task icon where you want the breakpoint 2 Select Set breakpoint from the menu that appears A red dot appears on the icon to indicate that it is a breakpoint _ Delid You can remove breakpoints individually or you can remove all breakpoints at once To remove a breakpoint 1 Right click the task icon where there is breakpoint 2 Select Remove breakpoint from the menu that appears To remove all breakpoints in a protocol 1
421. reader another side of the plate 3 Select the side of the plate from the from side side list box below the Use existing bar code button b Click Use existing bar code This places the code BC in the text box Note This option copies a single field from another side of the plate The similar option selected in the Printing Options list box copies an entire bar code from another side of the plate A series of bar codes a Make sure that you have set up a bar from a bar code input code input file and selected it in VWorks file general options b Make sure that the number of bar codes specified in the series of the bar code input file that you want to use is equal to or greater than the number of labels that you want to print c Select the series in the Bar code file entry list box at the bottom of the toolbar Note If there are no entries in the Bar code file entry list box other than the default text you need to set the location of the bar code input file d Click From File This places the code FILE in the text box IMPORTANT If you use this option in two fields the same data will be printed in both fields You cannot enter different data into fields using this method Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide If you want to print Then A series of bar codes by referencing bar codes on another side of the plate using
422. reater than Limited Rights as defined in FAR 52 227 14 June1987 or DFAR 252 227 7015 b 2 November 1995 as applicable in any technical data Safety Noticies A A WARNING notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in personal injury or death Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met A CAUTION notice denotes a hazard It calls attention to an operating procedure practice or the like that if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in damage to the product or loss of important data Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION notice until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Letter to our Customers Dear Customer see sf Agilent Technologies The Agilent Technologies acquisition of Velocityl1 resulted in the following changes e Creation of Agilent Technologies Automation Solutions formerly Velocity11 e Renaming of some Velocityl1 products e New Customer Service and Technical Support contact information e New website address for product information Please make a note of the following changes as they impact this user guide Velocity11 product name changes Velocity11 product name Changes to Access2 Automated Microplate Loader Automated Centrifuge Loader Element Automation System BioCel 900 System
423. ribes how to set up the PlatePierce in VWorks The PlatePierce is an instrument that pierces sealed plates to allow liquids to be aspirated from and dispensed into the wells Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a PlatePierce profile on page 139 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting the PlatePierce device properties on page 140 Related information For information about Setting up a device Using the PlatePierce task Using PlatePierce Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting Pierce task parameters on page 203 PlatePierce User Guide Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 139 VWorks User Guide Creating a PlatePierce profile About this topic Before you start Procedure This topic describes how to create a profile for the PlatePierce in VWorks Before you can create a profile you must add the PlatePierce to the device manager To create a PlatePierce profile l In the PlatePierce Diagnostics dialog box click Create PlatePierce Diagnostics ersion 4 1 1 Profiles Options a oe COM 1 y COM port Delete i 45 Pierce pressure psi Supply pressure SUPE PIES sae ritiall psi Test Cycle E Pierce pressure tart psi psi Ad Odometer Enter a name for the PlatePierce in the Create New Profile dialog box and click OK
424. rms a successful connection MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver Yersion 03 51 06 3 xj G Data Source velocity11 Connected Successfully to mysqgld 4 0 17 nt 526 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting VWorks User Guide Index Index 527 VWorks User Guide Note You can also use the online help to search for information Download the latest version from www velocityl 1 com support support html Symbols bar filename extension 34 bwl file format 23 csv file format 488 dev file format 23 xml file format 23 A aborting a run 69 acceleration property 364 365 accuracy calibration 366 Acrobat Reader 4 Acrobat viewer 4 adding labware entries 342 344 liquid library entries 364 user accounts 377 Administrator privilege 370 Advanced Settings tab 270 alarm adding 53 AliQuot device properties setting 382 diagnostics using 385 fill test performing 386 profile for creating 379 supported instrument 77 workflow for configuring 378 Aliquot task defined 384 setting parameters 384 Apply Label task 298 defined 184 JavaScript properties 276 setting parameters 185 aspirate acceleration 250 262 Aspirate pipette task adding 224 defined 228 JavaScript properties 278 setting parameters 228 aspirate velocity 249 262 aspirate liquid class 228 aspiration quadrant 229 associating a plate with labware class 359 ASYS Hitech FlexiSpense see FlexiSpense ASYS Hitech Flex
425. rocesses that are carried out once before the protocol is executed Post protocols are processes that are carried out once after the protocol is executed Use the pre protocol editor when you want a task performed one time before the protocol runs For example if you are dispensing reagents you may want to prime a pump with fluid Use the post protocol editor when you want to perform a task one time after the protocol runs For example you may want to purge lines with a buffer or cleaning agent To set up a pre or post protocol process 1 Click the Pre Protocol Editor or the Post Protocol Editor tab If the tab is not available a Click Tools and select Options b Select the Show Pre Post Protocol Editor check box c Click OK 2 Click Add A pre protocol process icon appears in the Pre Protocol Editor or the Post Protocol Editor window 1 3 unnamed 1_ 3 Ifthe Task Parameters toolbar is not showing click View and select Toolbars gt Protocol Parameters Type in a name for the process in the Process name field Create the pre protocol process as you would a protocol process by adding tasks and then setting the task parameters 6 When you are finished compile and check your pre or post protocol Related information Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 269 VWorks User Guide For information about See Creating a protocol process Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 C
426. rofile on page 413 419 VWorks User Guide FlexiSpense setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges The FlexiSpense is a liquid dispenser for 96 and 384 well microplates that can be integrated into a lab automation system using VWorks This chapter describes how to configure the FlexiSpense set the FlexiSpense task parameters and use FlexiSpense Diagnostics 420 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense About this topic This topic gives the workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 2 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Setting the FlexiSpense device properties on page 421 Related information For information about Setting up devices Setting FlexiSpense task parameters Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Setting FlexiSpense task parameters on page 422 Using FlexiSpense Diagnostics on page 424 Chapter 20 FlexiSpense setting up and using 421 VWorks User Guide Setting the FlexiSpense device properties About this topic Before you start Procedure Related information This topic describes how to set the FlexiSpense device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the
427. rom the Quadrant s diagram to indicate which well quadrant of the plate you want to dispense to To select a quadrant click a representative well Two possible examples are shown below Quadrant s Quadrant s Oooo oooc ooocd O00 ooo d Oooo ooocdc ele hele Type a value for the Inflow pump which is the relative rate of liquid flow into the MicroWash tray manifold This value should be high enough for the washing liquid to just bubble over the tops of the chimneys Type a value for the Outflow pump which is the relative rate of liquid flow out of the MicroWash tray manifold This value should be zero If you want to dispense the wash liquid to waste instead of dispensing it back into the reservoir of washing liquid a Select the Dispense to waste at height of check box 263 264 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 7 b Type a value into the associated text box for the height above the chimney from which you want the liquid to be dispensed The value can be a positive or negative number The pipette tips move up and sideways to dispense the wash liquid between the chimneys into waste If you want the tips to touch the outside tops of the chimneys to remove drops from the tips a Select the Enable tip touching check box This is the height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells Type a value for the Tip touch horizontal dist
428. rror for each type of plate you use 284 VWorks User Guide Property task tipOffset task tipTouch task tipTouchHorizontalDi stance task tiptouchRiseHeight task tipTouchSides task volume Property task numberOfLoops Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics Data type Task parameters Comments The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys Distance from well bottom Float If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel Boolean Enable tip touching Whether you want the tips to touch the sides of the plate wells or not When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want the tips to touch harder increase this value If you want the tips to touch more lightly enter a negative value Float Tip touch horiz dist Float Tip touch rise height The height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells The number of sides of the wells that you want the tips to touch Number of sides to touch Integer Float Mixing volume The volume of liquid to be aspirated and dispensed to each plate well Loop task These properties are the same as the properties described for the Loop task Data type
429. run Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Select program to run Select washer to use Washer 3 Ifyou want to see the parameters used for that program modify a program or create a program click Show Programs This opens the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics dialog box 4 If your system has more than one Bio Tek washer select the one to use for this task from the Select washer to use list box Related information For information about Setting the Bio Tek Device Properties Adding a device Adding tasks to protocols Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek Using Bio Tek Diagnostics See Setting the Bio Tek device properties on page 390 Adding devices on page 107 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Workflow for configuring the Bio Tek on page 390 Using Bio Tek Diagnostics on page 393 Chapter 17 Bio Tek setting up and using 393 VWorks User Guide Using Bio Tek Diagnostics About this topic About linked programs Setting basic properties This topic describes how to use the Bio Tek Washer Diagnostics to U Set basic properties Q Create a program Q Execute a program manually The Bio Tek ELx405 can be controlled through the built in keypad on the washer In addition Velocityl11 has developed a user interface Bio Tek Active X to allow you to operate an ELx405 using a computer that is running VWorks IMPORTANT
430. run Method See Set up a single protocol run and Starting a run from VWorks on manually start it by clicking the Start page 61 button in the VWorks Set up a single protocol in advance Starting a run from a command and manually start it from a command line on page 64 line Set up a run set which consists of one O About starting runs or more protocol runs that are started automatically on page 65 automatically based on times that you set in advance Q Working with the run set manager on page 66 Whichever way you choose to start a run you would typically perform a number of pre run checks What you do next depends on whether you are going to run a single protocol or a run set If you are going to run a single protocol at this point the protocol you plan to run has been created and opened in VWorks The next step is to start the run as described in Starting a run from VWorks on page 61 If you are going to run a run set you first have to create it The following topics explain how to do this Q About starting runs automatically on page 65 Q Working with the run set manager on page 66 During the run you might monitor the progress as described in Monitoring a run on page 71 and Working with the Log toolbar on page 75 If you need to stop the run when it is in progress follow the directions in Pausing and stopping a run on page 69 When the run h
431. s Performing a fill test See Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for configuring the AliQuot on page 378 Creating an AliQuot profile on page 379 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Using AliQuot Diagnostics on page 385 Performing a fill test on page 386 384 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the AliQuot task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the AliQuot task parameters in the VWorks Aliquot task defined The AliQuot task moves a plate to an AliQuot where liquid is dispensed into the plate Procedure To set Aliquot task parameters 1 Add the Aliquot task to the protocol 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar type the volume of liquid that you want to dispense in the Enter dispense volume text box 3 Inthe Available devices list select the AliQuot device that you want to use for this task and click Add The name of the device moves to the Devices to use list 4 Ifyou intend to use a filter plate a Select the Use filtration check box b Complete the Begin filtration sentence to enter the remaining parameters The After filtration delay is the time after the filtration has stopped before the plate can be picked up DAMAGE HAZARD Ifthe After filtration dela
432. s This setting should be 0 mm for standard 96 well plates and 2 25 mm for standard 384 well plates Distance from well center to well center in the x direction in millimeters This setting should be 9 mm for standard 96 well plates and 4 5 mm for standard 384 well plates Distance from well center to well center in the y direction in millimeters This setting should be 9 mm for standard 96 well plates and 4 5 mm for standard 384 well plates Length of the disposable tips being used in millimeters For information about See Opening the labware editor on page 341 Opening the labware editor Creating a labware entry before Adding a labware entry on page 342 defining it Defining general properties on page 347 Defining general properties Defining plate properties Defining plate properties on page 348 Defining stacker properties on page 351 Defining stacker properties What to do next Inserting an image on page 356 356 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Inserting an image About this topic sub page of the labware editor Before you start format Procedure To insert an image This topic describes how to add an image of the labware to the Image Make sure that the image file you want to add is in the JPG GIF or BMP 1 Click the Image sub page tab of the labware editor 2 Click the ellipsis button and browse to the folder location
433. s Uninstalling VWorks on page 99 Chapter 5 VWorks installation 85 VWorks User Guide Choosing between serial and Ethernet About this topic Some devices can be connected to the controlling computer by both serial and Ethernet connections In most cases whether you use serial or Ethernet to connect your device depends on the device However if you do have a choice of connection type for your device reading this topic can help you decide which to use Connection options You can connect one or more devices to the controlling computer using either Q Aserial network L An Ethernet network How to choose Why serial might be better Connecting the computer to devices using a serial cable is simpler than connecting with an Ethernet cable With serial there is no network card to install no IP addressing to set up and no software to install Serial connections have another advantage If your controlling computer has an Ethernet network card you do not have to use it for the lab automation network so you can use it to connect to your building s general Ethernet network If you want to set up an Ethernet network you will have to install a second network card Why Ethernet might be better Ethernet is a faster more reliable and more flexible communication technology than serial Depending on the specifications of your computer you may experience communication problems with a serial network in which case you will have to u
434. s on page 102 The documentation provided with the robot you are using Setting labware definitions on page 337 Setting liquid handling definitions on page 361 Administrator procedures on page 369 Configuration component relationships Related information Chapter 2 VWorks overview 23 VWorks User Guide Refer to the table below to understand the relationships of these VWorks configuration components Component Extension Opening this file loads Protocol pro Q VWorks if it is not already running Q Device file Q Profile for each device Q Teachpoint file Device File dev Q Profile for each device Q Teachpoint file Profile None Teachpoint file you are prompted Teachpoint File txt Teachpoint definitions For information about Exporting and importing Windows registry files See Moving or sending a registry file on page 372 24 Chapter 2 VWorks overview VWorks User Guide 25 VWorks User Guide Preparing for a run This chapter describes how to start VWorks and prepare it to run an existing protocol All of the procedures in this chapter and the following chapter Performing a run on page 59 can be performed by someone with Operator privileges All procedures in this chapter assume that VWorks has been installed and set up and that protocols have been created For information on installation setup and protocol creation see Q VWorks installation
435. s for the shake process in the Time field b Enter the amount of time in seconds you want to shake for each shake interval in the On period field c Enter the amount of time in seconds you want to rest in between shake periods in the Off period field d Select the shaking frequency from the Frequency list box 6 Select the filter to use for the reading from the Filter name list box Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using 455 VWorks User Guide 7 Select the correct plate type from the Well count list box 8 Select the type of read motion you want to use from the Move type list box 9 Select the type of measurement you want to use from the Measurement mode list box 10 Click the ellipsis button to open the Browse for Folder dialog box and select the folder to which you want the read data to be saved 11 Type in any notes you want to record for the plate read in the Notes field 12 Click Measure plate 13 To stop the read after it has started click Abort Managing profiles To edit an existing profile l 2 3 Click the Profiles tab in the Multiskan Ascent dialog box From the Profile list box select the profile you want to modify Edit the profile settings and click Update this profile to save the changes To duplicate an existing profile 1 2 3 4 Click the Profiles tab in the Multiskan Ascent dialog box From the Profile list box select the profile you want to duplicate
436. s 223 VWorks User Guide You want to aspirate 20 uL of 1X TE buffer from a reservoir This means that you have to configure a shelf of the VPrep to hold the reservoir that will contain the buffer You decide to use a 384 V11 Reservoir manual fill 21 5 deep plate type for the reservoir We know that the VPrep itself has already been configured in VWorks as a device because you were able to select it in the previous step We can also see it listed as a device in the device manager To open the device manager you click the Device Manager tab E Prep Precision Pipetting Station VPrep2 VPrep1 Each shelf that you want to use on the VPrep must also be configured as a device The shelves are already set up as devices but you need to make sure that shelf 1 where you want to place the buffer reservoir is configured correctly Again looking at the device manager you see that there are two shelves configured as reagent shelves which can hold reservoirs Shelf Reagent reservoir reservoir2 On selecting reservoir 1 you see that it is assigned to shelf 1 of VPrep 2 which is what you want However the labware associated with the shelf is the wrong type E General Device name reservoirl Device type Shelf Reagent Approach height mm 12 7 Allowed prohibited labware E Shelf Reagent properties Shelf number 1 Parent device VPrep2 11 MicroWash 384 If you leave it as V11 MicroWash 384 the pipette tips may
437. s in the Protocol Options dialog box There are two rules in the Pre Protocol Rules group box Q Reset script context erase all variables before protocol executes Q Automatically load stacker racks Pre protocol Rules Reset script context erase all variables before protocol executes Automatically load stacker racks Select this option if you want all variables to be cleared before the next protocol is executed Select this option if you want all racks on VStacks to automatically load before the next protocol is executed For information about See What to do next Setting protocol rules on page 44 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for preparing a run on belongs to page 26 a Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Setting protocol rules About this topic Protocol rules Pipette plates in instance order This topic describes the protocol rules in the Protocol Options dialog box There are three rules in the Protocol Rules group box U Pipette plates in instance order Q Handle plates in instance order Q Automatically release stacker racks after protocol finishes Protocol Rules Pipette plates in instance order O Handle plates in instance order C Automatically release stacker racks after protocol finishes Default setting The default setting for the Pipette plates in instance order rule is for it to be checked and it should be left checked for most proto
438. s in the message that prompts you to unload the last counterweight that was loaded into the VSpin The robot moves the counterweight plate from the VSpin to the platepad with which the counterweight is associated VStack users only Click Yes in the dialog box that prompts you to release all VStack grippers If you have Administrator or Technician privileges and you have modified the protocol you can save the protocol Log out of VWorks Optionally shut down the robot and instruments on the lab automation system As an alternative to clicking Yes in step 2 of To clean up after a run you may want to use the Release Protocol Stackers command When used at the end of the run this command unloads or releases all VStacks that were used in the previous protocol To use the Release Protocol Stackers command l Select Tools gt Release Protocol Stackers For information about See Saving protocols Compiling protocols on page 179 Checking log files Q About log and data files on page 46 Q Importing a log file to Excel on page 51 Logging out of VWorks Logging out on page 79 Chapter 4 Performing a run 79 VWorks User Guide Logging out About this topic This topic describes how to log out of VWorks Logging out of VWorks ensures that unauthorized users do not use your account to control the system s devices For example an administrator should log out after making changes in the plate e
439. s inventory 305 VWorks inventory OVervieW nanasa ees 306 Setting up the inventory management database 22002 02ers 309 Opening the inventory editor 2 0 cc ee 310 Aboutinventory SfOups eriet aed baw ee da ee Ba ie i Sora heed 4 311 Creating a location group 1 eee 313 Creating a plate group 2 ees 316 Moving plates into a storage device 2 ee 318 Moving stored plates out of the system 0 0 0 es 321 Moving plates between storage deviceS 0 00 ce ees 324 Using a plate group to incubate plates 2 0 0 ee 326 Creating a plate group with a bar code input file 0 000 cee eee 329 Inventory editor views and filters 1 0 0 ec ee ee 331 Reinventorying the plate inventory 2 0 0 2 0c ee eee 333 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 337 About defining labware with the labware editor 00 000 eee eee 338 Labware editor OVenVieWe cee is a ee wear oe pele Ee es Eee Bete ese Be Boe te Ete ae 339 Opening the labware editor eai nei ee e eee 341 Adding a ldbware entry de oie be sureties aurea bs aie be ates 342 Deleting a labware entry osc overdo eiedee ana tied ane Sie ea hea eed 344 Renaming a labware entry 000 ee eee 345 Copying a labware entry 0 0 es 346 Defining general properties srra roere e a ee 347 Denning plate PropemieS leorie a eae eee Ae ee OEE BS ew We ees 348 Defining stacker properes
440. s of a 1536 well plate A 384 well head can dispense into a 384 well plate or the four quadrants of a 1536 well plate 288 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Property Data type task retract Float task tipOffset Float task tipTouch Boolean task tipTouchHorizontalDistance Float task tiptouchRiseHeight Float task volume Float Task parameters Retract distance Distance from well bottom Enable tip touch Tip touch horiz dist Tip touch rise height Wash volume Comments The distance that the tips should move upwards or downwards per unit volume of liquid being dispensed or aspirated This value allows the tips to move upwards or downwards during dispensing or aspirating to maintain a certain height below or above the surface of the liquid You will need to determine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you use The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel Whether you want the tips to touch the sides of the plate wells or not When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want the tips to touch harder increase this
441. s of the simulation Running the To run the simulator simulator 1 Turn the Simulator on by clicking the Simulation is off button on the toolbar iG Simulation is off The button changes to read Simulation is on cy Simulation is on 2 Click the Start button to run the protocol 182 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Changing execution times Related information Not all tasks have adjustable execution times but for those that do follow this procedure to change them To change the default task execution times 1 Select a task in a protocol sequence 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameters toolbar click the Advanced Settings tab 3 Atthe bottom of the toolbar enter a new value for the Estimated task execution time Estimated task execution time sec For information about See Breakpoints in runs Using breakpoints on page 176 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 183 VWorks User Guide Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices Tasks are used to execute protocols When a task is added to a protocol process you need to set parameters for that task Setting task parameters are typically done when constructing or modifying a protocol This chapter describes how to set the task parameters for Velocity11 devices For setting the task parameters for other companies devices see Setting task parameters o
442. s on the same label to contain different data from the same file in the same run without using prefixes and suffixes For information about See Using bar code input files Using bar code input files on page 293 The Apply Label task About setting Apply Label task parameters on page 184 Setting up the FileReader plug in Using the FileReader plug in in a protocol on page 301 About the FileReader file format About this topic Who should read this The header row This topic describes the format of the text file that is read by the FileReader plug in Technicians and administrators who write protocols with Apply Label VCode tasks and who want to use the FileReader plug in to read and process the label text The first row in the text file must contain a header row The header row is a human readable guide to show where the contents of each column will print The FileReader plug in will assume that the rest of the text contains the same text separation method as the header row For example if the header row uses a CSV format but the rest of the file uses a tab delimited format the FileReader plug in expects commas to separate the values in the file Having found none it assumes that the entire text for each row after the header row is one field A screenshot of a FileReader plug in text file is shown below This example is a tab delimited text file but a CSV text file could also be used 300 Ch
443. s printed during a VCode task Errors alert you to situations where a protocol or device will fail Compilation errors are listed in the Log toolbar and a dialog box opens telling you how many errors were found If you are logged in with Technician Operator User or Guest privileges you are unable to continue with the protocol If you are logged in with Administrator privileges the dialog box allows you to run the protocol despite the errors Errors are generated for example when Q Operating parameters are out of range denoted by red text in fields of the Task Parameters toolbar Q A task asks a VPrep to pipette from a plate that does not exist in the system U Volumes in pipette steps do not match such as when a dispense volume is greater than a previous aspirate volume Q Aspecific stacker has not been assigned to a stacker task Q A Signal task has no associated Waitfor task Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting 521 VWorks User Guide Resolving device errors About this topic Device initialization process Resolving initialization errors This topic describes the device initialization process and suggests some things you can try if you encounter problems with device initialization When you start VWorks the software loads the driver files for all the devices you have on your system A record of this process is displayed in the log toolbar When you open a protocol file the device file associated with
444. scribes how to set device properties and create profiles for the devices you added to the device file For each device you need to Q Set the generic device properties This sets general information such as allowed labware and which robot accesses the device Q Set the device specific properties This sets specific information such as the type of communication the device is using QO Create a profile This sets information such as the COM port that the device uses The profile settings and device properties that you need to set up vary according to the device You need to refer to the device specific documentation for detailed instructions Some devices are documented in this guide and others are in the Device Driver User Guide To create a profile and set properties for a device 1 Create a profile for the device See the following table 2 Set the generic properties for the device See Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 3 Set the specific properties for the device See the following table Save the device file Select File gt Device File gt Save The next time you compile or run a protocol that references the device file the new devices are registered with the Windows operating system This table lists where you need to look to get more information about setting profiles and device specific properties for each device For this device Look here to setupa And look here to set profi
445. se an Ethernet network Another advantage of Ethernet networking is that you can run many devices from a single network port on your computer Serial connections require one port for every device If you are planning to network multiple devices your computer may not have enough serial ports so you will have to add more Related information For information about See The workflow that this procedure Workflow for installing VWorks on belongs to page 82 86 Chapter 5 VWorks installation VWorks User Guide About Ethernet networking About this topic Network requirements About IP addresses This topic introduces some important concepts about Ethernet networking You can use Ethernet cables to make a stand alone connection between the computer and a device or to connect the computer to a dedicated lab automation local area network Both methods require that the controlling computer has an available network card Most computers come with one Ethernet network card and if you want to use this card to communicate with your lab s general network for email Internet access and so on you need to install an additional card to communicate between VWorks and the device or lab automation network You also need one or more Ethernet cables to make the physical connections and if you plan to connect multiple devices you need an Ethernet switch to connect the single Ethernet cable attached to your computer with the
446. ser Guide When the plate that is picked up does not match the bar code that VWorks expects in that position an error message is generated stating Scanned side bar code scanned bar code does not agree with expected expected bar code for plate at location Bar code confirmation ue Scanned south side bar code MPOM does not agree with expected SD0001 00 05 for plate at Stack01 Please enter the corect bar code To recover from a bar code error 1 Enter the correct bar code in the text box of the Bar code confirmation dialog box 2 Click OK The run continues For information about See Resolving errors in VCode bar VCode User Guide code readers Specifying bar coded sides for Setting up a plate icon on page 164 incoming plates 524 Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting VWorks User Guide Resolving plate inventory problems About this topic This topic describes how to check and test the Windows Open Database connection that is used by the VWorks inventory management system Checking the The inventory management database uses a Windows Open Database database settings Connectivity ODBC interface If you encounter inventory management problems you may need to check the database settings To check the database settings 1 In Windows navigate to Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Data Sources ODBC The ODBC Data Sources Administrator dialog bo
447. set the FlexiSpense M device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the FlexiSpence M generic device properties lef System E Flexispense M ty FlexM A Velocity11 Robot Py Robot eet device Initialize all devices ___Device diagnostics x Device Properties E General Device name FlexM Device type Flexispense M Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware Teachpoints Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes Teachpoint for robot Robot E Flexispense M properties Profile name Flexispence profile Expand the Flexispence M properties group If not already selected double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and select the FlexiSpense M profile from the list box 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager Opening FlexiSpence M device properties page Setting FlexiSpense generic device properties Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters Using FlexiSpense M Diagnostics 431 VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the FlexiSpense M on page 428 Adding devices on page 107 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties for a device Setting Fle
448. sing Before you start Before you start you must associate a VPrep shelf with the labware you will be using for the aspiration step of the mixing Procedure To set Mix pipette task parameters 1 In the pipette process window click to select the Mix pipette task icon 2 If you have defined a liquid class for the liquid you intend to mix select it from the Liquid class list box at the bottom of the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar 3 Complete the following properties Property Description Mixing volume The volume of liquid to be aspirated and dispensed to each plate well Number of mixing cycles The number of aspirate dispense operations Aspirate velocity The rate at which to draw up liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here 250 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 4 Property Aspirate acceleration Dispense velocity Dispense acceleration Distance from well bottom Retract distance Pre aspirate volume Last cycle blowout volume Description The rate of increase in velocity before the maximum aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here The rate at which to dispense the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liqu
449. sk parameters 1 Add the Vici Multiport Valve task to a protocol process j _ rPCR 384 Downstack from Wait Dest R Mei Valve to d Dest R Stacker 6 position 1 gt m o 3 Process 2 Seal for 2 seconds at 167 C 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the Multiport device you want to use from the Available 10 way valves list box 3 Inthe Position field enter the valve position you want on the Vici Multiport device Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Available 10 way valves F jici Valve 1 Position 500 Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using VWorks User Guide Related information For information about Configuring the Vici Multiport Valve Adding a device to the device manager Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring a Vici Multiport Valve on page 496 Adding devices on page 107 Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics on page 500 Using Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to use Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics to Q Manage profiles Q Manually operate the device The manual commands for the Vici Multiport Valve are typically used for initial setup and troubleshooting the device Procedure To manage profiles 1 Open the Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics 2 Click the Profile
450. sk parameters 243 Volumes Max volume 50 uL Transfer 10 uL Max volume 10 uL Transfer 10 uL Max volume 10 uL Transfer 50 uL VWorks User Guide Resulting aspirate dispense task pattern A single Aspirate task which removes 50 uL from the source and a single Dispense task which dispenses 10 uL to five columns Five Aspirate tasks interleaved with five Dispense tasks each using 10 uL Twenty five Aspirate tasks interleaved with 25 Dispense tasks each task using 10 uL 9 Click Next to go to step 3 of the Fill Plate Wizard and specify the aspirate and dispense properties Fill Plate Wizard xi Set the common aspirate parameters B Aspirate properties Pre aspirate volume UL Post aspirate volume UL Distance From well bottom mm Retract distance mm yL Liquid class Z axis aspirate velocity mm s Z axis aspirate accleration mm s Record in transfer log Step 3 Specify common aspirate and dispense parameters 0 0 1 0 lt None gt Set the common dispense parameters E Dispense properties Empty tips Blowout volume UL Post dispense volume uL Distance from well bottom mm Retract distance mm pL Enable tip touch Liquid class Z axis dispense velocity mm s Z axis dispense acceleration mm s Record in transfer log No lt None gt 90 75 Yes N a Enter the desired values for the Dispense and Aspirate tasks that will take place during the Fill Plate pip
451. ss 349 sealed thickness 349 sensor intensity 352 stacker gripper offset 351 352 stacking thickness 349 thickness 348 use vacuum clamps 352 velocity 364 365 well depth 355 well diameter 355 well geometry 355 well tip volume 355 well bottom shape 355 x teachpoint to well 355 x well to well 355 y teachpoint to well 355 y well to well 355 z axis acceleration into wells 364 365 z axis acceleration out of wells 365 z axis speed into wells 364 zaxis velocity into wells 365 zaxis velocity out of wells 364 365 protocol adding notes about 180 compiling 779 creating 164 creating example 222 creating workflow for 763 defined 30 filename 23 opening in VWorks 33 printing 57 saving 180 simulating 181 what you should know 56 Protocol Editor page 14 protocol file 579 VWorks User Guide protocol file format 162 protocol log file 47 519 example 52 protocol rules 44 Protocol Task Parameters toolbar 16 300 Protocol Tasks toolbar 75 pump inflow 263 outflow 263 Pump Reagent pipette task defined 252 JavaScript properties 284 setting parameters 252 Q OFill device properties setting 468 diagnostics using 470 profile for creating 467 workflow for configuring 466 QFill task defined 469 setting parameters 469 QFill2 supported instrument 12 quadrant 229 236 250 263 quadrant representation in JavaScript 274 querying devices 74 R r
452. st box at the bottom of the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar 3 Either Type the volume that you want to move out of each pipette tip in the Dispense Volume text box Select the Empty tips check box You may need to drag the toolbar to widen it so you can see the check box Select this option if you want to empty the tips rather than deliver a specific volume of liquid 4 Complete the remaining fields Field Description Dispense velocity The rate at which to dispense the liquid If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here 236 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide 5 Field Description Dispense acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the Dispense Velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor and cannot be edited here Distance from well bottom The distance between the bottom of the pipette tips and the bottoms of the plate wells or MicroWash tray chimneys If you are using dynamic tip retraction this value sets the lowest point to which the tips will travel Retract distance The distance that the tips should move upwards per unit volume of liquid being dispensed This value allows the tips to move upwards during dispensing to maintain a certain height above the surface of the liquid You will need to de
453. stination stage device properties About this topic Procedure This topic describes how to set the device properties for the Echo 550 destination stage This is where liquids are dispensed To set the Echo 550 destination stage device properties 1 Open the Echo 550 Device Properties page 2 Set the Echo 550 destination stage s generic properties Device List x Device Properties gt EchoDS General Labcyte Echo550 Source 4 Device name J em Echoss v Device type Labcyte Echo550 Destination Stage 4 gt Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Delete device Device is accessible from robot Robot No Trae al caves 3 Labcyte Echo550 Destination Stage Parent device lt no parent gt Device diagnostics EchoDS 3 Expand the Labcyte Echo 550 Destination Stage properties group 404 Chapter 18 Echo 550 Setting up and using VWorks User Guide 4 Select the parent to the destination stage a Double click in the field next to Parent device b Select the correct Echo 550 from the list 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Setting up devices Opening the device properties page Setting the generic properties Setting Echo 550 task parameters Using Echo 550 Diagnostics See Workflow for con
454. t If the orientation sensor offset is 0 mm the bottom of the plate during orientation checking should be in the same plane as the sensors Determines the highest intensity of the detected light at which the stacker senses a notch when the plate stage is in the orientation sensor position If the stacker does not sense a notch when it should adjust the sensor threshold value The maximum value is 255 Determines the lowest intensity of the detected light at which the stacker senses a notch when the plate stage is in the orientation sensor position If the stacker does not sense a notch when it should adjust the sensor threshold value Sets the percentage of maximum sensor intensity for all sensors If the sensor intensity is set too low a plate will not be detected even though one is present If it is set too high the sensors may become saturated causing failure to detect the orientation of a plate This property adjusts for the fact that clear black and white plates reflect light differently For example white plates generally reflect more light so the sensor intensity should be set lower Obsolete Related information Property Notch locations Check orientation For information about Opening the labware editor Creating a labware entry before defining it Defining general properties Defining plate properties What to do next Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions 353 VWorks User Guide
455. t mm 9 HumanRobot Allowed prohibited labware E Teaehpoints Device is accessible from robot HumanRobot Yes 3 Waste p l Delete device Initialize all devices Device diagnostics p Output number Sensor input number 0 Related information Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 125 VWorks User Guide To construct the protocol Create two processes in the Protocol Editor such as the ones in the following example Coming 384 aaa Black TC 3712 gt p s called Plate A anii i Coming 384 Black Place at Sub Process Transfer plate to TC 3712 called Multimek35 Frame uultimek 1 Manual Stack Greiner 384 la Black TC pr gt yp gt gt 781094 called a Plate B Greiner 384 Black Place at Sub Process Transfer plate to TC 781091 called hultimek35 Frame Qtultimek 1 Manual Stack Plate B 2 In the first process Plate A is placed by you the human robot in Frame 1 of the Multimek undergoes the pipette process aspirate and then is transferred to the device named ManualStack by you In the second process Plate B is placed by you in Frame 2 of the Multimek undergoes the pipette process dispense and then is transferred to ManualStack by you Create one pipette process in the Pipette Process Editor such as the one in the following example Sub Process ay H Multimek 1 on x _ gt It il i Multimek35 m i i Sub Process Fspirate 1
456. t mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware E Teachpoints Device is accessible From robot Human robot No Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes Teachpoint For robot Robot E Bar code Readers 5 multimek gt Delid Station vacuum gt DelidStation j Human Robot Human robot j Lid Hotel ff Lid Hotel Lid Hotel Storage Bay B A Velocity11 Robot My Robot Device has south side BCR No z Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No Delete device E Lid Hotel Storage Bay properties Parent device Lid Hotel 3 Expand the Lid Hotel Storage Bay properties group a Inthe field next to Sensor input number enter the number the lid hotel uses to detect this storage bay b Double click in the field next to Parent device and select the lid hotel with which the storage bay is associated 4 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save 130 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information For information about See Opening lid hotel storage bay Adding devices on page 107 device properties page Adding a device Adding devices on page 107 The workflow this topic belongs to Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Using the lid hotel tasks Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics Using Lid Hotel
457. t box 4 Click OK Related information For information about Configuring the Envision Adding a device to the device manager Adding tasks to protocols Using Envision Diagnostics See Workflow for configuring the Envision on page 412 Adding devices on page 107 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using Envision Diagnostics on page 417 Chapter 19 Envision setting up and using 417 VWorks User Guide Using Envision Diagnostics About this topic Procedures This topic describes how to 0 OOD Manage profiles Initialize a profile Move plates in to and out of the reader Run Envision protocols on the reader To manage profiles 4 Open Envision Diagnostics Click the Profiles tab Select a profile from the list box in the Current Envision Profile group box a To delete the profile click Delete profile and then click Yes in the alert message dialog box b To rename the profile click Rename profile c Enter the new name in the profile name dialog box and click OK d To edit the selected profile make the desired changes and click Save profile e To create anew profile with the same settings click Save profile as enter a name in the Save Profile As dialog box and click OK Click OK to close the dialog box To initialize an Envision profile 1 2 Open the Envision Diagnostics Select the profile you want to use from the Current Env
458. t causes a problem We therefore recommend that before using a script you run the simulator with each set of values that will be set by the script Running scripts cannot cause robot crashes because scripts cannot modify teachpoints However an incorrect task tipOffset property Distance from well bottom parameter on a VPrep could cause the pipette tips to crash into the bottom of the wells resulting in loss of sample and damage to plates In addition be aware that when a protocol is being compiled it uses the values displayed in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar screen and not the values that will be set by any scripts This means that there may be errors in the protocol that are not detected during compilation The values that appear in the Task Parameter toolbar do not change to reflect the effect of any script Also scripts do not check pipetting volumes before the run begins so you must make sure that the pipetting steps make logical sense For example you will not be alerted beforehand if a script will attempt to aspirate 1 mL from a plate well that can only hold 0 5 mL Example 1 This script prints the word hello to the log toolbar and log txt file print hello Example 2 This one line script opens an external file that could contain another script The new script is run immediately open C scripts scriptl txt Example 3 This script prints a list of the properties for the task to the log toolbar It is a
459. t script context erase all variables before protocol executes check box Pre protocol Rules Reset script context erase all variables before protocol executes O Automatically load stacker racks In JavaScript an array is a built in object that stores a collection of like values called elements Each element is accessed by an index value that is enclosed in square brackets Index values can be non negative integers or strings The following example script declares an array with three elements var vehicle type new Array 3 vehicle type 0 car vehicle type 1 truck vehicle type 2 van Because a plate is already an array of wells locations on plates quadrants are represented in Velocity11 JavaScript as an array of arrays for example the quadrant property of the task object for one task is represented as 1 1 In this representation the first number refers to the plate row and the second number refers to the plate column These numbers can be represented by variables in a script as shown in the following statement task quadrants disp row disp column For two quadrants the representation would be 1 1 1 2 Cautions Example scripts Script writing service Related information Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics 275 VWorks User Guide When you run a script that dynamically changes the values of task properties there is a risk that a value will be set tha
460. t this topic This topic describes how to create a profile for the Thermo Labsystems Multiskan Ascent reader in VWorks Before you start Before you can create a Multiskan Ascent profile you need to add the Multiskan Ascent device to the device manager Procedure To create a Multiskan Ascent profile 1 Open Multiskan Ascent Diagnostics 2 Click the Profiles tab Multiskan Ascent 2 0 0 Eg Control Profiles Select Profile _ _ Serial Port Multiscan Profile v cOoM1 Create a new profile Filter Name Associations Create a copy of this profile Filter 1 660 Filter 2 Rename this profile 7 Filter 3 Delete this profile Filter 4 2 3 4 Fiter5 5 6 Z 8 Update this profile Filter 6 Filter 7 Initialize this profile Filter 8 O verbose 3 Click Create a new profile and enter a name for the file in the New Profile dialog box 4 Click OK From the Serial port list box select the COM port the you are using to connect the Multiskan Ascent to the computer running VWorks 6 Enter filter name associations for the filters if desired a Click in the field adjacent to a filter in the Filter Name Associations group box and type in a name b Click Update this profile 7 Close the dialog box 450 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 23 Multiskan Ascent setting up and using For information about Profiles
461. ta are required by VWorks to complete a single pipetting task These range from the velocity at which to aspirate a liquid to the height at which the gripper should approach a plate that is sitting on a platepad These data are the configuration settings With the right privileges you can modify and add configuration settings to fine tune and extend the capabilities of your VWorks How you can modify configuration settings is discussed in other topics This topic uses the example of an Aspirate pipette task to provide the conceptual background you need to understand U The relationships between the device manager labware editor liquid library editor task parameters and protocol file Q What information is stored in a protocol Q Why you perform certain steps when creating protocols Q How to resolve protocol errors Before reading this topic it may help to read Configuring a pipette process example on page 2 This topic presents the same information from a different perspective The following diagram explains how information flows from the various data stores in VWorks into a single Aspirate pipette task that is stored as part of a protocol file Four main kinds of information are associated with a pipette task in a protocol file These are Q General task properties set in the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar Q Device information Q Labware information Q Liquid properties information This information is includ
462. tab ici alye Diagnostics ersion 4 0 0 Profile Command Profile Management Profile name Profile Options COM1 COM port 10 Number of positions 2 10 a Create a new profile Create a copy of this profile Rename this profile Delete this profile Update this profile Initialize this profile 3 Select the profile you want to manage from the Profile name list box Make changes to the profile if desired 4 Atthis point you may perform any of the operations displayed in the Profile Management group box by clicking on the appropriate button Chapter 29 Vici Multiport Valve setting up and using 501 VWorks User Guide To manually operate the device l Open the Vici Multiport Valve Diagnostics dialog box a Make sure the Device Manager page is showing and that the Vici Multiport Valve icon is selected in the Devices List b Click Device Diagnostics The Vici Multiport Valve dialog box opens Click the Commands tab ici alye Diagnostics ersion 4 0 0 Profile Command Reinitialize current profile Buen curent position El Current position Move to position Guerny number of position I Commanded position BEB Number of positions To move the valve to another position enter or use the arrows the desired position in the Commanded position field and then click Move to position Click Reinitialize current profil
463. tasks 778 environmental control adding an alarm 53 Envision device properties setting 475 diagnostics using 477 profile for creating 473 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 472 Envision task defined 476 setting parameters 416 equation editor using 368 errors bar code reader 522 causes about 37 518 notification of 40 374 Index 529 VWorks User Guide reporting 7 setting handling options 38 setting handling options for protocols 47 setting scheduler behavior options 38 Ethernet firewall 98 installing a direct connection 93 networking requirements 86 Ethernet connection choosing 85 workflow for 89 Ethernet switch 94 exiting VWorks 79 F file device 519 format for protocol 162 protocol 579 protocol log 579 File menu 19 FileReader plug in using 307 Fill Plate pipette task defined 239 setting parameters 240 fill test performing for AliQuot 386 Find button 4 finding plates 74 finding the file 3 firewall definition 98 passing data 99 program 98 Windows XP 98 first login 28 FlexiSpense device properties setting 427 diagnostics using 424 supported instrument 11 workflow for configuring 420 FlexiSpense task defined 422 setting parameters 422 FlexiSpense M device properties setting 430 diagnostics using 433 profile for creating 429 supported instrument 77 workflow for configuring 428 FlexiSpense M task defined 437 setting parameters 43
464. te a plate group This is the most efficient way to create plate group if you previously used a bar code input file to label a collection of plates which are now stored in a plate storage device Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 IMPORTANT All plates with bar codes listed in the selected bar code input file series must already be in the storage device To create a plate group with a bar code input file 1 Open the inventory editor 2 Click the Groups tab 3 Click the Browse button and navigate to the bar file that you want to use Create group From bar code file Available bar code groups X 4 From the Available Bar code groups list box select the group that you want to use In the following example of a bar code input file the options would be Setl and Set2 330 Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory VWorks User Guide ff BarcodeInputFile bar Notepad REG File Edit Format view Help lt name gt SetL NAWLOOL NAWLOO2 NAWLOO3 NAWLOO4 NAWLOOS5 NAWLOO6 NAWLOO NAWLOOS NAWwLOOS NAWLOLO lt name gt Set2 IGEN20021 IGEN20022 IGEN20023 5 Click Import The plates labelled with west side bar codes listed in the series will be used to create a group and will appear in the Plates currently in the selected group list 6 Specify a
465. te tips 234 defined 32 link icon 37 linking a pipette task to 227 setting parameters 226 Pipette Process Editor page 14 pipette process task adding 222 226 adding example 222 defined 37 pipette task defined 37 Pipette Task Parameters toolbar 17 Pipette Tasks toolbar 76 pipette tips changing 232 234 dryer 238 touching 264 washing 262 pipetting accuracy 366 piplog txt 47 Place Labware task setting parameters 205 Place Plate task defined 204 setting parameters 204 plate group 307 changing processing order 317 creating 316 creating with bar code input file 329 defined 372 deleting 317 incubating plates using 327 versus location group 326 plate group editor 306 plate icon definition 29 setting parameters 164 versus task 30 plate inventory see reinventory plate object JavaScript 277 Plate Pad configuring workflow 136 device properties setting 137 plate properties defining 348 PlateHub 378 device properties setting 770 with inventory manager 306 manually loading plates 320 moving plates between 324 profile for creating 110 robotically loading plates 379 robotically unloading plates 327 PlateLoc 11 device properties setting 135 profile for creating 133 see also Seal task workflow for configuring 732 PlatePierce 11 configuring workflow 138 creating a profile 139 device properties setting 140 see also Pierce task plates finding 74 moving between s
466. te volume The volume of air to be drawn up before the pipette tips enter the liquid Post aspirate volume The volume of air to be drawn up after the liquid is drawn up If the VPrep head has fewer tips than the plate has wells select a quadrant configuration from the Quadrant s diagram to indicate which well quadrant of the plate you want to aspirate from To select a quadrant click a representative well Two possible examples are shown below Quadrant s Quadrant s Oooo ooo ooo d coocoo eoo ooo ooo d ooog In the Plate to Aspirate from list box select the type of labware or device from which to aspirate If you do not want to record this dispense in the transfer log clear the Record in transfer log check box You might do this for example if you are running a casual test protocol 230 VWorks User Guide Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters For more information about Associating labware with a VPrep shelf Creating a pipette process Creating protocol basics Specific pipette tasks See Configuring a pipette process example on page 222 Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Setting Change Instance pipette task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Change Instance task parameters for a
467. tely moved to a quarantine station and a new plate takes the place of the quarantined plate in the processing sequence If the check box is selected plates that give a bar code misread are processed as normal but are then moved to quarantine instead of moving to the final destination specified in the protocol For information about See How to set the number of About setting the number of simultaneous plates simultaneous plates on page 167 The workflow that this procedure Workflow for creating a protocol on belongs to page 163 What to do next Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Plug ins About the FileReader plug in on page 298 Reading bar codes from file Using bar code input files on page 293 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics 167 VWorks User Guide About setting the number of simultaneous plates About this topic This topic provides some guidance on how to set the number of simultaneous plates in the Task Settings page See Setting up a plate icon on page 164 The number of simultaneous plates is the maximum number of plates belonging to a single process that are in the system at one time Plates that are in the system could be in the robot gripper on platepads VPrep shelves plate hotels and so on Simultaneous plates do not include counterweight plates Selecting the In general the number of simultaneous plates to select for a plate icon number depends on how many Q T
468. ter 8 Creating a protocol basics 181 VWorks User Guide Simulating a run About this topic This topic provides suggestions on how to check for errors in a protocol after it is compiled Simulating the run After making sure that there are no compiler errors in the protocol you can check for other types of problems by running the protocol through the simulator The simulator allows you to confirm that steps are done and sequenced correctly and to find problems such as Q Deadlocks Q Periods of inefficiency when the robot is not being used U Plates spending different times at critical steps when they should be run under identical conditions Q A number of simultaneous plates that is too high or too low The simulator does not move any instruments It performs a virtual run based on the estimated task execution times displayed for each task You can change the execution times for tasks to make the simulation more accurate for your protocol One approach you can use for testing is the following 1 Run the simulator with the default task execution times and the same number of plates expected for a run to identify deadlocks and rate limiting tasks Resolve any major problems with the protocol Perform a real dry run with a plate Use the times recorded in the Log toolbar to edit the task execution times for each task Run the simulator with the more accurate task execution times Fine tune the protocol based on the result
469. termine an appropriate value by trial and error for each type of plate you use You might want this value to be the same as the Tip Retract Distance for the Aspirate pipette task Blowout volume The volume of air to blow out when the tips are in the liquid This is typically the same as the pre aspirate volume Note Blowout only occurs in the last quadrant dispensed into for a given Dispense task Post dispense volume The volume of air to blow out when the tips are out of the liquid If the VPrep head has fewer tips than the plate has wells select a quadrant configuration from the Quadrant s diagram to indicate which well quadrant of the plate you want to dispense to To select a quadrant click a representative well Two possible examples are shown below Quadrant s Quadrant s ooog Oooo ooodc ogo ooo d oooc oooc ele hele Related information Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 237 VWorks User Guide 6 If you want the tips to touch one or more sides of the plate wells a Select the Enable tip touch check box b Type a value for the tip touch rise height This is the height that the tips should move upwards before touching the side of the wells c Type a value for the Tip touch horiz distance When the value for this parameter is zero the tips will move horizontally one well radius The well radius is defined in the labware database for the type of plate you are using If you want
470. ters on page 213 Setting Waitfor task and Signal task parameters on page 217 Bio Tek Washer Bio Tek Washer Setting the Bio Tek task parameters on page 392 Beckman Multimek Sub Process Device Driver User Pipettor Multimek Guide 170 VWorks User Guide Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics For this device or devices Cavro Pump Network Delid Station Vacuum FlexiSpense FlexiSpense M FLIPR Tetra Genetix Aliquot Genetix QFill Human Robot Innovadyne Nanodrop Labcyte Echo550 Labcyte Echo550 Destination Stage Labcyte Echo550 Source Stage Lid Hotel Lid Hotel Storage Bay Multidrop SoftMax Pro Reader Peak Robotics KiNEDx Robot And this task Aspirate Cavro Pump Dispense Cavro Pump Load Cavro Pump Prime Cavro Pump Transfer Cavro Pump Delid Relid FlexiSpense FlexiSpense M Sub Process FLIPR Tetra Aliquot OFill No tasks Nanodrop Echo550 No tasks Delid Relid Multidrop Perform read plate with Softmax Reader No tasks Find parameter information here Device Driver User Guide Setting Delid Relid task parameters on page 192 Setting FlexiSspense task parameters on page 422 Setting FlexiSspense M task parameters on page 431 Device Driver User Guide Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Setting QFill task parameters on page 469 Setting
471. terweight or two plates can be spun at one time Counterweights can be placed manually or robotically Procedure To set the Centrifuge task parameters 1 Add the Centrifuge task to a protocol process Y S Fitrate reservoir Downstack from Mount Filter1 Spin on Centrifuge called Butiont Stack for 20 seconds to 1200 RPM at 100 accel 100 braking 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar select the VSpin you want to use from the Available VSpins list and click Add The selected VSpin appears in the VSpins for this task will use list Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 191 VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Available VSpins Remove VSpins that this task will use 3 Set the spin parameters in the Process Control group box a Inthe Max velocity slide bar click and drag the slide bar pointer to the desired position This setting determines the g force and rpm of the spin b In the Max accel slide bar click and drag the slide bar pointer to the desired position This setting determines the rate at which the centrifuge reaches the maximum velocity c Inthe Max braking slide bar click and drag the slide bar pointer to the desired position This setting determines the rate at which the centrifuge stops d Enter a value for the Spin time by either double clicking in the field and entering a val
472. tes move through a protocol too fast for one of the steps An example is a pipetting step in which a reagent that starts a timed reaction is added to the plate The result is that plates queue up at the pipettor Without selecting the Start timer when previous plate finishes incubating check box plates are delivered to the plate hotel as fast as the robot can deliver them are incubated for the time specified in the Length of incubation text box and then leave as fast as the robot can remove them The robot may remove the plates as frequently as every 10 seconds With the Start timer when previous plate finishes incubating check box selected the time separation between each plate being picked up is specified by the value in the Length of incubation text box Using this function plates can leave the plate hotel and delivered to the pipettor every minute instead of every 10 seconds An alternative way to control the time at which plates are delivered to an instrument is to use the Release a new plate every x seconds parameter for the Downstack task 4 Ifyou want to restrict a device so it is not used as the place where the incubation takes place in the Available devices box select the device and click Exclude This may be useful if a particular platepad is used during multiple steps of the protocol Example Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide ask Parameters as
473. that you want the reservoir to contain A typical value is 45 If you are using a WeighShelf in the Max level text box enter the maximum percentage of liquid that you want the reservoir to contain A typical value is 60 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 253 VWorks User Guide Related information For more information about See Configuring a VPrep shelf Workflow for configuring a VPrep shelf on page 141 Using the Fill Plate task Setting Fill Plate pipette task parameters on page 239 Autofill configuration with the VPrep User Guide VPrep Setting Serial Dilution task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Serial Dilution task parameters for a Velocity 1 VPrep Serial Dilution task The Serial Dilution task allows you to set up a serial dilution on a defined microplate using a single task Configuring the Serial Dilution task settings is performed using a wizard which guides you through the setup process The end result is a series of Aspirate Dispense and Mix tasks that produce a linear or non linear concentration gradient in a selected microplate area Pipette head and The Serial Dilution task can be used with the following head plate microplate configurations configurations Q VPrep 8 channel head with a 96 384 or 1536 well microplate Q VPrep 16 channel head with 384 and 1536 well microplates Q VPrep 96 channel head with a 384 and 1536 well microplat
474. the AliQuot and QFill devices AliQuot Diagnostics xl Control AliQuot Profile Options COMport cOM1 Ba Timeout 5 300 sec a Enable filtration L AliQuot mode v p ee Delete Rename r Fill Test In the Profile group box click New Enter a name in the Create New Profile dialog box and click OK Create New Profile Eg New profile name Aliquot1 ae 380 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using VWorks User Guide Setting the profile attributes A profile defines the communication and other basic settings between the controlling computer and AliQuot device Changes to some of the other settings can be made in the AliQuot Diagnostics but these are not saved in a profile and are therefore lost when you exit VWorks The following settings are saved in an AliQuot profile Setting AliQuot mode AliQuot purge on or off AliQuot purge time AliQuot purge interval COM port Filtration port Diagnostics page Control AliQuot AliQuot AliQuot Control Filtration Comments The AliQuot check box must be selected in the profile Select On if you want to periodically push fluid through the lines This can remove blockages in the line Enter the duration of the purge operation Enter the time between purges This is the number of the serial port to which the AliQuot is connected If you have more than one AliQuot on your system you must select t
475. the VPrep shelf s generic properties x Device Properties Hef System jg Beckman Multimek Pipettor 5 multimek et Human Robot Human robot Es Shelf Filter S gt Shelf1 A Yelocity11 Robot E General Device name Device type E Teachpoints Shelf1 Shelf Filter Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware Device is accessible from robot Human robot No Device is accessible from robot Robot Yes Py Robot Teachpoint for robot Robot SF F Prep Precision Pipetting Station E Bar code Readers ry YPrep1 Device has south side BCR No A Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Delete device Device has east side BCR No B Shelf Filter properties Shelf number Parent device Initialize all devices 1 VPrep1 3 Expand the Shelf Type properties group a Double click in the field next to Shelf number and enter the number of the shelf you are configuring Each shelf type is associated with specific numbers For example reagent shelves have odd numbers with shelf 1 being at the top left Related information Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 143 VWorks User Guide b Double click in the field next to Parent device and select the VPrep associated with the shelf c If you are configuring a Shaking shelf type double click in the field next to COM port and select the port from the list that connects the shelf to the controlling com
476. the database connection and enabling plate tracking Database connection string Test amp Save O Enable plate tracking in simulation mode Event and error messages are displayed in the Log toolbar With all message options turned on a large number of messages are displayed For simplicity you can hide types of messages that are not important to you The messages that are displayed during a run are controlled by Q Selecting screen settings options in the Tools gt Options dialog box before a run Q Clicking tabs in the Log toolbar during a run Note Screen display settings do not affect the information saved in log files All error and event information is always saved To set log file options 1 Click Tools and select Options 2 Inthe VWorks Options dialog box click the Log Options tab 3 Inthe Screen settings group box select one or more of the following options as needed Log Option Writes to screen and file Log task begin events on screen Messages at the time that process tasks are scheduled not at the time that they are performed This applies only to the protocol log file 50 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide 4 Log Option Writes to screen and file Log task complete events on screen Messages that confirm when process tasks are completed This applies only to the protocol log file Log robot motions on screen
477. the message that you want to display a Type the message title in the top text box This appears in the process line b Type the message body in the bottom text box 4 If using a variable enter the name in the text box Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Enter a message to display to the user at this point in the protocol The protocol will be paused to display this message Message will appear First plate of the series only O Every 5 plates Last plate of the series only Message title User message title Message body This is the message bod w User data entry into variable named user_data For information about Creating scripts Creating a protocol Other tasks Adding tasks to protocols O Email notification See Using JavaScript in VWorks on page 269 Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting task parameters on page 169 Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 215 VWorks User Guide Setting Vacuum task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Vacuum task parameters associated with a vacuum station device Vacuum task defined The Vacuum task requires a vacuum plate and vacuum pump to be fitted to the lab automation system The task is used to perform a vacuum filtration with filter plates IMPORTANT Do
478. the system check the Plates enter the system sealed check box If you have only one instance of a plate type and want it to be used repeatedly select the Use single instance of plate check box For example you may have one source plate from which you want to repeatedly aspirate a given volume and dispense it into a different receiving plates 165 166 Chapter 8 Creating a protocol basics VWorks User Guide Related information 5 Inthe Bar code control sub page a If the incoming plates have bar codes select the appropriate Incoming plates have bar codes check box If you want to check the bar codes on the incoming plates against a series of bar codes in a bar code input file select the name of the bar code series you want to use Incoming plates have bar codes on south side Bar Codes NOT in file Bar Codes NOT in file Set Set2 A For more information about bar codes input from file see Related information 6 In the Special error handling sub page a Select one or more devices that you want to use as quarantine stations and click Add The device names are moved to the bottom quarantine list A quarantine station is a place that plates will be placed if the plate has a bar code mismatch error b Check or leave clear the Quarantine plate after process completed check box based on the following descriptions If the check box is left clear a plate that gives a bar code misread error is immedia
479. the type of plate or labware you are defining The properties on the Stacker sub page are described in the following screenshot and table VStack Parameters Notch Locations 0 00000 Stacker gripper offset mm O ai Notch Presentation offset mm ates 0 00000 Orientation sensor offset mm 20 Notch Notch O Orientation sensor threshold max O check orientation Orientation sensor threshold min 9 Sensor intensity Use vacuum clamp J Property Description Stacker gripper offset Adjusts the height at which the plate stage stops for the grippers to grip the plate with respect to the robot s Grip teachpoint Change this value only if the robot is not gripping the plates correctly 352 Chapter 13 Setting labware definitions VWorks User Guide Property Stacker gripper offset Presentation offset Orientation sensor offset Orientation sensor threshold max Orientation sensor threshold min Sensor intensity Use vacuum clamp Description Adjusts the height at which the plate stage stops for the grippers to grip the plate with respect to the VStack s Grip teachpoint Change this value only if the stacker is not gripping the plates correctly Adjusts the height of the VStack plate stage with respect to the presentation teachpoint of a VStack Adjusts the height at which the orientation checking sensors view the plate with respect to the VStack s sensor teachpoin
480. then apply less heat to dry the tips Procedure To set Dry Tips task parameters 1 Complete the following Parameters Description Initial heat Percentage of the maximum heat Initial heat time Time for which to apply the initial heat Final heat Percentage of the maximum heat Final heat time Time for which to apply the final heat starting when the initial heat time ends Related information For more information about See Creating a pipette process Adding and configuring a pipette process task on page 226 Creating protocol basics Workflow for creating a protocol on page 163 Setting pipette task parameters Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 239 VWorks User Guide Setting Fill Plate pipette task parameters About this topic Fill Plate pipette task defined When to use Before you start Example This topic describes how to set the Fill Plate pipette task parameters for a Velocity11 VPrep This task allows you to configure fluid transfer from a source reservoir to a series of columns or quadrants of a microplate all within a single task The setting of the fill parameters is done using a wizard which guides you through the setup process The purpose of the Fill Plate pipette task is to facilitate the use of the Serial Dilution task The Serial Dilution task uses a plate whose wells are filled wit
481. ther called device for labware2 where the labware type is specified in the Allowed prohibited labware device property 2 Create one device file where labware type is not specified then create a pre protocol for each protocol where the Place Labware task specifies the labware that must be used for the protocol 206 VWorks User Guide Procedure Related information Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices Set labware for protocol A Set labware for Place Plate type protocol A C321 at VPrep Standard Shelf Pre Post Protocol Task Param Task Settings Advanced Settings Which device would you like to use VPrep Standard Shelf z Click button to create a new process Set labware for protocol B Click button to create a new process Set labware for Place Plate type protocol B D698 at VPrep Standard Shelf Which location at this device would you like tc Default Location v What labware do you wantto place at this loc Plate type C321 X Pre Post Protocol Task Param m3 Task Settings Advanced Settings Which device would you like to use VPrep Standard Shelf z Which location atthis device would you like tc Default Location x What labware do you wantto place atthis loc Plate type D698 To set task parameters for the Place Labware pre protocol task l Click on the Place Labware icon and drag it from the pre protocol task list to the protoc
482. thod overview Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions VWorks User Guide This section gives an overview of the method you can use to measure pipetting accuracy It does not give a detailed procedure because that depends on exactly how you choose to conduct the experiment To calibrate a pipettor an independent method of measuring dispensed volume is required One method is to dispense a solution of fluorescein dye and measure the fluorescence emitted from each plate well IMPORTANT Whichever method you use verify that the error of the detection method is significantly smaller than the pipetting error Otherwise the error you detect may be due to the detection method and not the pipetting error The overall method is 1 Perform a series of pipetting operations in which different volumes are pipetted 2 Measure the volumes of dispensed liquid using the independent measuring method 3 In aspreadsheet program tabulate the dispense volumes that you set in the software against the measured volumes 4 Plot a graph with the set dispense volume on the y axis and measured dispense volume on the x axis The plot will be a curve reflecting the fact that absolute error is a function of the magnitude of the measurement 5 Use the statistical functions of the spreadsheet program to fit a curve to the data Your result may look like this y 9E 05x 0 0027x 1 0176x 0 1237 Measured Dispense Volume pL
483. tics Using WellMate Diagnostics on page 509 Using WellMate Diagnostics About this topic This topic describes how to use WellMate Diagnostics to Q Manage profiles Q Move the plate stage Q Execute dispense commands Managing profiles To manage profiles 1 Open WellMate Diagnostics 2 Click the Profile tab Profile Command Dispense Profile Operations Profile Options WellMate profile z COM 1 v COM port il 500 Pump speed Create anew poe 00 Fant 1000 elo Create a copy of this profile Stage speed 1700 fast 15000 slow Rename this profile Volume to prime on initialization 0 2499 uL Delete this profile Update this profile Initialize device using profile Cancel Ee Ber yo rar 3 Select the profile you want to manage from the Profile Operations list box Make changes to the profile if desired 510 Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using VWorks User Guide 4 Atthis point you may perform any of the operations displayed in the Profile Management group box by clicking the appropriate button Moving the plate To move the plate stage stage 1 Open the WellMate Diagnostics 2 Click the Command tab Profile Profile Move to home WellMate profile v Initialize selected profile Commands Move to prime area Move to 384 plate offset Guery plate type Column number 1 12 96 1 24
484. ting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Procedure 4 Excess volume from column 12 is transferred to waste To set the Fill Plate pipette task parameters l Drag the Fill Plate pipette task icon from the Pipette Task list in the Pipette Process Editor to the desired position in the pipette process In the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select the reservoir or plate that has the diluent source from the available source plates list Pipette Task Parameters x Task Settings Advanced Settings Select From available source plates Diluent Reservoir na Select from available destination plates Plate A Select from available wash plates Shelf v Select from available tip boxes Tip Shelf Launch fill plate wizard Select the destination plate usually the serial dilution plate for the diluent from the available destination plates list If you are washing tips and you have more than one washing location select the wash source from the available wash plates list If you are changing tips during the fill task and you have more than one tip box location select the tip box source from the available tip boxes list Click Launch fill plate wizard Configure the type of transfer Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters 241 VWorks User Guide Fill Plate Wizard xi Step 1 Specify the type of transfer What is the type of transfer from Diluent Reservoir to Plate A 1
485. tion b Click Select none c Inthe number matrix click the numbers corresponding to the columns to dispense into In the following example liquid will be dispensed into columns 2 4 6 and 8 of a 384 well plate Entire plate Specific columns Select All Clear All 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 Related information Chapter 22 Multidrop setting up and using 443 VWorks User Guide For information about See Configuring the Multidrop Workflow for configuring the Multidrop on page 438 Adding the Multidrop to the Adding devices on page 107 device manager Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Using Multidrop Diagnostics Using Multidrop Diagnostics on page 443 Using Multidrop Diagnostics About this topic Managing profiles Before you start This topic describes how to use Multidrop Diagnostics to manage profiles and to manually operate the device one action at a time To modify an existing profile 1 Open the Multidrop Diagnostics 2 Select the profile you want to edit from the list box in the Profile Settings group box 3 Make the desired changes to the profile 4 Click Save To delete a profile 1 Open the Multidrop Diagnostics 2 Select the profile you want to delete from the list box in the Profile Settings group box 3 Click Delete 4 Click Yes in the message alert dialog box
486. tion For information about Opening Lid Hotel Diagnostics Adding a device The next step Setting lid hotel s generic properties The workflow this topic belongs to Using the lid hotel tasks Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics See About diagnostics software on page 104 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the lid hotel storage bay device properties on page 129 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 Workflow for configuring the lid hotel on page 126 Setting Load Unload and Incubate at storage device task parameters on page 198 Using Lid Hotel Diagnostics on page 130 Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 129 VWorks User Guide Setting the lid hotel storage bay device properties About this topic This topic describes how to set the device properties for the lid hotel storage bay Every lid hotel has 10 bays slots available for storing lids Each bay that you want to use needs to be added to the device manager and configured as a child of its parent lid hotel Before you start Before you start setting the properties for the storage bays you need to add them to the device manager Procedure To set the lid hotel storage bay s device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the lid hotel storage bay s generic properties ax Device Properties General Device name LidStaorage Device type Lid Hotel Storage Bay Approach heigh
487. tocol editor It has associated parameters that are defined in the Task Parameters toolbar The information it represents includes the type of labware used in the process how many plates are available for processing at one time whether the plates have lids and so on The following example icon represents a plate icon for a tipbox gt VI1 Tip Box 96d60 called Test A task is an operation that is performed on one or more plates and is represented by an icon in the protocol editor It has associated parameters that are defined in the Task Parameters toolbar The following example icon represents a task for upstacking or downstacking plates Upstack to stacker 30 Chapter 3 Preparing for a run VWorks User Guide Process defined How a plate icon and task differ Protocol defined Pre protocol defined A process is a sequence of tasks that are performed on a plate icon The following diagram shows a process with one plate icon and four task icons 1536 Greiner E _ Chaat J i J Polystyrene Melee H P called unnamed 1536 Greiner Black Downstack from Bar code plate Pipette process 1 Upstack to 4 Polystyrene called stacker1 stacker Remove Plate 1 Although the icon for a plate icon looks like a task icon its function is different because it does not represent an action in a protocol This distinction becomes important when you are interpreting error messages Consider the f
488. torage devices 324 PlateStak device properties setting 110 profile for creating 770 supported instrument 12 plug in using the FileReader 307 post aspirate delay property 365 post dispense delay property 365 post dispense volume 236 Post Protocol Editor page 14 Post Protocol Editor tab showing 27 post protocol process defined 37 setting up 268 Pre Post Protocol Task Parameters toolbar 18 Pre Post Protocol Tasks toolbar 17 pre aspirate volume 263 preparing runs workflow for 26 Pre Protocol Editor page 13 Pre Protocol Editor tab showing 27 pre protocol process defined 30 setting up 268 pre protocol rules 43 presentation offset property 352 printing a protocol 57 privileges defined 370 effect of 370 types 370 process defined 30 profile 23 profile defined 22 103 Progress page 13 property acceleration 364 365 can be mounted 350 Can be sealed 349 Can have lid 349 can mount 350 Index 533 VWorks User Guide check orientation 353 disposable tip length 355 length of filter tip pin tool 350 lid departure height 350 lid gripper offset 349 lid resting height 349 lidded stacking thickness 349 lidded thickness 349 lower plate at VCode 350 maximum robot handling speed 350 notch locations 353 Orientation sensor offset 352 orientation sensor threshold 352 post aspirate delay 365 post dispense delay 365 presentation offset 352 sealed stacking thickne
489. tting Teleshake task parameters on page 482 Using Teleshake Diagnostics Using Teleshake Diagnostics on page 483 Setting Teleshake task parameters About this topic This topic describes how to set the Teleshake task parameters Teleshake task There are two types of Teleshakes defined Q Standard Q High Speed For a standard Teleshake the Teleshake task moves a plate toa Teleshake plate shaker and shakes it for a specified time in a specified direction and at a specified speed The high speed Teleshake task is the same except that it does not specify a direction Procedure To set standard Teleshake parameters 1 Click the Teleshake task icon in the Protocol Tasks list and drag it to the desired place in the protocol process window 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameter toolbar enter a number in the RPM text field to indicate the speed of the shaking 3 Select the direction of shaking from the Direction list box Directions are specified using the points of the compass and can be in a circular motion for example NWSE or in a back an forth motion for example NS 4 Inthe Duration text field enter the duration in milliseconds to shake To set high speed parameters Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using 483 VWorks User Guide 1 Click the Teleshake high speed task icon in the Protocol Tasks list and drag it to the desired place in the protocol process window 2 Inthe Protocol Task Parameter too
490. ue or clicking the arrow buttons to increment the time The Spin time is the total time for centrifuging at full speed Process Contiol_ _ lt lt Max velocity Max accel Max braking 1200 RPM 402 59 E 40 100 100 foo 00 nE Spin time 4 Select one of the counterweight options Counterweight Selection Spin two protocol plates Use a counterweight manually inserted counterweight a Ifyou are spinning two protocol plates at the same time select Spin two protocol plates 192 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Related information b If you are spinning one protocol plate at a time select Use a counterweight and make sure that you place the counterweight before the protocol starts For information about Loading and balancing plates Adding tasks to protocols See VSpin User Guide Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Configuring a VSpin Workflow for configuring the VSpin on page 151 Configuring a VSpin with Access2 Workflow for configuring the VSpin with Access2 on page 154 Using the VSpin VSpin User Guide Setting Delid Relid task parameters About this topic Delid Relid task defined Example Procedure This topic describes how to set the Delid Relid task parameters The Delid task removes a plate s lid using a device such as a plate hotel or vacuum delidding stat
491. up Double click in the field next to Profile name and select the correct profile from the list 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and selecting Device File gt Save Related information For information about The workflow this topic belongs to Opening VPrep s device properties page Setting up a device Saving the device file VPrep tasks Using VPrep Diagnostics Chapter 7 Configuring Velocity11 devices 151 VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the VPrep on page 148 Adding devices on page 107 Workflow for setting up devices on page 106 Adding devices on page 107 Setting pipette task parameters on page 173 VPrep User Guide Workflow for configuring the VSpin About this topic This topic presents the workflow for configuring the VSpin in VWorks The VSpin is a microplate centrifuge that is intended to be integrated with a robotic lab automation system using VWorks It is not designed for manual use and using it in this manner is not recommended Workflow Step Topic 1 Adding devices on page 107 Creating a VSpin profile on page 152 2 3 Setting the generic properties for a device on page 112 4 Setting VSpin device properties on page 153 Related information For information about Setting up a device Saving the device file VSpin tasks Using VSpin Diagnostics See Workflow for setting up
492. ure This topic describes how to set the WellMate s device properties The device properties provides VWorks with additional information about the WellMate s current configuration The device property settings are stored in the device file To set the WellMate s device properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Set the WellMate generic device properties DIES Device Properties Eg System E General gt Beckman Multimek Pipettor Delid Station Vacuum Human Robot Lid Hotel Lid Hotel Storage Bay ae Ultramark s Ultramark Velocity11 Robot Wellmate Dispenser Device name Device type A E Teachpoints Wellmate Wellmate Dispenser Approach height mm 9 Allowed prohibited labware Device is accessible from robot Human robot Device is accessible from robot Robot Teachpoint for robot Robot E Bar code Readers amp Wellmate Device has south side BCR No __Newdevice O Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Delete device Device has east side BCR No ___Initiaize alldevices Wellmate Dispenser properties Profile name WellMate profile 3 Expand the Wellmate Dispenser properties group 4 Double click in the field adjacent to Profile name and choose a profile from the list box Related information Chapter 30 WellMate setting up and using 507 VWorks User Guide 5 Save the device settings by clicking File and se
493. ut of a storage device Incubating plates Using bar code input files See Creating a location group on page 313 Opening the inventory editor on page 310 Q Moving plates into a storage device on page 318 Q Moving stored plates out of the system on page 321 Q Moving plates between storage devices on page 324 Using a plate group to incubate plates on page 326 Creating a plate group with a bar code input file on page 329 Moving plates into a storage device About this topic Who should read this Before you start Ways to fill a storage device This topic describes how to add plates into the system for storage in a plate storage device You would do this when first filling the device Adding plates into the system means more than just loading them into a storage device It means adding the plate identifications into the record that VWorks keeps of plates in the system Read this topic if your lab automation system has a Liconic StoreX incubator Heraeus Cytomat PLC or Velocity11 PlateHub Before reading this topic read VWorks inventory overview on page 306 There are two ways to fill an empty storage device with plates LI Robotically Q Manually Loading plates robotically Chapter 12 Using the VWorks inventory 319 VWorks User Guide To load plates robotically the plates are placed in a stacker downstacked and moved to the storage device
494. ve Related information For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Opening Remp CSP device properties Setting the generic device properties Adding a device to the device manager Setting Remp CSP task parameters Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using 477 VWorks User Guide See Workflow for configuring the Remp CSP on page 474 Adding devices on page 107 Setting the generic properties fora device on page 112 Adding devices on page 107 Setting Remp CSP task parameters on page 477 Setting Remp CSP task parameters Remp CSP task defined Procedure Related information For information about The workflow this procedure belongs to Adding a device to the device manager The Remp CSP task moves a plate to the Remp CSP device There are no adjustable settings for the Remp CSP task See Workflow for configuring the Remp CSP on page 474 Adding devices on page 107 478 Chapter 26 Remp CSP setting up and using VWorks User Guide 479 VWorks User Guide Teleshake setting up and using This chapter is for people with Administrator or Technician privileges It describes how to configure the Teleshake device set the Teleshake task parameters and use Teleshake Diagnostics 480 Chapter 27 Teleshake setting up and using VWorks User Guide Workflow for configuring the Teleshake About this topic This topic giv
495. want bar codes on the tip boxes to be read and compared with a bar code input file during a run h If the tip boxes have a bar code on the west side select the second Incoming plates have a bar code check box Select the Downstack task in the protocol process window Set the Downstack task parameters Select the Pipette Process task in the protocol process window Set the Pipette Process task parameters If you only intend to add tips during this process delete the Transfer plate to trash task Add any other tasks that you want to for the tip box You could for example add an Apply Label task to place a bar code on the tip box 234 Chapter 10 Setting VPrep pipette task parameters VWorks User Guide Creating the Pipette Process for changing tips Related information After you have created a process for the tip box create a pipette process for the Change Tips pipette task To create a pipette process for changing tips 1 2 3 Click the Pipette Process Editor tab Add a Change Tips pipette task to the pipette process window In the Pipette Task Parameters toolbar select either Option With this option during the protocol Q Press On New Tips Puts tips on to a VPrep head Q Tips off Removes tips from a VPrep head From the Select the tip box to use list box select the name of the tip box that you have assigned to the tip box process Add other pipette tasks including a second Change Tips pip
496. with Access 2 task parameters task defined Access2 task 1 parameters 9 3 4 5 Add the VSpin with Access 2 task to a protocol process In the Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar select a VSpin from the Select a VSpin with Access 2 to use list box Set the desired options in the Load Plate group box a Enter the Gripper Z offset mm for the plate you are using This value is the distance from the bottom of the plate to where the Access2 grippers will grab the plate Typically this value is the same as the robot gripper offset If you don t want to use the plate sensor on the Access2 select the Ignore optical plate sensor check box If you are using flexible plates such as PCR plates select the Grip gently check box Set the spinning parameters in the Spin Plate group box Enter a value for the Velocity Acceleration and Deceleration These parameters are calculated as a percentage of the maximum value possible Maximum speed is 3000 rpm For more information see the VSpin User Guide Set the spin duration a Choose a Timer mode option Total time includes the time it takes the VSpin to accelerate to the target speed and decelerate to a stop Time at speed only includes the time that the rotor is at the target speed Enter the spin duration The format for the timer is hours minutes seconds Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices 217 VWorks
497. with a device Only the devices that are accessible by robots are able to have teachpoints To set the teachpoint properties 1 Open the Device Properties page 2 Expand the Teachpoints property group E Teachpoints Device is accessible from robot robot Yes Teachpoint for robot robot 3 Double click in the field next to Device is accessible from robot robot s name 4 Select Yes A new property Teachpoint for robot robot s name appears 5 Double click in the adjacent field and select the teachpoint from the list box 114 Chapter 6 Setting up devices VWorks User Guide Setting bar code Related information If your device has a bar code reader indicate where the reader is located To set the bar code readers property 1 Expand the Bar Code Readers property group E Bar code Readers Device has south side BCR Yes South side BCR COM port Device has west side BCR No Device has north side BCR No Device has east side BCR No reader 3 Select Yes Double clicking in the field next to the side that has the bar code A new property direction side BCR COM port appears reader is connected For information about Adding a device to the device manager Opening the Device Properties page Setting device specific properties Creating a profile Setting up devices The workflow that this procedure belongs to In the adjacent field enter the COM port number to which the See
498. x opens zixl UserDSN System DSN Fie DSN Drivers Tracing Connection Pooling About System Data Sources Add Remove Configure Ramee MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver An ODBC System data source stores information about how to connect to the indicated data provider A System data source is visible to all users on this machine including NT services Cancel Help Click the System DSN tab Click Configure The MySQL ODBC version Driver dialog box opens showing the database settings Chapter 32 Maintenance and troubleshooting 525 VWorks User Guide MySQL ODBC 3 51 Driver DSN Configuration ersion 3 51 06 This dialog helps you in configuring the ODBC Data Source Name that you can use to connect to MySQL server m DSN Information Data Source Name i Description Msa ODBC 3 51 Driver DSN MySQL Connection Parameters D Host Server Namefor IP localhost 7 p S Database Name veloci M y S QL User rr Password Port if not 3306 F306 Sane ere Cancel Options gt gt Test Data Source Help The Data Source Name and Database Name fields must both contain velocity11 Testing the To test the database connection connection 1 Follow the procedure in Checking the database settings on page 524 to open the MySQL ODBC version Driver dialog box 2 Click Test Data Source A dialog box like the following example confi
499. xample water vs DMSO Volumes of liquids For example 1 uL vs 200 uL Liquid operations For example washing vs mixing To create a liquid class 1 Open the liquid library editor Click New liquid entry In the New Liquid Entry dialog box enter a name for the liquid class and click OK In the Note text box at the top right type a note describing the liquid library entry for your records Enter values for the aspirate properties The following table describes these properties Aspirate property Definition Velocity Specifies the speed of the aspiration stroke in microliters per second Acceleration VPrep only Specifies acceleration during the aspiration stroke in microliters per second squared Z axis velocity into wells Specifies how fast the pipettor moves as the tips enter the wells in millimeters per second Z axis acceleration into wells VPrep only Specifies the acceleration of the pipettor as the tips move into the wells in millimeters per second squared Z axis velocity out of wells Specifies how fast the tips leave the wells in millimeters per second Chapter 14 Setting liquid handling definitions 365 Aspirate property Z axis acceleration out of wells Post aspirate delay VWorks User Guide Definition VPrep only Specifies the acceleration of the pipettor as the tips move out of the wells in millimeters per second squared Specifies the time the pipettor waits after aspiration is
500. xis speed into wells property 364 z axis velocity into wells property 365 z axis velocity out of wells property 364 365 Zeiss Plate Vision reader device properties setting 575 supported instrument 12 workflow for configuring 514 Zeiss Plate Vision reader task defined 576 setting parameters 516 538 Index VWorks User Guide AE Agilent Technologies User Guide G5415 90001
501. xispense M task parameters on page 431 Using Flexispense M Diagnostics on page 433 Setting FlexiSpense M task parameters About this topic FlexiSpense M task defined Procedure This topic describes how to set the FlexiSpense M task parameters The FlexiSpense M task moves a plate to the FlexiSpense device where a dispense is initiated To set the FlexiSpense M task parameters 1 Add the Flexispense task to a protocol process 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar choose an operation Note The prime function is for pre protocol processes and the dispense function for protocol processes a Ifyou select Dispense only select the program you want to run from the Program number to run list box Programs can be composed and then stored using the FlexiSpense M device itself These programs can also be changed and created using VWorks software To edit or create a program click List programs to open the Flexispense Diagnostics dialog box b If you select Prime only enter the volume in microliters with which you want to prime 432 Chapter 21 FlexiSpense M setting up and using VWorks User Guide Protocol Task Parameters Task Settings Advanced Settings Dispense only Program number to run 1 te Prime only Prime volume 0 3 Select the FlexiSpense M device that you want to use a Select the desired FlexiSpense M from the Available devices
502. xt box in the West tab of the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar A number that corresponds to the bar code format that you want For information about formats see the VCode User Guide The number of alphanumeric characters that you want to be appended to the root data The number that you want to be printed on the first label 0 for numeric increments 1 for alphanumeric increments 0 for no bar code verification 1 for bar code verification The number of attempts made to verify a bar code Copies the bar code from this side of the plate 0 South 1 West 2 North 3 East 0 No label 1 Use this label 2 South 3 West 4 North 5 East 278 Chapter 11 Creating a protocol advanced topics VWorks User Guide Aspirate task The JavaScript Aspirate task properties are listed below along with the data type of the property the names of the corresponding aspirate properties in the Protocol Task Parameters toolbar and a reference to more information Property Data type Task parameter Comments task plateName String Plate name The name of the plate Read only task acceleration Float Aspirate acceleration The rate of increase in velocity before the maximum aspirate velocity is reached If you selected a liquid class this value is entered automatically from the liquid library editor task liquidClass String Liquid class list box The name of the liquid class task postAspirateVolume Float
503. y is too short the robot may crash Related information For information about See Adding tasks to protocols Adding a task or pipette task on page 168 Adding a device Adding devices on page 107 Configuring the AliQuot Workflow for configuring the AliQuot on page 378 Setting AliQuot task parameters Setting the AliQuot task parameters on page 384 Using AliQuot Diagnostics Using AliQuot Diagnostics on page 385 Performing a fill test Performing a fill test on page 386 Chapter 16 AliQuot setting up and using 385 VWorks User Guide Using AliQuot Diagnostics About this topic Procedure You can use the AliQuot Diagnostics to manage profiles and run a test fill This topic describes how to edit delete and rename profiles Open the Control page of the AliQuot Diagnostics dialog box 1 Open AliQuot Diagnostics 2 Select AliQuot mode 3 Click the Control tab To modify an existing profile 1 From the Profile list box of the Control tab select the desired profile 2 Edit the profile settings and click OK to save and close the dialog box or click Apply to initialize the device with the modified profile To create a profile based on an existing profile 1 From the Profile list box of the Control tab select the profile you want to copy Click Save As In the Save Profile As dialog box replace the name with a new one and click OK 4 Edit the profile settings and
504. you have more than one Echo 550 on your lab automation system select the one you want to use in the Echo 550 device list box In the Echo 550 protocol list box select the name of the Echo 550 protocol that you want to run Select the labware type that you want to use for the source plates in the Echo 550 labware list box Note The labware definition you are selecting is an Echo 550 definition and not a Velocity11 labware database definition If you want the stage to stop at every well as it performs the transfer clear the Use fast fly by transfer mode check box The default alternative is a single scan of every row of the plate If you want to survey a random sample of wells instead of every well select the Perform a fast survey check box A well survey records reflection amplitudes from the microplate and fluid surfaces the results of which are use to optimize the delivered acoustic transfer wave 3 Configure the Echo 550 task for the destination plates Protocol Task Parameters x Task Settings advanced Settings Type of Transfer Standard Chery pick Transfer Parameters Use process label Process 1 Echo550 device echo550 Echo550 protocol Echo550 labware oie cherry pick file Source or destination O Source Destination E Use fast fiy by ti E Ferom a fasts sfer mode Select the Destination option Make sure that the name in the Use process labe
505. you specify starts timing 3 The plate is moved from the platepad to a reader The plate is moved when the incubation time parameter that you specify ends 196 Chapter 9 Setting task parameters for Velocity11 devices VWorks User Guide Incubation time error Procedure The time parameter that you set for the incubation period is not the actual time of incubation It represents the minimum time that the plate sits on the platepad where the incubation task is carried out The actual incubation period starts when the initiating reagent is added and continues until the plate is transferred to the next step in the process This means that the actual incubation is longer than the time parameter that you set by an amount that depends on the scheduling and operating speed of the robot If your assays require greater precision in plate incubation times than this method supports you can adjust the rate at which plates enter the system To set incubation parameters 1 Add the Incubate task to a protocol process window 2 Inthe Task Settings page of the Protocol Task Parameter toolbar type the length of time for which you want the plate to incubate on the platepad 3 Ifyou need to control the rate at which plates are delivered to a particular instrument incubate the plates on a plate hotel or similar short term storage device and select Start timer when previous plate finishes incubating A situation can arise in which pla

Setting up and using - Agilent Technologies

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents